Loading...
MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT - 08-0064-PRClearwater v PARKS & RECREATION DEPARTMENT CITY & ARCHITECT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT CONTRACT # 08-0064-PR 532 MANDALAY AVE. Clearwater, Florida 33767 MARCH 25, 2010 1 1 ACORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OP ID S1 DATE(MMIDDMYY) CER8U-1 05/28/10 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE Wallace Welch & Willingham Inc HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 300 1st Ave. So., 5th Floor ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. St. Petersburg FL 33701 Phone: 727-5Z2-7777 Fax:727-521-2902...._..-.-. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED INSURER A: Vinings Insurance Company INSURER 8: Association Insurance Co. POrtus Builders , Inc. i uRERC: Travelers In uR demnity Co. - Box 13599 Tampa FL 33681-0599 ER D: INSURER E: rnVFRAP.FR THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INS ..."' POLICY NUMBER LTR NSR TYPE OF INSURANCE I:CFECTNE-' POdCYEXPIRATTON ; . - DATE N DATE MMIDDIYY LIMITS I E ` U 81000000 ' N A X _COMMERCIAL GENERALUA8ILITY GLP007515400 "GAM SUS RENTED 05/28/10 05/28/11 MI iDASS E® ? ~ $ 10000__0__ CLAIMS MADE ', X I OCCUR I MED I- XP (Any cne person) $5000 X Contractual Liab PERSONAL& ADV INJURY $1000000 GENERAL AGGREGATE s2000000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER:: PRODUCTS -COMP/OPAGG $2000000 7RO- - POLICY 7-1 SENT LOC - --------,----..... _- '--------._...._. . i AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY C DSINGLELIMIT CO BIKE $ 1000000 C I X ANYAUTO BA2247R753 aaccid N) 05/28/10 05/28/11 I ----, ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY -- SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) C X HIREDAUTOS BODILY INJURY C , }( NON- WNEDAUTOS (Par accident) 8 PROPERTY DAMAGE 8 . 1 (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ ANY AUTO OTHER THAN !EA ACC _ $ .. AUTO ONLY: AGG : $ ....- E7LCESSIUMBRELLA LIABILITY t-, EACH OCCURRENCE 8 OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE -- _.. '. $ i _ a DEDUCTIBLE is RETENTION 8 8 WORKERS COMPENSATION AND WC $TATU- 10 - X TORY LIMITS X E B ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE WCV008578600 _ _ 05/28/10 05/28/11 E_LEACH ACCIDENT $ 1.000000 OFFICERIMEMBEREXCLUOED7 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE 81000000 Has describe under SGIAL PROVISIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT . 8 10 0 0 0 0 0 OTHER I DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS RE: Mandalay Park Restroom Renovation Project #08-0064-PR. The City of Clearwater is Additional Insured with respects to General Liability including completed operations and Automobile Liability if required by written contract. A Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the City of Clearwater applies to General Liability, Automobile Liability and Workers' 77]]]] CERTIFICATE HOLDER [_AN[:FI 1 ATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 30* DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL City of Clearwater 100 S. Myrtle Avenue, #200 IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR Clearwater FL 33756 REPRESENTArnE$. ALIT D RESE E PALiUKLI L9 Icuu1IU61 ... 9 ACORD CORPORATION 1988 IJi1:101Alcl.kl1 If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. AcoRU 25 (20I)IM6) NOTEPAD. NHOLDER CODE SURED% NAME Certus Builders , Inc. CERBU-1 PAGE 3 OPID S1 DATE 05/28/10 Compensation if required by written contract. *30 day notice of cancellation applies except for non-payment of premium which 10 days notice of cancellation applies.. AFFIDAVIT I, Dean A. Sumner, CEO of Certus Builders, Inc. swear that by signature I am authorized to bind the corporation of Certus Builders, Inc. Dean A. Sumner Chief Executive Officer Certus Builders. Inc. LANA LEE RALEY Notary Public • State of Florida • .; My Comm. Expires Aug 9.2018 Commieelon • DD 915109 goaded TMauah Nadanal Nohrr Assn. I ADDENDUM NO. 1 1 DATED: April 13, 2010 TO THE DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL FOR: CITY OF CLEARWATER PROJECT: Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement PROJECT NO. 1.18-0064-PR DATED: March 25,2010 PREPARED. BY. PARKS ANDRECREATION DEPARTMENT 100 S. MYRTLE AVE. CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 3375 PHONE: 727-562-IM FAX: 727-562-4825. THIS ADDENDUM NO..1 ISSUED TO CLARIFY, DRAWING SHEETS, SECTION 1V TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND QUESTIONS FROM PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS FOR MA.NDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT- PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PROF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THIS WORK, THIS ADDENDUM CONSTITUTES A PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM ON THE PROPOSAL FORM. PART I PROJECT MANUAL Item No. 1: Pre-Bid Meeting Sign In Sheet 1. Attached are 5 pages of the pre-bid sign in. sheets.. Item No. 2. Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting 1. Park & Recreation Department senior administration staff decided the a second pre-bid meeting will not be held project and this project Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement Project No. 08-0064-PR did not require it to be a mandatory meeting. .2. Advertisement of Bids ,& Notice to Contractors: Change in wording; `Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified' change to 'Contractors that are City pre-qualified'. (see attached document) Item No. 3: Last Date Day for Submission of Project Questions.by Prospective Bidders L Last day questions accepted for Mandalay Park. Restroom Replacement Project No. 08-0064-PR 10.00 AM Wednesday, April 21, 201.0 no other questions will be accepted after this time and date. (questions sent in writing-to: 1 1 [J 1 Parks & Recreation Department Leroy Chin - Park, Planning & .Project Manger E-mail: l=v,.. in )myclearwgter.com Fax: 727-224-7101 Mail: P. O. Box 4736 Clearwater, FL 337584748 Item No. 4: Pre-Bid Conference Meeting Minutes L Attached 4 pages of the pre-bid meeting minutes. Item No. 5: Revisions to Scope of Work 1. As shown in the Pre-bid Meeting Minutes_ Item No. 6: Section V Contract Bond & Bid Form pages 14 & 15 has been revised and shall be utilized when contractor is submitting his proposal 1. Corrections to quantities as discussed in the pre-bid meeting. It is noted scope of work items not specifically stated in the bill of quantities shall be included by the successful bidder somewhere within the bill of quantities line items and everything shown on the on the drawings shall be inclusive on the cost provided by the successful bidder awarded the contract. END OF ADDENDUM NO. I f 1-1 fl u 1 W r? v? Z Z 3zo wWo U ? c? a © U F. a V ? 4 CL, ? a J ww L gg 10 o? W U i x a ? w }• 4 s D A.: .u cr M C) ch SI Lid F?i v Q? N Q:? 6i Q w ~ a 4 '' V °xQo a? ? a E c fn M M M p V1 Oi Cti C u o 13 v ? G K T g.o 00 q ' W A A C4 fq n N N ?.a w?w cwww aww aww aUw www aww a,?w a E 4p) Vi L V .a h w a o 4 a w a w s w w z d v v ? ?? d z z U a w w _ _......_.. ............. ..._.._....---.. - ?__ .._.Y.. .... ........... ...? W.........__? 1 N W x ?w ??ma dew F 0 v ? Aa i a?+ U a 40 Am V W o a r V a U 0 ?' C4 w Q G. a? O E?-? U r ?w p ii.. `emu .,( '?{{{g ?}- ?1Y {[ IS ,gy LRt ? i i{'? ` y .(X eltn It C7 Px S.N ? i t n i w o {o I nt q CC CQ ?f ?WW; C WL p? WG ? 4f? .00 0 a;4 Ftii r r •i r t 0.. raw i `i 4 ? ? +f LIL. ?' ?? r m Q r o{ ? , "t? ?? 1- V v ?/t rr ` I t?J ?^2(j \ i^ titiwww]]] ??w / ? ? w S. 94 . VI •-: W r: - 1 1 F W ? F Z.9 3z0 C4 Z F U ?7J a W U I a a y W I O ? L{ v Z v ? ?W w F ..ey o ? ?g m d .? a Q n? ?WQ X00 Z 19 r ?O ?? ?J ?? r { ? ? , ? ? • W ? ? "WSJ W - ?L f 4? C% N ?^ 0 r+ r : a A•i Wf? ?7 W A Wf? 0.Wf f?f + W 4 .. r .. . . ?+ r? ? . 0. Gx. MWf? y ? 2 Ul 4 Y u . A. .. __ ....?_. a, Z __..........__._._.._ . ...................._... .........-- =-- - ...._: .....w...._........ ... ......... .. ?? ?_. ...... 1 1 E tF ?zA ;9 E-1 z a?4 c? U ? r W d V I S? d R7 r? g W i o ? a p U a M ?Q i3 g° O ?Qo a, q .] .i ar w ? Cc 'o 0 10, 10, x w, w rL f? 964 ;Z 4 4 fry p, W G?, ow ;Tq PLO 44 0.4 t z y 92 92 r a o d W ?w A'I U a, 1 fl w w E z ?o F U ? 0 d? a w i ? a a ? A ? w ai a i L7 ? a C "a e? ?U Q?44U W ? ?1 o ? a ~" 4fl i7 p . ? a ?` id ? ? Id ©,? p? o ? pA f c5 aS p ea C p? Cq as a a. a.ww p.wW A.,Ww a.c o w 96,r.c?. 44 a?ww a z ?' Le} G 0 Si .p0p e w C ?1! ` ju U >. v d s, U o. 11 MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE AGENDA. CITY OF C.LEARWATER MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT, PROTECT .NO. 08-0065-PR APRIL 12, 2010 - 9:30 AM CLEA,RWATER :BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER 69 BAY ESPLANADE, CLEARWATER FLORIDA 1. Sign in Sheet 2. Introduction a) Consultant- Plisko Architects -Alex . Plisko b) City of Clearwater- Engineering Department -Tim Kurtz -Landscape Architect c) Owner-.Parks & Recreation :Department -- Leroy Chin, Park, Planning & Project Manager 3. This.pre-bid meeting shall be considered as part of the contract documents of the Mandalay Park Restrooitt Replacement - Project No. 08-0064-PR 4. Copies of the Contract Documents and. Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: wwwm +?C.leaa?water.corn/citvtart7„lccts. or contact Jiffy Reprographics phone 727422-7125 5. A.il Contractors bidding this project must be prequalified by the Engineering Department as a Commercial Building Contractor. Contractors shall confirm their prequalification is current. Pre-qualifications expire after 3 years since last renewal date. Contractors may contact Kathy Bedini (727)-562-4782 or Judy Kolmer at 727- 562-4750 to confirta their prequa.lifrcation is current and active. Contractors wanting to pre-quality to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (1.0) workdays prior to the bid opening date. Contractors must be pre-qualified on or before April 1.6, 2010. 6. Scope of Work: Project Name: MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT - PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR a. The project is located in Mandalay Park, 532 Mandalay Ave. Clearwater, Florida b. Installation of tree barricades, silt fencing and install according to manufactures recommendations or as stated on the drawings. The contractor shall note the silt fence shall not be trenched beneath the canopy of trees, Hines or palms. Installation of temporary 6' high chain link fencing and gates as shown on the demolition plan. The contractor shall not block access of the fire station where the construction entrance and the temporary contractor's lay down area are located. The silt fence and. tree barricades shall be installing prior to obtaining the Clearing & Grubbing Permit and the. Building Permit No..BCP2009-12244 from the City's Building Department, 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 2nd Floor, Clearwater; Florida 33756. There is no fee for theses permits. There is no SWFWMD permit for this project. c. The city has designated two metered parking spaces during normal working hours 7 AM -- 3:30 PM these two meters will be bagged during these hours Monday -- Friday all other.times will be for public parking. The eentfaetef- shall pr-evide ' . The City's Parking Division will issue two placards to the general contractor for these two parking spaces. General contractor is responsible to provide the placards to the proper staff fir for parking in. these ttivo parking spaces. Lost card replacement of $25 fee due at reissuing of each new placard, It slurll be noted the use of other parking spaces will be strictly enforced and the fines will be paid by the general contractor. No suspension of the parking ticket fine will be provided far by the CAvner or have the fine waved by the Parking Division, The contractor shall install temporary standard FDOT signs and post with the information `Contractor's Parking Only from Monday -- Friday -- 7 AM - 3:30 PM' these signs will be removed by the contractor at the end of the construction period. Locate FDOT signs one .foot east of the sidewalk of the designated meter parking spaces. d. The general contractor sliall coordinate his deliveries of materials to the site before 7:00 AM - 10 A.M. to minimize the disruption of the parking lot. The contractor shall not block of the drive aisles of the parking lot at anytime. during the construction period of this project. e. All construction materials and employee parking shall be within the temporary fenced in area of limits of work area. No construction materials or equipment shall be in the parking lot during the construction of this project, I 1 f. General Contractor's employee shall not park in the metered parking space unless the meter time is paid for parking is the metered space. If the meter-space is expired the Parking Division will ticket the vehicle and no suspension of the parking ticket fine will be provided for by the Owner or have the fine waved by the Parking Division. g, Any miscellaneous items not. included as a line item in the base bid and the contractor feels is required to per?fonn the restroom replacement shall be included somewhere in the base bid line items. h. The contractor will be required to restore any disrupted areas of the within the limits of work area and.any disturbed areas outside of the limits of work areas by the General Contractor of this project. The grass sodding shall be of the sam St. Augustine sod and free of weeds and disease. L The contractor of this project is required to provide irrigation system repairs for this project and will be inspected by the owner. j. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed schedule of value for his awarded contact amount and submitted at the pre-construction meeting. This schedule of value shall be utilized as the basis of his .application of payment for the project. The contractor shall utilize the standard AIA form in snaking his application for payment on or prior to the 25`h of every month. This application shall be submitted to the Architect for his review and approval prior to forwarding on to the owner for payment. The payment request shall be accompanied with a lean wavier with each payment. Upon final payment request the contractor shall provide with his invoice the certificate of final payment. k. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed construction. schedule outlining all work and minor and major milestones for the project and shown long lead items of materials delivery. This schedule shall be updated at each progress meeting. This schedule. shall also be providing at the pre-construction meeting as well as a list of sub-contracwtors with contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. 1. The successful bidder shall be..required to provide a list of shop drawings as well as list of material submittals. for review by the Architect and this list shall be provided at the pre-construction meeting for approval by the Architect as the required submittal list. m. The owner shall. require 3 copies of the each shop drawing and material submittal and shall be maintained :by the contractor in separate talc boxes by specification sections in file folders clearly marked item contained in the file folder. "These documents shall be turn over to the owner at the completion of the project as part of the close out materials. Also include a list of sub-contractors, material vendors and clearly identify as to discipline with contact information such as contact person, addresses; telephone%ell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. n. Submittals shall be sent directly to the Architect for his review and one copy sent to the owner project manager for review at the saute time they are sent to the architect. Total number of submittals will be detennined at the pre-construction meeting. o. The contractor shall note the contract duration is 120 calendar days for construction of this project from notice to proceed. No additional days will be allowed. p. :Progress meeting will be required during the duration of the project and shall be every two weeks and dates stall be detennined at the pre-construction meeting, q. There is approximately 40 feet of 6-inch sanitary sewer line to be connected to an existing 8-inch sanitary line. This work is within the parking metered lot and disruption of this parking space shall be kept to a minimum. The contractor shall coordinate this work and have the work completed within 3 to 4 working days. The asphalt repairs shall be repaired in same like conditions, as well as the reinstallation of the wheel stops and the thermoplastic striping. The contractor delay working in these parking stalls because of miss coordination by the General Contractor he will be required to provide the lost revenue to the Parking Division and will be assessed accordingly by the amount of lost revenue of these metered parking spaces. r. The removal of existing sidewalks saw cuts of sidewalk shall be performed prior to removal. s. All new sidewalks shall be 6" thick and sub base compacted to 95 percent and laid with 4'x20' flat sheets of welded wire. mesh as specified on the drawings. The wire mesh shall be over lapped 8" and tied together. The welded wire mesh shall be set on chair stands 2" above the sub-grade and in the lower 2/3 of the concrete slab thickness. Concrete shall be commercial fiber mesh 3,000 PSI concrete in 28 days. The sidewalk shall be saw cut 6' on center at a minimum of 2" and expansion joint full depth against hard surfaces and as shown on the construction plans. t.. The building shall have 6-inch wide seamless aluminum gutters with 4-inch aluminum down spouts. All joi'tits shall, be ' soldered and a leak test shall be provided. Down spouts shall be inserted. into PVC storm sewer pipes and sealed on three sides even though they are not shown on the Architect's drawings. An air gap shall be on back side of down spout between the wall and the down spout. ' u. The demolition of the existing restroom building; will be performed by others at a later date and is not patt of this contract no. 08-0064-PR, disregard notes on sheet P1.1 & P2.1. v. The General Contractor will be.required to provide his own survey layout and as-built drawings. The General Contractor ' shall stake out the location of the building and provide a tie in survey to the building department prior to pouring any concrete or installation of the pilings. w. CONTRACT PERIOD: 120 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS r 7. Consultant Comments: Alex Plisko 8. Last day far submission of questions Wednesday, April 21, 2010 @ 10:00 AM and will. distribute to consultants. ' Questions sent in writingo, Parks & Recreation Department Leroy Chin - Park, Planning & Project Manger ' E-mail: ler_ oy.c1 in .i,m clcarwatc r.catn Fax,: 727-224-7101 Mail: P. 0. Box 4736 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 ' No other questions submitted after 10:00 AM on April 21, 2010 will be answered. 9. Seated proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing; Office, located at the Municipal Services ' Building, 1,00 S. Myrtle Avenue, 3`' Floor, Clearwater Florida 33756-5520, until. 1-30 P.M. on. Friday, April 10, 2010, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for Mandalay Park Restroom.Replacement Project No. 08-0064-PR. ' 10. Award Date: Thursday, May 20, 2010 by City of Clearwater City Council a) Contractor awarded the project shall collect contracts from Engineering Dept. on Friday May 21, 2010 and has ten. days to return signed contracts and performance bond for City Clerk to execute the contracts. ' 11 Preconstruction Meeting -tentative date Wednesday, May 26, 2010 time: TBD, Venue: TBD ' 12. Notice to proceed: tentative date Tuesday, June 1, 2010 13. Contract Period 120 consecutive calendar days: tentative date Tuesday, September 28, 2010 ' 14. Question and. Answers a) If the project award is under $100,000 will the City require a performance bond? Answer: Yes the contractor awarded the contract will be required to provide a performance bond for this project. 15. Comments a) Prospective Bidders ' b) Consultant --Plisko Architects - Alex Plisko c) City of Clearwater -- Engineering Department - Tim Kurtz - Landscape Architect d) Owner -Parks & Recreation Department -- Leroy Chin ' 1.) The bidder's proposal will provide two line items in the bid alternates for type oftnetal roofing, standing seam and Gerard metal roofing tile. This will be included in Addendum No. 1 2) The mandatory pre-bid meeting minutes and the sign in sheet will be included in Addendum No. I ' 16. 'Four of construction areas - Mandalay Park, 532 Mandalay Ave. Clearwater, Florida 17. Adjourn Meeting 3 ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS. MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM. REPLACEMENT - PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR CLEARWATER, FLORIDA ' Collies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www,trl Clearwater.com/cit ro'ects, ON _WEDNESDAY, APRIL 01, 2010, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and ' Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. fn. one do--story r' block restroom The work for huildin? which nronrnyisalsmntPare1v 574, invited en ft inconsistselvvofAda {constructing a new A---);+;-- -4r ' eoncr to flatwo metal roofing. seamless uttersystem. flood Proofing and other trades Pre Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on MONDAY APRIL 12, 2010 (4),9:30 AM AT THE CLEARWATER & UCH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER SOCIAL ' HALL 69 BAY ESPLANADE, C EARWATER FLORIDA. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Architect will be present to discuss this project. ' Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, At the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal. Services Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., 3`d Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, unti1:30 P.M. on: l PARK , ARM 30, 2010, and publicly opened and read at that.hour and place for ROOM REPLACEMENT - PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits ' and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction category of ' COMMERCIAL BUILDING with a minimum pre-qualification amount of S 150,000, .00. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify .to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. ' The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.. ' The City of Clearwater, Florida George McKibben, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4634 Addendum Smion 1 .doe Pag4. I o I V-17!2008 1 1 1 1 t 1 PRE-BID CONFERENCE MINUTES CITY OF CLEARWATER MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT, PROJECT NO. 08-0065-PR APRIL 12, 2010 - 9:30 AM CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER 69 BAY ESPLANADE, CLEARWATER FLORIDA Sign in Sheet 2. Introduction a) Consultant-- Plisko Architects-Alex Plisko b) City of Clearwater- Engineering Department- . Tim Kurtz Landscape Architect e) Owner --Parks.& Recreation Department -Leroy Chin, Park, .Planning & Project Manager 3. This pre-bid meeting shall be considered as part of the contract documents of the Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement-- Project No. 08.0064-PR. A second pre-bid meeting will not be held and was determined by senior Park &.Recreation Dept. administrative staff this project will not be designated as a Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference requirement. 4... Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.myC]ear,%vater.com/ci1yi2roiects or contact Jiffy Reprographics phone 72722-7125 .All Contractors bidding this project must be prequalified by the Engineering Department as a Commercial Building Contractor. Contractors shall confirm their prequalibcation is current. Pre-qualifications expire after 3 years since last renewal date. Contractors may contact Kathy Bedini (727)-5624782. or Judy Kolmer at 727- 562-4750 to continrn their prequalification is current and active. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weekshen (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. Contractors must be pre-qualified on or before April 16, 2010. Qualification Applications of Prospective Bidders were.provided to bidders attending the Pre-Bid Conference, 6. Scope of Work: Project Name: MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT - PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR a. The project is located in Mandalay Park, 532 Mandalay Ave. Clearwater,. Florida b.. Installation of ;tree barricades, silt fencing and install according to manufactures recommendations or as stated on the drawings. The contractor shall note the silt fence shall not be trenched beneath the canopy of trees, pines or palms. Installation of temporary :6' high chain link fencing and gates as shown on the demolition plan. The contractor shall not block:access.of the fire station where the construction entrance and the temporary contractor's lay down area are located. The silt fence and tree barricades shall be installing prior to obtaining the Clearing & Grabbing Permit and the Building Permit No. BCP2009-12244 from the City's Building Department, 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 2nd Floor. Clearwater, Florida 33756. There is no fee for theses permits, There is no SWFWM.D permit for this project. c. The city has.designated two metered parking spaces during normal working hours 7 AM - 3.:30 PM these N,,o teeters will be bagged during these hours Monday -Friday all other times will be for public parking. The eantraeter- shall pr-evide The City's Parking Division will issue two placards to the general contractor for these two parking spaces. General contractor is responsible to Irrovide the plocardy ro the propel- .staff for parking in these two parking spaces. Lost card replace)nent of S25 fee clue at reissid (af each new plat crrd. 11 shall be noted the use of other parking spaces will be strictly enforced and the fines will be paid lay the general contractor No suspension of the.parking ticket f ne will be provided for by the owner or have the fine waved by the Parking Division. The contractor shall install temporary standard FDOT signs and post with the information 'Contractors Parking Only from Monday - Friday - 7 AM -- 3:30 PM' these signs will be removed by the contractor at the end of the construction period. Locate FDOT signs one foot east of the sidewalk of the designated meter parking spaces. 1 ' d.. Tile general contractor shall coordinate his deliveries of materials to the site before 7:00 AM - 10 AM. to minimize tile, disruption of the parking lot. The contractor shall not block of the drive aisles of the parking lot at anytime during the ' construction period of this project, e. All construction materials and employee parking shall be within the temporary fenced in area of limits of work area. No construction materials or equipment shall be in the parking lot during. the construction of this prt.:ject. ' f: General. Contractor's employee shall not park in the metered parking; space unless the meter time is paid for parking in the metered space. If the meter space is expired the Parking Division. will ticket the vehicle and no suspension of the parking ticket fine Will be provided for by the Owner or have the fine waved by the Parking Division. ' & Any tx iscellaneous items not included as a line item in the base bid and the contractor feels is required to perform the restroom replacement shall be included somewhere in the base bid line items. h. The contractor will be required to restore any disrupted areas of the within the limits of work area and any disturbed areas '. outside of the limits of work areas by the General Contractor of this project. The grass sodding shall be of the ti St. Augustine mxr and free of weeds raid disease. ' i.. The contractor of this project is required to provide irrigation system repairs for this project and will be inspected by the owner. j. The successful bidder shall be .required to provide a detailed schedule of value for his awarded contact amount and submitted at the pre-construction meeting. This schedule of value shall be utilized as the basis of his application of payment for the project. The contractor shall utilize the standard AIA form in making his application for payment on or prior to the 25`h of every month. This application shall be submitted to the Architect for his review and approval prior to ' forwarding on to the owner for payment. The payment request shall be accompanied with a lean wavier with each payment. Upon final payment request the contractor shall provide with his invoice the certificate of final payment. k. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed construction schedule outlining all work and minor and .major milestones. for the .project and shown long lead items o:f materials delivery. This schedule shall be updated at each progress meeting. This schedule shall also be providing at the pre-construction meeting as well as a list of sub-contractors with contact person, addresses, telephone%ell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. ' 1. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a. list of shop drawings as well as list of material submittals for review by the Architect and this list shall be provided at the pre-construction meeting for approval by the Architect as the required submittal list. ' tn. 71713e owner shall require 3 copies of the each shop drawing and material submittal and shall be maintained by the contractor: in separate :file boxes by specification sections in file folder clearly piarked item contained in tl)e Tile f6lder. These documents shall be turn over to the owner.at the completion of the project:as part of the closeout materials. Also include..a list:of sub-contractors, material vendors and clearly identify as to discipline. with contact information such as contact person, addresses, telephonelcell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses, m Submittals shall be sent directly to the Architect for his review and one copy sent to the owner project manager for review ' at the same time they are sent to the architect.. Total number of submittals will be determined at the pre-construction meeting. o. The contractor shall note the contract duration is 120 calendar days for construction of this project from notice to proceed. No additional days will be allowed. p. Progress meeting.will be required during tile. duration of the project and shall be every two. weeks and dates shall be determined at the pre-construction meeting. q. There is approximately 40 feet of 6-inch sanitary sewer line to be comtected to an existing 8-inch sanitary line. This work is within the parking metered lot and disruption of this parking space shall be kept to a minimum. 'Tkt.e contractor shall coordinate this work and have the work completed within 3 to 4 working days. The asphalt repairs shall be repaired in same. like conditions. as well as the reinstallation of the wheel stops and the thermoplastic striping- The contractor delay working in these parking stalls because of miss coordination by the General Contractor he will be required to provide the ' lost revenue to the Parking Division and will be assessed accordingly by the amount of lost revenue of these metered parking spaces. r. The,rernoval of existing sidewalks saw cuts of sidewalk shall be performed prior to removal, ' 2 ' s, All. new sidewalks shall be 6" thick and sub base compacted to 95 percent and laid with 4':x20' flat sheets of welded wire mesh as specified on the drawings. The wire mesh shall be over lapped 8 and tied together. The welded wire mesh shall I be set on chair stands 2" above the sub-grade and in the lower 2/3 of the concrete slab thickness. Concrete shall be commercial fiber mesh 3,000 PSI concrete in 28 days. The sidewalk shall be saw cut 6' on center at a minimuan of 2" and expansion joint full depth against hard surfaces and as shown on the construction plans. t.. The building shall have 6-itch wide seamless aluminum gutters with 4-inch aluminum down spouts. All joints shall be soldered and a leak test shall be provided. Down spouts shall be inserted into PVC storm sewer pipes and sealed on three. sides even though they are not shown on the Architect's drawings. An air gap shall be on back side of down spout ' between the wall. and the down spout. u. The demolition of the existing restroom building will be performed by others at a later date and is not part of this contract no. 08-0064=PR, disregard notes on sheet P1. I & P2.1. ' v. The General Contractor will be required to provide his own survey layout and as-built drawings. The General'Contractor shall stake out the location of the building and provide a tie in survey to the building department prior to pouring any concrete or installation of the pilings. ' W CONTRACT PER10D: CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS 7. Consultant Comments: Alex Plisko 8. Last day for submission of questions Wednesday, April 21, 2010 @ 10:00 AM and will distribute to consultants. .Questions sent in writing to: Parks.& Recreation Department ' Leroy Chin -- Paris. Planning & Project .Manger E-mail; .lerov,chin(@.myclear%vater.com Fax: 727-224-7101 Mail: P. 0. Box 4736 .Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 No other questions submitted after 10:00 AM on April 21.2010 will be answered. 9. Sealed. Proposals will be received .b the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office. located at the'Municipal Services Building, .100 S. Myrtle Avenue, 3r Floor, Clearwater Florida 3375.6-5520, until 1:30 P.M. on Friday. April 30..20.10. and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement Project No. 08-0064-PR. 10. Award Date: Thursday, May 20, 2010 by City of Clearwater City Council a) Contractor awarded the project shall collect contracts from Engineering. Dept. on Friday May 21, 2010.and hasten days to return signed contracts and performance bond for City Clerk to execute the contracts. 11. Preconstruction Meeting -tentative date Wednesday, May 26, 2010 time: TBD, Venue: TBD 12. Notice to proceed: tentative date Tuesday, June i, 2010 I 13. Contract Period 120 consecutive calendar days: tentative date Tuesday, September 28, 2010 14. Question and Answers I a) If the project award is under $100,000 will the City require a performance bond`' Answer: Yes the contractor awarded the contract will be required to provide a performance bond for this project. ' b) Do the contractors need to be prequalified? Answer: Yes the contractor needs to be City prequalitied Contractors in the construction category of Commercial Building with a minimum prt-qualification.amount of $150,000.00. c) Silikal is this the flooring material required in the restrooms verses what is shown on the drawing sheet A4 Room Finish Schedule? Answer: The contractor shall provided Canto] Sealer as the base bid of his proposal. In the Bidders Proposal a separate line item will be provided in the Alternate Items for the Sililotl Epoxy Flooring, 1 3 1 local company providing this material is Smart Surfaces, 1304 Wilkinson.Drive, Plant City, FL. 33566, Phone: 813-402-0771, E-mail: in(oa2smartsurfacesinc.biz, contact person: Ken Walker d) Will the city accept a inodular building? Answer: No the city will not except a modular building in lieu of the design drawings and specifications provided in the bid document& ' 15. Comments a) Prospective Bidders b) Consultant -Plisko Architects - Alex Plisko c) City of Clearwater - Engineering Department -- Tim Kurtz - Landscape Arch itec.t d) Owner-Parks &. Recreation Department- Leroy Chin 1) The bidder's proposal will provide two line items in the bid alternates for type of metal roofing, standing ' seam and Gerard metal rooting tile. This will be included in Addendum No. 1 2) The pre-bid ineeting.minutes and the sign in sheet will be included in Addendum No. 1 3) Revisions will be provided to the prospective bidders for the Silikal Epoxy Flooring as an add alternate. ' 1.6, Tour of construction areas - Mandalay Park, 532 Mandalay Ave. Clearwater, Florida 1 17. Adjourn Meeting 1 1 1 t 11 1 1 4 1 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL ADDENDUM NO. .I PROJECT: MANDALAY PARK R:ESTROOM REPLACEMENT - PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR ITEM ....... _.._....._............. EST. UNIT UNIT _......... _...... TOTAL NO. DESCRIPBON -UNIT DIY-. COST PRICE ' A. E9110 109 items influded in base bids The prospective bidders shallexatiine the drawings & technical specifications the following line items only lake in major itwns shown on the contract documents. The contractor shall include all cost to construct this project and drone items not shown on the bidder's bid item those cost shrill be included somcwhere in the list items provided to fulfill the designer's intent of the contract documents. No additional funds will provided by the Omicr tnt itcros clear ' shown in the contract documents to corstnlct:.dris project. The contractor shall be prequalitied 10 working days prior to the bid o . pening. date by the City of Clearwater - Engineering Department as a Commercial Building Contractor. 1. Silt Fencing installation per manufactures recommendation or ' as shown on drawing L. P. 600 $ $ Installation of temporary lence & gates L. F. 6tN'r $ $ 4. Install tree barricades L. F_ 200 $ Removal of concrete sidewalks saw cut as necessary-remove $ l sea grape, 4 palms, 5q. Pt. 1,500 $ $ 5- Construct restroom building approximately $75 sq. ft. ' according to the drawings &technical.specitications include all items shown in UK contras-t documents L. S. I 6. Electrical service include directional drill 4-inch electrical conduit, and include electrical conductors as required to Progress Energy transtunn" kxt.*d as shown on dw'g- E;1.1 L. F. 160 $ g 7. Install 6" PCV SDR 35 sanitary scwcr include all fittings & ' asphalt parking lot repairs L.F. 100. $_..,. .._ $_. 8, Standard clean out, as specified on draw nns Each 2 $ $ 9. 2-inch schedule 40 PVC: water line include all fittings, gate ' valves: valve boxes. L. F. 40 S. • ............. $ 10, 6-inch concrete sidewalk, commercial fiber mesh, weld wire ' mesh on chairs, 3,000 psi oo ncretel25 days, medium broom finish include saw joints &.fidl depth expansion joint materials S. F. 1.250 S $? 11. Performance bond 1.. S. I $ $ ' 12. SUB TOTAL OF LINES 1 & 11 13. TEN PERCENT CONTINGENCY+ 10% CONTINGENCY OF THE SUB TOTAL OF ITEM; 12 *(Note. contingency. funds shall only utilize upon Written approval by the Owner or the owner's representative to utilize . this fund for additional Scope of Work not indicated in items MI l of the Bill ofQuantitics. Contingency. funds not utilized in the implementation of his contract shall he returned to the owner by final clurrmge order during close out.of the contract,) 13. GRAND TOTAL-- ITEMS I 1 and 12 I'NC'LUDES I0,1/o CONTINENCY CONT'RACT'OR NANIE. BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL I'T'EM 13 WHICH INCLUDES TEN PERCENT CONTINF.N("A' S (Numbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ITEMS 13 WHICH INCLUDES TEN PERCENT coNTINGENC1 ................................. .-_...... .........-. (A`ords) THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND Li)MP SUM PRICES ANI]'T11E E511MATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE.. CITY WILL MAKE T14F TABULATION FROM THE. UNIT PRICES AND LUMPSUM PRICE. BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN `fHF,,TOTAL BY THE BIDDER. 11 SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT ' PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE. SHALL. GOVERN. THE CITY OF CLEARWATER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO ACCEPTOR REJECT ALL BIDS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NO"I'k. ALL BID ITEMS SHALL BE PRICES AND BLANKS I_EF-I ON ANY ITEM THE BE WILL BE CONSIDERED A NON RESPONSIVE BID AND WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED IN AWARDING THIS PROJECT. "1'1.11: CI'T'Y OF CLEARWATER RESERVES THE R1Cil1"1' 1`O SELECT ANY AND OR ALL OF THE ALTERNATE ITEMS AND OR REJECF ANY AND ALL ALTERNATE ITEMS. THE AL FE : RNATF. ITEMS SELECTED SHALL. BE UTILIZED IN THE TABULATION OF THE PROJECT AND SHALL DETERMINE TIME MOST RESPONSIVE QUALIFIED LOW BIDDER TO BE AWARDED THE PROJECTE MA.NDALAY PARR RJ-$TROQM RFPI ACEMENT- PROJECT NO, 08-0064-PR Addendunm SectiunV Qowrucl. Braid, and Bid Fonivdoc Page 14 Rcvi:sc& 5,111/2006 1 BIDDER'S PROP L ADDENDUM NO 1. N NUE i PROJECT: MANDALAY PARK :RESTROOM REPLACEMENT - PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR ITEM EST. IJNI'1- ..UNIT ?__....._...__.--TOTAL ... ? __ ' NO. - 2- SCRIPTION ._._.__.............. =I........ Dii .---. COST PRICE R. FoollywingiteSnsincludtdin eiteri4tgbid: The prospective bidders shall examine the drawings & technical specifications the following line items only take in major component line items s PW.1.. on the contract documents. The contractor shall include all cast to and necessay parts those line items and those cost shall be included somcwvhere in the list of ' alternate iterns provided to fulfill the designer's intent of doe contract documents. No additional fiends will provided by the Chvtier for items clear shown in the contract document,, to construct this project, I, Install 6-inch schedule 401 VC storm 5o wer line include all ' fittings tie in to storm sewer manhole and grout as necessarv L. F. 150 S? 2. Standard clean outs as specified on drawing Each 6 $ ......................... .... ' 3 6-inch aluminum seamless gutter 24 gauge metal. the shall review. sketch ofthe flat face profile to receive the gutter system. the gutter system shall have not seams except at the cornets and comm shall be soldered, the. soldered scams shall be tested for leaks, downspouts aluminum and shall he 4!' in diameter included as a compkte system and ' fitted into the 6-inch.seh. 40 PVC piping and gap between down spout and PVC shall be chalked on three sides and a gap between the down opt +VC adjacent lobuilding. Contractor shrill provide. a sloop drawing showing profile ' being flat receiving the 6 matt aluminum gutter system L. F. 120 $ S 4, RV crimp 6alvalum metal roofing over #30 underlaynx-rit. and 15# separation sheet (typical) and. install according to manufactures installation recommendations umtractorshall ' he-required toi prervidc wind load of 1,30 MPH and as required by the noritla Building Cole and Shop' drawing required and submitted to the Architect for approval for installation L_. S. I 1 ' 5.. Barrel vault aluminum tile roof Gerard Roofing Technologies or equal, installed according to the manufactures tecommerxiations regards to subsurface preparations the contractor shall be requirc4to provide. wind load of 130 MPH ' grid as required by the Florida Building:Code, strop drawing required and submitted to the Architect for approval and then signed scaled drawings;to amend the building permit to the Building.Dcpt, for installation of aluminum barrel vaulted rioting tile system L. S. I 6., Silikal Epoxy Flooring Surface fnrMen & Women Restroom (Service area shall remain as Canto .Sealer andihis txrst in ' the base hill L. S. I ......._.._,_T $ 7. TO'T'AL OF AL rERNATE ITEMS Ithourh 6 S 1 8. TIN PERCENT CONTINGENCY* 10%CONTINGENCY OF'THE: SUB TOTAL OFITEM 7' ,(Note contingency funds shall only utilize.upon written approval by the ('honer or the owner's representative to utilize this fiord for additional Scope of Wodc not indicated in alternate items 1-6 of the Bill ol'Ouantities. Contingency funds not utilized in the implementation of his contract shall be returned to the owner by final change order during close out ol- the contract.) 4. GRAND TOTAL.-ALTERNATE ITEMS7 and 8 INCLUDES 10% CONTINENCY THE CITY OF CLEARWATER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SELECT ANY AND OR ALL OF THE At-I'ERNATE ITEMS AND OR REJECT ANY.AND ALL AL:I'ERNAL'E: ITEMS. THE ALTE RN. ITEMS. SELEc FED SHALL BE UTILIZED IN TIfE TABULATION OF THE OVER At-].- PROJE( 'T C( AND SHALL, DETERMINE THE MOST RESPONSIVE. QUALIFIED LOW BIDDER TO BE AWARDED THE PROJECT. 1'14LC)WNL:R ALSO RI SF i Nti i TILE RIGHT TO ADD TEN PERCENT CONTiNUENCYS'I o THE ALTERNATE ITEMS SELEC'l'EDTO PROVIDE THE OVERALL CON"1 RAC:1' VALUE TO BE AWARDED BY THE CITY COUNCIL, MANDALAY PARK RES FROOh1 REPLACEMENT- PRO)EC.T NO. 08-0064-PR Addendum Sect,ion%` Contract, Bond. and Laid Form.doc I':aee 15 ltc % k d: 51/1 V2006 1 MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS.... I PAGE SECTION II INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS ............................................... 9 PAGES SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS ................................................ 40 PAGES SECTION IV CITY OF CLEARWATER TECHINCIAL SPECIFICATIONS ...... 138 PAGES ALUMINUM SEAMLESS GUTTER DETAIL ........................... I PAGE ARCHTIECT TECHINICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................236 PAGES DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES SOIL BORING REPORT... 24 PAGES SECTION V CONTRACT BOND, CONTRACT, CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT, PROPOSAL BOND, AFFIDAVIT, NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT PROPOSAL, ADDENDUM SHEET, BIDDER'S PROPOSAL ............................................. 1S PAGES The prospective bidders shall note there maybe duplications of technical specification sections the most stringent specification section will be utilized for Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement - Project No. 08-0064-PR construction. The soil report contains two soil reports Pier 60 & Mandalay Park. The Pier 60 soil report does not ' pertain to this project Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement Project No. 08-0064-PR and the prospective bidders shall disregard any information provided on Pier 60 for this bid proposal. ?. I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT - PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.myClearwater.com/city_projects, ON WEDNESDAY APRIL 01, 2010, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. The work for which proposals are invited consists of constructing a new one sto mason block restroom building approximately 575 sa. ft. includes but not limited to: demolition of existing sidewalks, tree removal, piles, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, sanitary/storm sewers, concrete flatwork, metal roofing, seamless gutter system, flood proofing and other trades Pre- Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on MONDAY, APRIL 12, 2010 (a, 9:30 AM AT THE CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER, SOCIAL HALL 69 BAY ESPLANADE CLEARWATER FLORIDA. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Architect will be present to discuss this project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., 3`d Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30 P.M. on Friday, April 30, 2010, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place t for MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT - PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction category of COMMERCIAL BUILDING with a minimum pre-qualification amount of S 150,000.00. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida George McKibben, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4634 Sectionl.doc Page 1 of 1 8/2712008 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: SECTION II .................................................................................................................................... i 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ................................. 1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3 6 CONTRACT TIME .......................................................................................................... 3 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS ...................................................................................................... 3 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM ................................................................................................. 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS .................................................................................................... 5 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER .............................................................................. 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7 19 BID PROTEST ................................................................................................................. 7 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 8 SectionII Instruction to Bidders.doc i Revised; 5/11/2005 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available for the sum stated in the Advertisement for Bid from. the Office of the Purchasing Manager. This amount represents reproduction costs and is non-refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre- qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758- 4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14) days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical Sectionll Instruction to Bidders.doc l Revised: 511112005 Section II - Instructions to Bidders data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. SectionII Instruction to Bidders.doc 2 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section II - Instructions to Bidders 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Commission, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasurtable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 53 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Sectionll Instruction to Bidders.doc 3 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section II - Instructions to Bidders Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract. Agreement to the City Commission, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Commission will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 4.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable abjection. 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in the bid envelope provided with the bid documents. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the SectionIl Instruction to Bidders-doe 4 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees Section1l Instruction to Bidders.doe 5 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. Sectionll Instruction to Bidders.doc 6 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section II -- Instructions to Bidders 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST. Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE. A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposal. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five business days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully Sectionl] Instruction to Bidders.doc 7 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five business days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 - TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. Sectionll Instruction to Bidders.doc 8 Revised: 5/11/2005 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: SECTION III .................................................................................................................................. i GENERAL CONDITIONS ...................................................................................................... ... i 1 DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................................1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ............................................................................. ... 4 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 4 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS ..............................•-.............................-----........................ .. 4 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT ........................................................................... .................................... 4 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION .......................................... .:....... ................. . 5 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ........................................................................ 5 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 5 3.1 INTENT .......................................•----...................................-----------................................ . 5 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES ................................................. . 6 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS ....................................................................................•............... 6 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ........................................................................................ . 6 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ........................................................................... . 6 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES .................................... . 7 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS ................................................................................................... . 7 S BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................ 7 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND .............................. . 7 5.2 INSURANCE .................................................... ............. . 8 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE ...................................................... . 9 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE ....................... . 9 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ................................................ 10 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS ....................................................... 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................... 11 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE .............................................. ............... 11 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 11 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 12 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 12 6.5 USE OF PREMISES ...................................................•--................................................ 13 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 14 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS .................................•---................................................. 14 6.8 PERMITS ...........................................................................................................•----....... 14 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION... .................................................................................. 15 6.10 EMERGENCIES .............................................................................•.............................. 15 6.11 DRAWINGS .............................•--•----------------........................................................---...... 16 SectionllI General Conditions.doc i Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES .................................................................... 16 6. 11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS .............................................................................. ........... 17 6. 11.3 CAD STANDARDS ................................. ............................................. ........... 19 6. 11.4 DELIVERABLES: .............................................. ........................................ ......... _ 20 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ................ ........... 21 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ............................................................................. ........... 21 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION ......................................................................................... ........... 21 OTHER WORK ................................................................................................... ........... 22 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ............................................................................. ........... 22 7.2 COORDINATION .............................................................................................. ........... 23 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ........................................................................... .....:..... 23 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............................................. 23 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ........................................................................ ........... 23 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ............................................. ........... 24 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ............................................................. ........... 24 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 24 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES .............................................................................. .......... 24 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES ................................. .......... 25 CHANGES IN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 25 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 26 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE .......................................................... .......... 26 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ............. .......... 27 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK .......................................................................................... .......... 27 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .......................................................... .......... 28 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ..................................................................................... .......... 28 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION ................................................................................ .......... 28 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK ............................................................................. .......... 29 13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK........ ...................................................... .......... 29 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK .............................. .......... 30 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ............................................................ .......... 30 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ......................................................... .......... 30 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ............................................. .......... 30 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ............................... .......... 31 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ................................................. .......... . 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ..................................................... .......... 32 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ...................... .......... 32 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION .................................................................................. .......... 33 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION ......................................................................................... .......... 33 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ......................................................... .......... 33 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ......................................................... .......... 34 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ..............................................................................•---.---. .......... 34 7 8 9 1.0 11 12 13 14 SectionIlI General Conditions.doc ii Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III -- General Conditions 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 35 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK ...................................................................... 35 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ...................................................................................... 35 ' 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 36 1.6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION .............................................................................................. 36 1.7 MISCELLANEOUS .........................................................................................•............. 37 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ................................................................. 37 17.2 GIVING NOTICE .......................................................................................................... 37 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM ..................................................................................................... 37 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ..................................... 37 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 37 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION ............................................................... •............................. 37 SectionlII General Conditions.doc iii Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III -General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agreement The written contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application_for Payment The form accepted by ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performane e and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Florida. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Sectionlll General Conditions.doc l Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section III - General Conditions Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered. into the Agreement. Day A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer or his duly appointed representative. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 2 . Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III -- General Conditions Notice to Proceed ' A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida . . Person A natural person or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain. administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. SectionCll General Conditions.doc 3 Revised: 511112005 Section III - General Conditions Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be , responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor four copies of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date which the Contact Time commences to run. Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 4 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of Owner or Engineer, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Engineer may schedule a conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Engineer. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such ' reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents) shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Engineer, or any of their agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by Engineer. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be 5ectionIII General Conditions.doc 5 Revised: 5/11/200 Section 111- General Conditions read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary Conditions, General Conditions, Drawings, Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Engineer in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of=-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify Engineer in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the SectionIll General Conditions.doc 6 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. ' Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel. ' The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on SectionllI General Conditions.doc 7 Revised: 511112005 Section TIC - General Conditions Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. The Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any ' part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both ' of which must be acceptable to the Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier,- or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) City of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in sectionlll General Conditions.doc 8 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other ' additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation ' of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate SectionIll General Conditions.doc 9 Revised_ 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. The Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from the Owner. Lon shore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 10 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section 111- General Conditions rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to Owner and. Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever Engineer shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of Engineer. Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner's normally approved holidays. At Owner's option, overtime costs may either be deducted from the Contractor's monthly payment request or deducted from the Contractor's retention prior to release of final payment or the Engineer may elect to receive a monthly check from the Contractor in the amount of the overtime costs. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $40.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 1 1 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated ' in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's consent given after prior notice to Engineer. r Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Engineer and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS Contractor shalt be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 12 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. ¦ The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an ' appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. ' Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. ' Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party ' by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, ' employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant ' against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of ' waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction SectionlII General Conditions.doc 13 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. I 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. Sectionlll General Conditions-doe 14 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (1) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site;, and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Engineer may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to the Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or Engineer, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer SectionIlI General Conditions.doc 15 Revised: 5/I 1/2003 Section III - General Conditions prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. if Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the , Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to ' provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials- with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, ' and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop ' Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to ' Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and ' approval of each such variation. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will he only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of SectionIlI General Conditions.doc 16 Revised: 5/11/2005 1 Section III - General Conditions submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written ' notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ' The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. ' The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at all times during the progress of the Project. ' The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the City Inspector for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As- Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the City Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer ' intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The City's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole ' responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General r The Contractor/Consultant shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61G17-6, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. Two hard copies of signed and sealed as-builts and an AutoCAD file will be provided for this purpose. Definition: 61G17-6.002(8)(a) As-Builts Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or ' vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also know as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the City of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the City will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the City with the required As-Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, casting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the 5ectionill General Conditions.doc 17 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III -General Conditions construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the City the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the City of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61G17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the City to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. SectionIll General Conditions.doc 18 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2 Laver Namina Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOPBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 19 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as-built survey shall be produced on stable based Mylar or vellum material, 24" x 36" at a scale of l" = 20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format with all project data in Land Development Desktop (LDD) R1 or later, including all associated dependent files. When LDD is not available, upon approval by the City of Clearwater Project Manager, a standard ASCII file can be delivered with all associated drawing and dependent files. The ASCII file shall be a comma or space delimited containing code, point number, northing, easting, elevation and description for each data point. Example below space delimited ASCII file: POINT # NORTHING 284 1361003.838 or Comma Delimited ASCII File: EASTING ELEV DESC 264286.635 25.00 BCV 284„361003.838,264286.635,25.00, BCV (PNEZD) An AutoCAD Release 2000 drawing or later drawing file shall be submitted. NOTE: If approved deviation from Clearwater or Pinellas County CAD standards are used the consultant shall include all necessary information to aid in manipulating the drawings including either PCP, CTB file or pen schedule for plotting. The drawing file shall include only authorized fonts, shapes, line types or other attributes contained in the standard AutoDesk, Inc. release. All block references and references contained within the drawing file shall be included. Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 20 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section iil - General Conditions Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727)562-4762 or email address TomMahony@myClearwater.com 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Engineer, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Engineer, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 613 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or Sectionl.ll General Condilions.doc 21 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other. Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against. Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the site by Owner's own forces, or let other direct contracts therefore which shall contain General Conditions similar to these, or have other work performed by utility owners. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was not noted in the Contract Documents, then: (i) written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work, and (ii) Contractor may make a claim therefore if Contractor believes that such performance will involve additional expense to Contractor or requires additional time and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each utility owner (and Owner, if Owner is performing the additional work with Owner's employees) proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly connect and coordinate the work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. Should the Contractor cause damage to any other contractor on the Project, the contractor agrees, upon due notice, to settle with such contractor by agreement or arbitration, if he will so settle. If such other contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor, who shall defend such Sectionill General Conditions_doc 22 Revised: 5/11/200 Section 111- General Conditions proceedings at his own expense, and if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or satisfy the judgment and pay all costs incurred by the Owner. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's work depends upon work performed by others under this Article. Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's work. Contractor's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's work except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.2 COORDINATION If Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 0 S OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. Owner shall furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the ' Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer. may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with Owner's right to ' terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. The Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and the responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 23 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section III - General Conditions construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptahility of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Engineer in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Engineer and the other party within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Engineer allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within thirty days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). Engineer will render a formal decision in writing within thirty days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Engineer's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Engineer's decision is taken within thirty days of the Engineers decision, or the appeal time SectionIll General Conditions.doc 24 Revised: 5/11/2005 ' Section III - General Conditions which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between the Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, ' a written notice of intention to appeal from Engineer's written decision is delivered by Owner or Contractor to the other and to Engineer within thirty days after the date of such decision and a ' formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty days of .? the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in I good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Engineer with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Engineer's Consultants and assistants. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 25 Revised: 5/11/2005 ? I, Section Ill - General Conditions involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Engineer covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective' Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party malting the claim to the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 26 Revised= 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (1) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, the Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 27 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section 111- General Conditions 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless Engineer allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Engineer. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 28 Revised= 3/11/2005 Section Ill - General Conditions If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all City Building Departments and City Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer may require, that. portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages . caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Engineer to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Engineer or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Engineer stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 1 SectionIll General Conditions.doc 29 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by Owner remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness). If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Engineer's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance Sectiorrlll General Conditions.doc 30 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Engineer and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Engineer may require the Contractor to produce for the Owner, within fifteen days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. Sectionlll General Conditions-doe 31 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and fumisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed-in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by Owner to Contractor, and Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS Engineer will within twenty days after receipt of each Application for payment, either indicate a recommendation of payment and present Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to the Owner. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Engineer because: (i) claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv).Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal to pay with a copy to the Engineer, stating the reasons for such actions, and the Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 32 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section Ill - General Conditions or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by Owner at Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Engineer and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents as may be required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (I) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (1) the releases and receipts include all labor, Sectionlll General Conditions.doc 33 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon Engineer will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, Owner shall, within sixty-five days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Engineer. 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 5ectionIlI General Conditions.doc 34 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section 111- General Conditions 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Engineer may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Engineer; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Engineer certifies in writing to Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Engineer incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. SectionIll General Conditions.doc 35 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions Upon seven days' written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated. contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within sixty days after it is submitted or Owner fails for sixty days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days' written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of the Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for thirty days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven day's written notice to Owner and Engineer stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. SectionllI General Conditions.doc 36 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section Ill - General Conditions 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Engineer subject to the approval of the Owner. 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ?l Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of the Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through Public Works Administration may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the City and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the City, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by Public Works Administration. 5ectionlIl General Conditions.doc 37 Revised: 5/11/2005 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: I SCOPE OF WORK ...........................................................................................................1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................ . 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST ................................................................................. . 3 2 FIELD ENGINEERING ................................................................................................. . S 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR .............. . 5 2.1.1 GRADES, LINESAND LEVELS ............................................................................ . 5 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA ...................................................................................................... . 5 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ................................ . 5 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS ............................................................................................... S 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ........................................................................................ . 6 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS .......................................................................... . 6 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 7 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK .......................................................... 7 6 CONCRETE ...............................................................................................:..•...................8 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK .......................................... 9 7.1 EXCAVATION .............................................................................................................. ..9 7.2 FORMS ..........................................................................•.............................................. ..9 8 REINFORCEMENT .........................................................................................................9 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. .. 9 9 OBSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................•................................... ..9 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT .......................................................................................... 10 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS ................................................................ 10 12 DEWATERING ..........................................................................................•.................... .11 12.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... .11 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ .11 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL ................................................................................... .11 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINA TED SITE ACTIVITY-- ..................... .11 13 SANITARY MANHOLES .............................................................................................. 14 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE .......................................................................................................... 14 13.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 14 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ...................................... . . 15 13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... 15 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ 15 SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc i 9/9/2008 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS .............................................................................................. 15 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ............................................................................. 15 14 BACKFILL ...................................................................................................................... 16 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC ........................................................................................ 16 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 16 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 16 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL ..................................................................... 1.6 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 16 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 17 18 UNDERDRAINS ............................................................................................................. 17 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 17 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 17 19 STORM SEWERS .......................................................................................................... 17 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 18 19.2 TESTING ....................................................... .............................................................. 18 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 18 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS .............................................................. 19 20.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 19 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ............ ........... ............... ............................. .................. :.. 19 20.1.2 FORCE MAINPIPE ............................................................................................. 19 20.2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................... 19 20.21 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE.. ............... ............ __ ................ ............. .......... ...... ..... 19 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 20 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 20 20.4 TESTING... ................................................................................... ................. ............. 20 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS ........................................................................ 20 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS .............................................................................. 20 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................ . 21 20.5.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 21 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE-_. ..................................................................................... . 21 21 DRAINAGE .................................................................................................................... .21 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE ......................................................................... . 21 22.1 BASE ........................................................................................................................... . 21 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE .................. . 23 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE, ............................. . 23 22.2 SUBGRADE ............................................................................................ ............. .23 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................... .23 22.2.2 BASISOFPAYMENT ........................................................................................... .24 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS .................................................................. . 24 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................... ............... ................................. . 24 SCCtiOH.IV 9 9 2008.doc ii 9/9/2008 23.1.1 AGGREGATE.. ....... ........................................... ........... I .............. ........ I .............. 24 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................. 24 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 24 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES .................................................................... 25 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 25 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 26 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION .............................................................. 26 23.6.1 CRACKS ................................................................................................................ 26 23.6.2 POTHOLES ........................................................................................................... 26 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ............................................................................... 26 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 27 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE .................................................................... 28 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 28 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................. ............-.----- ----------.-------. 28 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 28 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 29 25.1 IRRIGATION ................................................................................................................ 29 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION... ................. ................. -- ...... ............................................ -- .... 29 25.1.2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 30 25.1.3 EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 35 25.2 LANDSCAPE ............................................................................................................... 38 25.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 38 25.2.2 PRODUCTS ............................................. ............................................................ 43 25.2.3 EXECUTION ..................................................................---...................-......-.-.... 46 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 53 26.1 INTENT .......................................................... ............................................................. 53 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTORANSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 53 26.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 53 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 54 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ..... ................................................................................. 54 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 55 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 55 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 55 26.9 PAYMENT ................................... ............................ ........... .......................................... 55 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................... 55 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 56 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 56 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 56 29 CONCRETE CURBS ..................................................................................................... 56 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ..................................................................................... . 56 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................ . 56 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ......................................................... 57 SectianlV 9 9 2008.doe iii 9/9/2008 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS ................................................................................... ....... 57 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS .................................................................................. ....... 57 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................... ....... 57 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................... ....... 57 31 SODDING ........................................................................................................................57 32 SEEDING .........................................................................................................................58 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 58 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ......................................................................... ....... 58 33.2 PRECAST TYPE ................................................................................................... ....... 59 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ......................................................................................... ....... 59 34 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 59 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 59 36 STREET SIGNS .............................................................................................................. 59 37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 60 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ........................ ........ 60 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ........................................... ........ 60 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ............................................................... ........ 60 37.4 EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................................... ........ 60 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO .............................................................. ........ 60 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ............................................................... ........ 60 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION .................................................................................... .... 61 37.8 LIGHTING ........................................................................................................... ........ 61 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL ............................................ .......... ................... ................... . ....... 61 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ........................................................................................... ........ 61 37.1 1 AREA OF COVERAGE ....................................................................................... ........ 61 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ........................................................................... ........ 61 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ........................................................... ........ 62 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ......................................................... ........ 62 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ..................... ........ 62 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS.... ........................ ........ 62 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES ................................................................ ........ 62 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ............................................................................... ........ 62 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES .............. ........ 63 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS ............................................................ ........ 63 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ............................................... ........ 63 38.9 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................. ........ 63 38.1 0 COMPLIANCE ..................................................................................................... ........63 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ......................................................... ........ 66 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................... 66 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES ............................................................................................. ....... 66 ScctioolV 9 9 2008.doc iv 9/9/2008 41.1 SCOPE ..................................................................................................................... .....66 41.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................... ..... 67 41.2.1 GENERAL.. ..................... ......................................... .......................... .... - -, 67 41.2.2 PIPE AM TERIALS AND FITTINGS ................................................................. ....67 41.23 GATE VALVES. ................... ....... ............. ......... ..................... ................ .... 69 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES .................................................................................................. .... 69 41.2.5 HYDRANTS ...........................................................................................--- ..... .... 69 41.2.6 .SERVICE SADDLES ......................................................................................... .... 71 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS .............................................................. .... 71 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ........................................................................... ..... 71 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES ........................................................................................ ..... 72 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS ................................................................................. ..... 72 41.3 CO NSTRUCTION ................................................................................................... .....72 413.1 MATERIAL HANDLING .................................................................................. ..... 72 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING .................................................................. . ............................... ..... 72 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES. HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS .................................... ..... 74 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES .......................................................... ..... 74 41.4 TESTS ...................................................................................................................... ..... 75 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS .................................................................................... ..... 75 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ........................................................................................... ..... 75 41.5 STERILIZATION .................................................................................................... ..... 75 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT. ................................................................................... ..... 75 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM... ............................ ............ - ...... ....................... ..... 75 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE ..................................................................... ..... 75 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS ....................................................................... ..... 76 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS ......................................................................................... ..... 76 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ...................................................................... ..... 76 41.61 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ .....76 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS ...................................................... ..... 77 41.63 FURNISHAND INSTALL FITTINGS .............................................................. ..... 77 41.64 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS... ........................ - ........................ ......................................... ..... .... . 77 41.6.5 FURNISHAND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS .................................................. ..... 77 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... ..... 78 43 TENNIS COURTS ..................................................................................................... ..... 78 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS ..................................................................................... ..... 78 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS ......................................... ......................... ..... 78 43.1.2 BASE COURSE ................................ ......................... .. ..... 78 43.1.3 PRIME COAT .................................................................................................. .....78 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE ..... ....-• ............................................................................ ..... 78 43.1.5 ............... SURFACE COURSE ............................................................. ... ..... 78 43.1.6 COLOR COAT ...................................................................................... ......... ..... 79 43.2 CL AY TENNIS COURTS ....................................................................................... ..... 80 43.2.1 GENERAL.. ......................................... - ....... ........... . ....................................... ..... 80 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION... .... -- -------- ---- .................................. --- ...... ..... 81 4323 SLOPE .............................................................................................................. .....81 432 BASE CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................. ..... 82 SectionlV 9 9 2008-doc v 9/9/2008 43- 2.5 PERIMETER CURBING ...................................................................................... . 82 43.2 SURFACE COURSE....... ............................ __1 .......... -.1 ........ I.-I ........... I ............ . 82 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER .................................................................................................. . 82 43.2.8 FENCING . . . ............ ............................................................................................ . .83 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS................................................................................................... .83 43.2 10 COURT EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................... . 83 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE.... ......... ....... __ ........... ..................................................... . 85 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) ................................................................................. . 85 43.2.13 CONCRETE ......................................................................................................... .85 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING. . - ........ ____ ..... __ ........ ........ . 85 43.2.15 WATER COOLER..... ................. __ ...... ............. ............ ......................... . ........... . 86 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION ............................................................................................. .86 43.2. 17 WARRANTY., ....................................................................................................... .86 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 87 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ....... .. 87 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ............................................................ .. 87 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY ....................................................................................... .. 87 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ..................................................................... .. 88 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS ................................................................................................. .. 88 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ............... .. 88 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS ....................................................... .. 88 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ........................................................................................... ..88 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ................................. .. 88 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION. ................. .. 89 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ........................................... .. 89 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR.......... .. 89 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING .............................................................................. 89 45.1 INTENT ..................................................................................................................... ... 89 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ..................... ... 90 45.3 MATERIALS ............................................................................................................. ... 90 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PR.F.PARATION ................................................................ ... 90 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION .................................................................................... ... 91 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION ......................................................................................... ... 91 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION .................................................................................. ... 91 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................... ... 91 45.9 PAYMENT .......................................................................... ............... ... 91 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ..................................... 92 46.1 MATERIALS ......................................................................... ...92 46, 1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS ........................................................................................ ... 92 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL__ .................................................................................. ...92 46.1.3 SAMPLES-, ...... __ ....... _ ............ ........... ............. - ......... - .......... I ....... -- ....... _ _ 92 461.4 REJECTION ....................................................................................................... ...92 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ................................................................................................. .... 92 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ............................................................................. .... 93 463,1 HANDLING OF PIPE.. ........... __ ............ ........ .............. - ........ .......... ........... _ _ 93 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGEDSECTIONS................................................................ ....93 SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc vi 9/9/2008 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING ......................................................................................... ............ 93 46-3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE ................................................................. ............ 93 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ............................................................................ ............ 93 464.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS .......................................... ............ 93 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION ............................................................... ............ 93 46.4-3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS .............................................. ............ 94 464.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER .................................................................... ............ 94 46 4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES .......................................................... ............ 94 464.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED .................................... ............ 94 46.4.7 BACKFILLING ......................................................................................... ............95 464.8 POINT REPAIR ......................................................................................... ............ 95 46 4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS ....................................................................... ............ 95 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE .......................95 47.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................. .............95 47.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................... ............. 95 47.3 PIPE ................................................................................................................. ............. 95 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM ......................................................................................... ............. 96 47.5 FITTINGS ........................................................................................................ .............96 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................... .............96 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ................................................................... ............. 96 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE .... ............. 96 48.3 COMPOSITION .............................................................................................. ............. 96 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................... ............. 97 48.5 MATERIALS ................................................................................................... ............. 97 48.6 WATER ............................................................................................................ .............97 48.7 REINFORCEMENT ........................................................................................ .............97 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ............................................... .............. .............. ........ ..... 97 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ............................................................................ ............. 98 48.10 PROPORTIONING .......................................................................................... .............98 48.11 MIXING ..................................................................................................... ..... ............. 98 48.12 APPLICATION ................................................................................................ .............98 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ............................................................................ ............. 99 48.14 SURFACE FINISH .......................................................................................... ............. 99 48.15 CURING ......................................................................................................... .............. 99 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ....................................................... .............. 99 48.17 INSPECTION ................................................................................................. ............ 100 48.18 EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................. ............ 100 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION ............. ............ 101 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ................................................................................... ............ 101 49.2 PAYMENT ...................................................................................................... ............101 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS .............................................................. ............ 101 49.3.1 MATERIALS............................................................................................ ............101 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ...................................................... ............ 102 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .................................. ............ 102 49.4.1 MATERIALS ............................................................................................ ............103 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL .......................................................................... ............ 103 ScctionIV 9 9 2008-doc vii 9/9/2008 49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... 103 49.7 LINER MIX ................................................................................................................ 103 49.8 WATER ....................................................................................................................... 104 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 104 49.10 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 104 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... 104 49.11.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................................... 104 49.11.2 MIXING ............................................................................................................... 105 49.11.3 SPRAYING .......................................................................................................... 105 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING ......................................................................................... 105 49.11.5 CURING .............................................................................................................. 105 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE. . ..................................... __ ........... 106 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 106 49.12.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................ 106 49.12.2 MATERIALS.......... .......................... _'_ ........... ..................... _.._ .... ................. 106 49.12.3 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION .................................................................. 108 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ...........................................................................110 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM .............................................................110 51.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................•---........ .110 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ................................................... .................................. . 1Il 51.2.1 ASPHALT ............................................................................................................ .111 51.2.2 CONCRETE..._. .................................................................................................. 111 51.2.3 COURTPATCH BINDER MIX. ........................................................................... 111 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ......................................................... .111 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE .......................................................... .112 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .................................................................................... .112 51.6 PLAYING LINES ....................................................................................................... .112 51.7 GENERAL .................................................................................................................. .112 51.8 LIMITATIONS. ..................................................... ..................................................... . 112 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ......................... .113 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ................................................................................. .113 53.1 MATERIAL ................................................................................................................ .113 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL .................................................. .113 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL :........... . ............. . .................... .115 53.1.3 MATTRESS NjIRE ............................................................................................... .116 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC ............................................................................. . ......... .116 53.2 PERFORMANCE ....................................................................................................... 0 1 2 3 .116 50 51 52 53 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................117 54.1 SCOPE .........................................................................................................................117 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK .........................................................................................117 54.3 WORK METHODS .....................................................................................................118 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING ........................................................................118 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT .......................................... . ...... . ........ ..................118 54.4 LITTER ..................................................................................... ................................118 54.5 VISUAL CHECK ........................................................................................................118 SectionIV 9 9 2008-doc viii 9/9/2008 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING ........................................................ ...118 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)... ... 118 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL ................................................................................................ ...118 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL .............................................................................................. ...119 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY .......................................................................................... ...119 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION ........................................................................................ ...119 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ....................................................... ...119 54.13 MULCH CONDITION ............................................................................................. ...119 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .................................................................. ...119 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ................................................... ...119 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION .......................................................................................... ...119 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION .......................................................................................... .. 120 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE ............................................................................................... .. 120 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ....................................................................................... 120 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL ........................................................................... ... 1.20 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................ ... 120 55 MILLING OPERATIONS ...........................................................................................121 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ................................... ... 121 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS ....................................................... ... 121 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS .............................................................................. ... 122 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS .................................................................................. ... 122 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ............... ... 122 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ......................................................... ... 122 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ............................................................................................. ... 122 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS ....... ................................................................... ... 123 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ................................................................................. ... 123 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................ ... 123 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................ ...123 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ................................................................................. ... 123 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................ ... 123 57 RIPRAP ...................................................................................................................... ...123 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ................................................................................. ... 123 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................ ... 124 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................124 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL .......................................................................................... ... 124 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ............................................................ .... 124 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ........................................... 124 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................... .... 125 60 SIGNING AND MARKING .........................................................................................125 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................... .... 125 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING .......................................................................................... ....125 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................... .... 125 SectionlV 9 9 2009.doc ix 9/9/2008 62 TREE PROTECTION .................................................................................................. 126 62.1 TREE BARRICADES ................................................................................................ 126 62.2 ROOT PRUNING ....................................................................................................... 126 623 PROPER TREE PRUNING ........................................................................................ 127 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES .............................................................................................. 1.28 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... 128 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 128 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 128 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ........................................................................................... 129 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ................................................................................... .... 129 63.6 POSTING .................................................................................................................... 129 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ............................................................................................ 129 I SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc x 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT - PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR 1. The project is located in Mandalay Park, 532 Mandalay Ave. Clearwater, Florida 2. Installation of tree barricades, silt fencing and install according to manufactures recommendations or as stated on the drawings. The contractor shall note the silt fence shall not be trenched beneath the canopy of trees, pines or palms. Installation of temporary 6' high chain link fencing and gates as shown on the demolition plan. The contractor shall not block access of the fire station where the construction entrance and the temporary contractor's lay down area is located. The silt fence and tree barricades shall be install prior to obtaining the Clearing & Grubbing Permit and the Building Permit No. BCP2009-12244 from the City's Building Department, 100 S. Myrtle Ave.,2nd Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756. There is no fee for theses permits. There is no SWFWMD permit for this project. 3. The city has designated two metered parking spaces during normal working hours 7 AM - 3:30 PM these two meters will be bagged during these hours Monday -- Friday all other times will be for public parking. The contractor shall provide the names of the owner's vehicle, type of vehicle and tag number. The City's Parking Division will issue two placard to the general contractor for these two parking spaces. The contractor shall install temporary standard FDOT signs and post with the information `Contractor's Parking Only from Monday - Friday - 7 AM - 3:30 PM' these signs will be removed by the contractor at the end of the construction period. Locate FDOT signs one foot east of the sidewalk of the designated meter parking spaces. 4. The general contractor shall coordinate his deliveries of materials to the site before 7:00 AM - 10 AM. to minimize the disruption of the parking lot. The contractor shall not block of the drive aisles of the parking lot at anytime during the construction period of this project. 5. All construction materials and employee parking shall be within the temporary fenced in area of limits of work area. No construction materials or equipment shall be in the parking lot during the construction of this project. 6. General Contractor's employee shall not park in the metered parking space unless the meter time is paid for parking in the metered space. If the meter space is expired the Parking Division will ticket the vehicle and no suspension of the parking ticket fine will be provided for by the Owner or have the fine waved by the Parking Division. 7. Any miscellaneous items not included as a line item in the base bid and the contractor feels is required to perform the restroom replacement shall be included somewhere in the base bid line items. 8. The contractor will be required to restore any disrupted areas of the within the limits of work area and any disturbed areas outside of the limits of work areas by the General Contractor of this project, The grass sodding shall be of the same variety that is existing in the park and free of weeds and disease. 9. The contractor of this project is required to provide irrigation system repairs for this project and will be inspected by the owner 10. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed schedule of value for his awarded contact amount and submitted at the pre-construction meeting. This schedule of value shall be utilized as the basis of his application of payment for the project. The contractor shall utilize the standard AIA form in making his application for payment on or prior to the 25" of every month. This application shall he submitted to the Architect for his review and approval prior to forwarding on to the owner for payment. The payment request shall be accompanied with a lean wavier with each payment. Upon final payment request the contractor shall provide with his invoice the certificate of final payment. 11. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed construction schedule outlining all work and minor and major milestones for the project and shown long lead items of materials delivery. This schedule shall be updated. at each progress meeting. This schedule shall also be providing at the pre-construction meeting as well as a list of sub- contractors with contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. 12. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a list of shop drawings as well as list of material submittals for review by the Architect and this list shall be provided at the pre-construction meeting for approval by the Architect as the required submittal list. SeetionIV 9 9 2008-doe Page 1 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 13. The owner shall require 3 copies of the each shop drawing and material submittal and shall be maintained by the contractor in separate file boxes by specification sections in file folders clearly marked item contained in the file folder. These documents shall be turn over to the owner at the completion of the project as part of the close out materials. Also include a list of sub-contractors, material vendors and clearly identify as to discipline with contact information such as contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. 14. Submittals shall be sent directly to the Architect for his review and one copy sent to the owner project manager for review at the same time they are sent to the architect. Total number of submittals will be determined at the pre- construction meeting. 15. The contractor shall note the contract duration is 120 calendar days for construction of this project from notice to proceed. No additional days will be allowed. 16. Progress meeting will be required during the duration of the project and shall be every two weeks and dates shall be determined at the pre-construction meeting. 17. There is approximately 40 feet of 6-inch sanitary sewer line to be connected to an existing 8-inch sanitary line. This work is within the parking metered lot and disruption of this parking space shall be kept to a minimum, The contractor shall coordinate this work and have the work completed within 3 to 4 working days. The asphalt repairs shall be repaired in same like conditions, as well as the reinstallation of the wheel stops and the thennoplastic striping. The contractor delay working in these parking stalls because of miss coordination by the General Contractor he will be required to provide the lost revenue to the Parking Division and will be assessed accordingly by the amount of lost revenue of these metered parking spaces. 18. The removal of existing sidewalks saw cuts of sidewalk shall be performed prior to removal. 19. All new sidewalks shall be 6" thick and sub base compacted to 95 percent and laid with 4'x20' flat sheets of welded wire mesh as specified on the drawings. The wire mesh shall be over lapped 8" and tied together. The welded wire mesh shall be set on chair stands 2" above the sub-grade and in the lower 2/3 of the concrete slab thickness. Concrete shall be commercial fiber mesh 3,000 PSI concrete in 28 days. The sidewalk shall be sawcut 6' on center at a minimum of 2" and expansion joint full depth against hard surfaces and as shown on the construction plans. 20. The building shall have 6-inch wide seamless aluminum gutters with 4-inch aluminum down spouts. All joints shall be soldered and a leak test shall be provided. Down spouts shall be inserted into PVC storm sewer pipes and sealed on three sides even though they are not shown on the Architect's drawings. An air gap shall be on back side of down spout between the wall and the down spout. 21. The demolition of the existing restroom building will be performed by others at a later date and is not part of this contract no. 08-0064-PR, disregard notes on sheet P1.1 & P2.1. 22, The General Contractor will be required to provide his own survey layout and as-built drawings. The General Contractor shall stake out the location of the building and provide a tie in survey to the building department prior to pouring any concrete or installation of the pilings. CONTRACT PERIOD: 120 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS I SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 2 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT - PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 0 Scope Of Work 2.1 0 Line and Grade Shall Be Performed S The Contractor 2.2 Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City 3 0 Definition Of Terms 4 0 Order And Location Of The Work 5 21 Excavation For Underground Work 6 0 Concrete 7 0 Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 0 Reinforcement 9 0 Obstructions 10 0 Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 ? Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 F1 I Dewaterin 13 0 Sanit Manholes 14 El Backfill 15 ? Street Crossings, Etc. 16 0 Raisin Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 0 Unsuitable Material Removal 18 Underdrains 19 0 Storm Sewers 20 0 Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 0 Drainage 22 0 Roadway Base And Sub grade 23 0 Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 ? Adjustment To The Unit Bid. Price For Asphalt 25 ? General Planting Specifications 26 ? Hd e Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 ? Plant Mix Driveways 28 ? Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 0 Concrete Curbs 30 0 Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 RT Sodding 32 ? Seeding _ 33 0 _ Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 Material Used 35 0 Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 ? Street Signs SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 3 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 37 El AudioNideo Recording Of Work Areas 38 0 Erosion And Siltation Control 39 ? Utility Tie In Location Markin 40 0 Award Of Contract, Work. Schedule And Guarantee 41 Z Potable Water mains, Reclaimed Water mains and Appurtenances 42 ? Gas System Specifications 43 ? Tennis Courts 44 0 Work Zone Traffic Control 45 ? Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining 46 Specifications for Polyethylene Sli linin 47 ? Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 ? Gunite Specifications 49 ? Sanit and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 R1 Project Information Signs 51 ? In-Line Skating Surfacing System 52 ? Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 F1 I Gabions and Mattresses 54 ? Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 Z Milling Operations 56 0 Clearing and Grubbing 57 ? Ri ra 58 ? Treatment Plant Safety 59 0 Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials 60 0 Signin And Markin 61 0 Roadway Lighting 62 0 Tree Protection 63 ? Project Web Pages I SectionIV 9 9 2009.doc Page 4 of 126 9/9/2008 I Section IV -Technical Specifications 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida_ 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 5 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: AA Aluminum Association, Inc. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) DOT Department of Transportation (Florida) EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAC Florida Administrative Code FBC Florida Building Code FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code FGC Florida Gas Code FMC Florida Mechanical Code FPC Florida Plumbing Code FedSpec Federal Specifications SectioniV 9 9 2008.doc Page 6 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NPT National Pipe Thread NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SBC Standard Building Code (SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SDI Steel Door Institute SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 - ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 7 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in'compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. G CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (I at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 8 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a dcpth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or .springing. 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 9 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items; cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre- SectionIV 919 2008.doc Page 10 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not darn, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification Failure to follow the above procedure will result in a Violation and a Stop Work Order will be placed on the project. SectionlV 9 9 2008_doc Page 11 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications Depending on the severity of the Violation, the City's Engineering Department may be required to notify the Department of Environmental Protection for enforcement action. The following procedure will be followed: 1 st occurrence - Stop Work Order 2nd occurrence - Notification to FDEP It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance. STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/1 10.0 mg/l PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury - by Method 1631E 0.012 µg/1 0.025 µg/l Total Recoverable Cadmium 93 µg/l 9.3 µg/1 Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg/l 2.9 µg/l Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/l 5.6 µg/l Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/l 86.0 µg/l SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 12 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/l 50.0 µg/1 Benzene 1.0 µg/1 1.0 µg/l Naphthalene 100.0 µg/l 100.0 µg/l If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the City of Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant'the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s),- 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1500 mg/l, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg/l. In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. ' SectionIV 9 9 2008-doe Page 13 of 126 919/2008 r Section IV - Technical Specifications If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half the in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 14 01' 126 9/9/200$ section IV -Technical Specifications Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Detail 4302 Sheet 2 of 3. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 - Asphaltic Concrete - Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry thickness of Type 11 Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type 11 Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a i manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. SectionlV 9 9 2008_doc Page 15 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction ofAASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off- site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the plans, or determined in the field by the Engineer in conjunction with the City's Materials Tester. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. Sectionlv 9 9 2008.doc Page 16 of 126 9/9/2008 Section 1V --Technical Specifications 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ' The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be ' stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ' Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted. 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FDOT Specifications. SectionlV 9 9 2008_doc Page 17 of 126 919/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and. not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exf ltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 18 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS ' 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20-feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. ' 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. ' The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to ' prevent flotation or misalignment. 1 SectionlV 9 9 2008 doc Page 19 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS GUILT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exf ltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials.and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4- inches shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 20 of 126 9/9/2008 ' Section 1V -Technical Specifications 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per ' appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the property line. ' Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. ' Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the ' limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall. be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 5ectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 21 of 126 9/9/2008 Section 1V -Technical Specifications 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking. unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it. is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 22 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements ' are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ' The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to ' complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 91.1 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 23 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 919 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per Section 330-11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of F.DOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of t/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness SectionIV 9 9 2008,duc . Page 24 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the ' Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of 1/4" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. NO RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP) MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches) Type S-I Type S-I with Type S-III Top Layer Type S-III FC-3 Type S-III with FC-3 Top Layer Type S-I with FC-3 Top Layer 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1st 2nd I 1 1 I'/2 1'/2 2 1'/4 3/4 * 1 1 2'/2 1'/4 1'/4 1'/2 1 1'/z 1 3 1% 1'/2 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. Type S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. SectionIV 9 9 2008-doe Page 25 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-Ill per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC--3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 26 of 126 9/9/2008 Section iv -'technical Specifications adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturers specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final. asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over, It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. ' 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed. ' by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the 1 road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 27 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be 1/4" above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured abovc. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://wwwl l.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 28 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. ' 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. t 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 29 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenancc. 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 30 of 126 9/9/2008 Section Iv-Technical Specifications 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D 1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. ' B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve t 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non-Shock Safe-T-Shear Stem 5. Safe-T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 21/2" IN. AND LARGER ' A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-C-509 2. 200 lb. O.W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B ' SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 31 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a I" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from, the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use anAmetek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 32 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded ' to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self- flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7". B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AIRNACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within 4-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high- impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 5ectionlV 9 9 2008_doc Page 33 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure watcrproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of LNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. SectionIV 9 9 2008. doe Page 34 of 126 9/9/2008 j Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. r I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. I SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 35 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING -GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than %2 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. SectionlV 9 9 2008,doc Page 36 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. 13. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. I SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 37 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and SectionIV 9 9 2008.doe Page 38 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -- Technical Specifications incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 39 of 126 9/9/2008 Section 1V -Technical Specifications 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONSMEFINITIONS O.A. or HT.: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C. T.: C. W.: SPR.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST. TR. : Straight trunk. MIN.: Minimum. GAL. : O. C.: DIA. : LVS. : Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. On center, distance between plant centers. Diamete r. Leaves. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 40 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD. : Standard, single, straight trunk. (honer: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner ' Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. I SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 41 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy SectionIN 9 9 2008.doe Page 42 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order I to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS W 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and Il, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. Sectionly 9 9 2008Aoc Page 43 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. 1. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will. be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. SeclionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 44 of 126 9/9/200$ Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. r E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than 1/4 the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p_t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two -'/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. r 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1 /3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over I". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 - 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 45 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under I gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 -'/2 feet above grade. 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 46 of 126 9/9/2008 ' Section 1V - Technical Specifications adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's ' specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - '/2 inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub- grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doe Page 47 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -"Technical Specifications E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well- drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: SectionIV 9 9 2008.doe Page 48 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each 1/2" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7- 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. 1. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 1 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 49 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two 3/a inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 50 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV- Technical Specifications 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING ' A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. ¦ F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 51 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 52 of 126 9/9/2008 Section 1V -Technical Specifications additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi Section]V 9 9 2008.doc Page 53 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as. to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 54 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spades are to be met. 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. I SectionIV 9 9 2008_doc Page 55 of 126 9/9/200$ Section IV - Technical Specifications When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS The State of Florida has imposed strict requirements on Solid Wastes Handlers to decrease the generation of solid waste products and in particular to increase the amount of recycle products. In this regard, the City is required to determine the monthly total tonnage of all construction debris which is recycled in this contract. A recycled material is any material reused in any manner which diverts its alternative disposal to a publicly assessable landfill or by incineration. If a material, such as clean earth, is not normally disposed to a landfill or incineration, then it is not to be considered a recyclable material. The Contractor is required to include in each request for payment the total tonnage of materials which were recycled by the contractor during the contract period for which the payment request is made. Any cost to the contractor for the development and submittal of this information is to be included in the contract items provided in the original contract proposal. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doe Pale 56 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of I±DOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 57 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 58 of 126 9/9/2008 ' Section 1V -Technical Specifications The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown,on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. i Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 - MATERIAL USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 -- CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 59 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 37 AUDIO/VIDEQ RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre-construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 60 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 61 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 62 of 126 9/9/2008 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES I Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and I the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area I are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of I the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a I condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to ' issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION I The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. I 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods I that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 63 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain. storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1 st occurrence - Warning 2nd occurrence - $32 reinspection fee 3rd occurrence - $80 reinspecion fee 4th occurrence - Stop work order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4750. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 64 of 126 9/9/2008 U v a U s U C%] 00 W j p Q d d Ga W a? U p w? UW CA W ? x :n F - w? O?w [W awe ? ? + OxU W ° W ""' ? z U N z boo w o o o?W ?, o oQQ Www n W aH0 O ? ° U W Q c U w? H Q?z O V w O Q N q p rf) 00 "M ? N '~ N ? N n ? n n ? N N W ~ Q w ? F z U a 0 c o a ? a a z ? 0.F ?I q .? .P ? rn p ? O G ? O H y U o? o R ?« U 3 O ro = ? y C r ? o 3 G °i U c c .? N U b U N C4 N Q C3 ? z O y a. o W y Q = A W W O a W Cq ? W N ? O x i.r Q d o ? a ? o ? ? a d w H ?. x d z d C? bA O V 4I CL4 L".r 00 c N T C7? 0 n N a O b c a 7 .p CI Section 1V - Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil. Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 21 - AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doe Page 66 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings ' and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA ' C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: I SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 67 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18 inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to 12-inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury splice kit (3M or equal) approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI/AWWA CI11/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. Each end of the SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 68 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V -Technical Specifications casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing ' itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES ' Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. ' The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch and smaller Diameter: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves.. ' Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ' ANSI/A.W W.A. Standard Specification C509 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze nonrising stem with O ring bonnet seal and internal cast iron parts coated with corrosion resistent coating. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, and valved by-pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3 piece valve box assemble. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to ' accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of ' the City of Clearwater water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, 0 Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant ' SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 69 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B-84-B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and include the following modifications. Must be UL / FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (1-1/2-inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel, Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 70 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications All fire hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant ' may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES ' Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be 1-1/2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. ' 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the ' tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The ' Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. ' 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be ' purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery ' (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backtlow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when ' required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible Backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle Backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. Since installed devices must be tested annually and may be maintained by the City of Clearwater, following are the approved models of devices allowed for installation by customers of the City of ' Clearwater Water Distribution system: SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 71 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications DOUBLE CHECK VALVE 2" and Smaller Lamer than 2" Conbraco 40100 Conbraco 40100 Hersey Beeco Model FDC Herse Beeco No. 2 Watts Model 709 or 007 Watts Model 709 or 007 FEBCC Model 805Y Ames 2000 SS REDUCED PRESSURE TYPE 2" and Smaller Lar er than 2" Ames 4000 SS Conbraco 40200 Conbraco 40200 Hersey Beeco Model FRP II Hersey Beeco Model 6CM FEBCO Model 825Y Watts Model 909 or 009 Watts Model 909 or 009 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412; Clow Corporation 3460; or equal. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING I. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant sterns plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly flushed before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. SectionIV 9 9 2008_doc Page 72 of'] 28 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION ' Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ' ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. ' If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. ' All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. ' All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end, and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at ' bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. SectionlV 919 2008.doc Page 73 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where. possible, he located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18-inches from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit shack or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located 10-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans or specified in the field by the Engineer. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made SectionIV 9 9 2008.doe Page 74 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater Water Division 48 hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the elesest point available te the ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight hours before it is flushed SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 75 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or City of Clearwater Construction Inspection personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or Iump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joints materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. Section1V 9 9 2008.doc Page 76 of 128 919/2008 ' Section IV -Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS ' 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT ' The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. ' 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, ' materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS ' 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C 110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. Didn't the method of payment change to per piece instead of per tonnage? 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, ' materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES ' AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. ' 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all ' plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ' 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, ' material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust SectionIV 9 9 2008_doc Page 77 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of V leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of V of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than t/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of V of Type S-I1I Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will SectionIV 9 9 2008_doc Page 78 of 128 9/92008 Section IV-Technical Specifications be approved. If a deficiency of more than '/a" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 1 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with ' manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled ' or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfaces or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. ' 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. ' The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. ' The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doe Page 79 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 Degree's F and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 80 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV -"technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within ' fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE ' The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY ' The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION ' The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction ' area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE ' The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor ' shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings.. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 81 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one-quarter (1 /4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 82 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV -- Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and ' described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT 25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT 25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. ' 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes ' as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size, ' non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high- density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance ' between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven- eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 83 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV-Technical Specifications the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design - Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: I. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction " Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (I each) - six-foot length aluminum. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 84 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" - 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 85 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole TS Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly, 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the ' Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles. 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION I Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 86 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards. and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. ' . Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction I SectionlV 9 9 2008.doe Page 87 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C-View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 88 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING ¦ 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the 'installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which 1s watertight and chemically resistant to withstand SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 89 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for pre qualification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalifi cation and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SectionfV 9 9 2008.doc page 90 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. I 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ¦ Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. I SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 91 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 92 of 128 9/9/200$ Section IV - Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer. 16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer. 18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer. 21'/2-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer. 28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer. 34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer. 42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 93 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 94 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. SCCtionlV 9 9 2008.doe Page 95 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one)' cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 96 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated. particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100% Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60% Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve 2°/o to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 97 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets, shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 98 of 129 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if. 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 99 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Comp. Cap (cfm) Max. Hose Dia. (In.) Max. Size Nozzle (In.) Min. Air Press. (psi) 365 15/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 2 '/z 21/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 100 of 128 9/912008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. ¦ 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type 11 per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doe Page 101 of 128 9/9/2008 Section iv - "T"echnical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Four six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with F.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. Section.IV 9 9 2008.doc Page 102 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) _ 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to farm the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. SectionlV 9 9 2008_doc Page 103 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 104 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invertwith the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. SectionlV 9 92008.doc Page 105 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV- Technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (49) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 1-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 106 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 I day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86 Bonding Strength 250-300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574 Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412 Elongation 250% ASTM D-3574 Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D-1042 Toxicity Non Toxic 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component. based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength 380 psi (2.62 MPa) at 100% RH (7 day cure) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) at 50% RH ASTM C 190 Permeability 8.1 x10 llcm/sec to (3 day cure) 7.6x10 cm/see CRD 48 55 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 107 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1.500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 X0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft. 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4-5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10-20 Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq, in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 108 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stittbrush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. I SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 109 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained- Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article not used. See Section III, ARTICLE 18 - PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS, 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 110 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V -Technical Specifications site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System • I Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave • 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page I I I of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 507 or more than 1 40°F. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 112 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70°F with 60% relative humidity. 11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article not applicable. See Section III (General Conditions), Article 22. 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table L Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four I-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4'/z inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 ''/z), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 113 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -'technical Specifications Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A-641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B-117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 114 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Temperature -Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade. f 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% 0 Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45% * Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12% SectionIV 9 9 2008.cloc Page 115 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -"T"echnical Specifications • Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest . dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq, ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall. be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. SectionIV 9 9 2008_doc Page 1.16 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to apposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including- 0 Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; + Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; 0 Mulch replacement; Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 1] 7 of 128 9/9/2008 Section. IV - Technical Specifications 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and . debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 118 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his/her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved to advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 119 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. - 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 120 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature ' caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular ' schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible ' to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the fob site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. b.. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for SectionlV 9 9 2008.doe Page 121 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All, surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storrtmwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 122 of 129 9/9/2008 ' Section 1V - Technical Specifications 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS i Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary, to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the ' Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Iastest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand- cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 123 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: * Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. • The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, SectionJV 9 9 2008,doe page 124 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of ' existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and.payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ' The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 125 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V-Technical Specifications 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts_ Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 126 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V - Technical Specifications construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. 1. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. SectionIV 9 9 2008.doc Page 127 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V - Technical Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the cuiTent City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section ,509 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.orW'f'R/I 999/WAI-WEBCONTENT 19990505/ http://www.section508-p,ov/ In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. SectionlV 9 9 2008.doc Page 128 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ' Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back ' to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. 1 Section[V 9 9 2008.doc Page 129 of 128 9/9/2008 Of LLJ ry O O LLI 0 L? LW t Q (? Q N- Z Z J W Lw N Z Z O a J Ljj W LLI :D Q Q O O D C1' U ?p LL. CY- O z J w p U7 LO L` p W J W J U _ -? ? ? W _ m J LLI U < 0 cn Q? W 0 < W O ? W I=- Of :2 w 0-1 < m W CD Q M O m Z m J J m Q W 1 C' O W W W Of Q cy- 0 I=- Z a- 2 a (If cr- Q J Q il? = a- m LL] f- - O ~ ? CK J ? O W o_ U Q Q C) O 00 V-- D O cr CD I - Lij X X C 0 - Z l 5 cfl r- N - W D W W U Q LLJ cl? on- 0 Q0 cn CD wa 000 cl? U n O N z LO Q N J Q W = z o ? Q rY Q :?i n 7; O (1) C) Q) U C3 ? ? O Q) ?-, 7 o ,?. Q) Q o cco E Q) O p -C Q)•0-) O J -C O Q) Q) Q) Q E QT O c O ? U O D O O Z W U Q Q ?- J W W ?- 0 0- O 1 CD ry -7f ?- c0 cn cn o cn 111 0 W a- 1 o CC) ? m o Q ry o W Q - N Cn O z Ln N 7D Q < W = O ? U z 0 Q:f Q ? Q Q z :2 n 7-> '_ APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS November 9, 2009 • Table of Contents • Schedule of Drawings Section Section Number Title Page Number DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 ................ Summary................... ....... .................................................. ._............. ... 01100 - 1 of 2 01322 ................ Photographic Documentation ........................................................................ 01322 - 1 of 2 01330 ................ Submittal Procedures ............... ................ ..................................................... 01330 - 1 of 6 01420 ................ References ......................................................... ---......................................... 01420 -1 of 1 01500 ................ Temporary Facilities and Controls ............................................................... 01500 - 1 of 3 01524 ................ Construction Waste Management .... ............................................................ 01524 - 1 of 1 01600 ................ Product Requirements ......................................... .................................. 01600 - 1 of 4 01770 ................ Closeout Procedures .......................... ........ .............. ..................................... 01770 - 1 of 4 01781 - ............. Project Record Documents ........................................................................... 01781-- 1 of 2 DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02220 ................ Site Preparation, Excavation and Earthwork for Foundations .................... 02220 - 1 of 5 02360 ................ Timber Piling ................................ 02361 ................ Termite Control ..............................-. DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 ................ Cast-in-Place Concrete ............. .................................. ................ .............. ....03300 -- 1 of 14 03320 ................ Precast Concrete U-Lintels and Sills ...........................................................03320 - 1 of 2 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 ................ Unit Masonry .............................. DIVISION 5 -- METALS (not used) DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC 06100 ................ Rough Carpentry ........................................................................................... 06100 - 1 of 2 ' 06160 ................ Sheathing ............................................... .......................... ............ ................. 06160 - 1 of 1 06192 ................ Prefabricated Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses .................................. 06192 - 1 of 5 06200 ................ Finish Carpentry .................... TOC 1 1 of 3 I APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ' 07210 ................ Building Insulation ......................................................................... ............. .07210 - I of 1 07411 ................ Metal Roof Panels ........................................ .....07411 - 1 of 3 07920 ................ Joint Sealants ................................................................................................07920 - 1 of 5 DIVISION 8 -- DOORS AND WINDOWS ' 08100 ................ Steel Doors and Frames ........ ...................................... .................................. 08100 - 1 of 5 08620.......... ..... Tubular Daylighting Devices .......................................................................08620 -- I of 3 08710 ................ Finish Hardware ...........................................................................................08710 - 1 of 6 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09220 ................ Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco)._._..._.........------------._..__....._....__................. 09220- I oft 09623 ................ Water Repellents and Graffiti-Resistant Coating ........................................ 09623 - 1 of 7 09900 ................ Painting..... _ __ .................. ................. ..... __ ............. _ .............................. 09900 -1 of 7 09910 ................ Decorative Quartz Flooring ................................................................ .......... 09910 - 1 of 7 DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES 10155 ................ Toilet Compartments..................... 10155 - I o£3 ..................................................... ....... 10431 ................ Signage.................................................................. ........................................ 10431-- 1 of 3 10520 ................ Fire-Protection Specialties ...........................................................................10520 - I of 3 10801 ................ Toilet and Bath Accessories .............. ............... ._. .......................... 10801 - 1 of 2 DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT (not used) DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS (not used) DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (not used) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (not used) DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 ................ Common Requirements for Mechanical Work. .... ........ ............................... 15000 - 1 of 9 15005 . ............... Instructions and Maintenance Manuals ....................................................... 15005 - 1 of 1 15007 ................ Identification of Mechanical Systems ........ ....... ..._......_............................... . 15007 - 1 of 1 15010 . ............... Plumbing and Piping ......................................................... 15010 - 1 of 3 15020 . ............... Piping and Fittings: Soil, Waste, Vent and Drain..-. ... ___ ... .................. 15020 - 1 of 1 15050 . ............... Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods............................ ....................... 15050 -- 1 of 2 15060 _ .............. Hangers and Supports ............. ....................... ..... ......................................... . 15060 - 1 of 9 i5075 _ ............. Mechanical Identification........... ............. ............... .......... ............................ 15075- 1 oft 15080 . ............... Plumbing Insulation ................................ ............... ....... ............. ................... 15080 - 1 of 3 TOC 2 of 3 I APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1 15110 ....... .... Pipe, Valves, & Fittings: Potable Water ................... ............ .......-.............. 15110 - 1 of 2 15140 ................ Domestic Water Piping ..................... 15150--- ......... Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping ..................................................................15150 - 1 of 4 15190 ................ Hangers and Supports: Piping Systems .......................................................15190 - 1 of I 15200 ................ Plumbing........................ 15201 ................ Plumbing Fixtures, Trim & Specialties ................................. ...................... 15201- 1 of 2 15400 ................ Insulation, Thermal. ......... ...... ........................................ .................. ............. 15400 - 1 of 1 ..............................................................•.........................15410 - 1 of 3 15410 ................ Plumbing Fixtures 15800 ................ Air Distribution ................. ........... ....... ...................................... ........ ............ 15800 - 1 of 2 15830.......... Fans ...............................................................................................................15830 - 1 of 3 15950 ................ Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing ................. .............................................. 15950 - 1 of 4 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050- ........ ..... Basic Electrical Materials and Methods .........-.....-.-...----.............. .......... ..... 16050 - l of 2 16060 ........... ..... Grounding and Bonding ................................ .................... ......... ............. ..... 16060 - 1 of 3 16070 ........... ...................................... ..... Electrical Hangers and Supports ....................... 16070 - 1 of 6 ..... 16075 ........... ..... Electrical Identification ........................................................................... .....16075 - 1 of 3 16100- ........ ..... Wiring Methods... .......... ....................... ................................................. ..... 16100 - I of 3 ' 16123 ........... ................ ... ..... Building Wire and Cable......................................--- 16123 - 1 of3 ..... 16130 ........... ..... Raceway and Boxes ...................... .................................................. ......... ..... 16130 - 1 of 6 16131 ........... ..... Cabinets and Enclosures .................................. ................ ........................ ..... 16131- 1 of 2 16150 ........... ..... Wiring Connections ...................... ................................... ............ ............ ..... 16150 - 1 of 2 16210 ........... ..... Electrical Utility Services, .... ................................................................... .....16210 - 1 of 2 16442- ......... ..... Panel Boards ............................................................................................ .....16442 - 1 of 3 16510 ........... ..... Interior Luminaires .................................................................................. .....16510 - 1 of 3 16530 ........... ..... Emergency Lighting......................................... ..... .....16530 -- 1 of 2 ' End of Tabl e of Contents ? roC 3 of 'I ,. APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement Schedule of Drawings Architectural A-1 .................Title Sheet, Concrete Apron Plan, and Detail A-2 .................Restroom Floor, Reflected Ceiling and Roof Plans, Elevations and Details A-3 .................Building & Wall Sections & Details A-4 .................Interior Elevations, Room Finish Schedule, and Door Schedule and Details Structural 5.1 ...................Structural Specifications 5.2 ...................Foundation Plan & Details 5.3 ...................Roof Framing Plan &Details Mechanical MIA ...............Mechanical Notes and Legend M2.1 ...............Mechanical Plan and Fan Schedule Electrical E1.1 ................Electrical Legend, General Notes and Site Plan E2.1 ................Electrical Plans E3.1 ................Electrical Riser Diagram, Panel, and Lighting Fixture Schedules Plumbing P 1.1 ................Plumbing Drawing Index, Notes, Abbreviations, Legends, and Service Size Calculations P2.1 ................Plumbing Site Plan and Schedules P3.1 ................Plumbing Plans and Riser P4.1 ................Plumbing Details SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 1 of 1 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART1-GENERAL i 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work covered by Contract Documents. 2. Access to site. 3. Work restrictions. 4. Specification and drawing conventions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division I Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement. 1. Project Location: Clearwater Beach, Florida. B. Owner: City of Clearwater. 1. Owner's Representative: Leroy Chin. C. Architect: Plisko Architecture, P.A. 800 Drew Street Clearwater, FL 33755 1. See Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for establishing, administering and using Project Web site. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. 576 square-foot restroom to be erected in Flood Zone A. Restroom shall require 16" depth concrete slab supported on wood pilings with masonry walls and engineered roof trusses with a metal roof. B, Type of Contract. I. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated- 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to area indicated on Sheet C-3 of the Contract Documents. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep adjacent public parking lot and walkways clear and available to the public. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. 1.5 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. SUMMARY 01100 - 1 of 2 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than five days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. C_ Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than five days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances or outdoor-air intakes. 1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U. S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 01100 - 2 of 2 ' APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1, Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1..2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph, Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. B. Digital Photographs: Submit unaltered, original, full-size image files within seven days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. C. Date photograph was taken. d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and .? elevation or story of construction. 1.3 USAGE RIGHTS A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, with minimum size of 8 megapixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of=focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. B, Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect, PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - I of 2 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs weekly. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. END OF SECTION 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 2 of 2 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule. C. See Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs. D. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. E. See Division I Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written. and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1 of 6 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100,01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 1. Other necessary identification: E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "REVIEWED." 1. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1 Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "REVIEWED" taken by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C, Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. SUBMITTAL PROCFDI JRF,S 01330 - 2 of 6 I APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement i. Testing by recognized testing agency. 4. Number of Copies: Submit seven copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return five copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions, b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 1. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. rn. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit three full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 of 6 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection, a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." G. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three topics of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 1. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 of 6 I APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 0. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. r Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: L Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. U. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." V. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. I. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-5of6 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documcnts. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: I. Reviewed. 2. Revise. 3. Rejected. 4. Furnish as Corrected. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1 01330-6of6 APA 09.09 SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 REFERENCES 01420 - 1 of 1 i APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on work restrictions and utility .? interruptions. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. C. :Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch OD top rails. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. r TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - I of 3 i APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work, Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. I. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. I. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. D. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated in Project Manual, 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a_ Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 2 of 3 ,I APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom. Replacement E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements." 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. H. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 3 of 3 I APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. See Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting froze, partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. R Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 1 of 1 APA 09,09 SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2, New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements, 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1 of 4 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 1 Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 of 4 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, fmish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 of 4 I I APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 1 Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 4 of 4 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documcntation. 2_ Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum. of seven days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction pennitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 1 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 2 through 16 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 2 through 16 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. CLOSFOLTT PROCEDi TRES 01770 - 1 of 4 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 2. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 3. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." 5. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 6. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 7. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 of 4 I APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. Three paper copies unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1l-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Providc a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 of 4 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and othcr noticcably, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken. glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish, mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. i. Remove labels that are not permanent. j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. k. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. 1. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. M. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 4 of 4 APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART1-GENERAL 1_1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Requirements: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Submittal: 1) Submit record digital data files and one set of plots, b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit record digital data files and three sets of record digital data file plots. 3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. C. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 1 of 2 i APA 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Format: DWG. 3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 4. Owner will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Oraanize record prints and newlv nrenared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each, set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01.791 - 2 of 2 I McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement I SECTION 02220 SITE PREPARATION, EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK FOR FOUNDATIONS I PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All requirements of Division 0 and Division 1 forms a part of this section. B. A subsurface investigation and soils report have been completed for this project. All work in this section shall comply with the soils report. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with federal, state, local, and other duly constituted authorities in matters pertaining to: 1. Permitting 2. Disposal of and hauling of waste material 3. Safety precautions 4. Barricades 5. Protection of environmental matters 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. Perform all work specified herein as indicated within the grading area, i.e., that area within which earth grades are shown to be approximately 5 feet outside building perimeter. Remainder of property is to be left undisturbed, except as otherwise authorized for such purposes as spoil or stock pile areas, temporary ditches, swales and/or haul or access roads, in which case such authorized areas become part of the grading area. This work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Clearing and grubbing of vegetation and debris of all kinds. 2. Stripping. 3. Excavating to grade and subgrades. 4. Excavating and backfilling for foundations. 5. Providing finish load-bearing subgrades for foundations. 6. Disposal of removed materials. 7. Dewatering. 8. Laboratory testing. B. Related work not specified under this subdivision. 1. Excavation of backfill for utilities. 2. Finish grading. 1.04 GENERAL A. Contractor shall obtain a copy of the soils report for use with this section. B. The Contractor shall examine all drawings and the specifications, consulted the records of adjacent construction and of any existing utilities, and the connections, if any, and noted all conditions and limitations which may influence the work required by this Section. EARTHWORK 02220 - 1 of 5 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement I C. Where recommendations presented in the soils report conflict with this section, the soils report shall govern. 1.05 EXISTING STRUCTURES A. Care shall be exercised during excavation, backfilling, and compaction work to avoid damage to existing buildings or foundations. 1.06 PROTECTION A. Protect trees and dispose of all removed trees including stumps and roots. B. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from equipment and vehicular traffic. C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. D. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods required to prevent cave in or loose soil from falling into excavation. E. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work. F. Control grades in vicinity of excavations to prevent surface water running into excavated areas. G. Conduct earthwork operations under this division to insure against rainwash and silting of watercourses, ponds and adjoining property resulting therefrom. Should such silting occur, restore such areas to their original condition if outside the grading areas, or to lines, grades and conditions shown specified if within grading areas, all at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 MATERIALS 2,01 FILL MATERIALS A. Fill material shall be as specified in the soils report or at least clean fine sand, free of rubble, organics, clay, debris and other unsuitable material. Fill should be tested and approved prior to acquisition. B. Source of new material and length of haul shall be the Contractor's responsibility. C. Drainage fill: Crushed stone or gravel so that 100% passes 1-1/2" sieve with not more than 10% passing a No. 4 sieve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. 1. Identify known underground utilities. Stake and flag locations. 2. Identify and flag surface and aerial utilities. 3. Notify companies to remove and relocate utilities as required. EARTHWORK 02220 - 2 of 5 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 4. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area. B. If required, perform remedial de-watering prior to any earthwork operations. C. Clear and grub site as defined in the soils report. D. Proof-roll the sub-grade in accordance with the soils report and under the observation of the testing laboratory. Proof-rolling will help locate any zones of especially loose or soft soils not encountered in the soil test borings. Then undercut, or otherwise treat these zones as recommended by the testing lab. E. Testing the sub-grade for compaction will be as directed by the testing laboratory and as shown on the structural drawings. 3.02 FILL A. Fill in areas where required shall be placed in loose lifts as directed by the soils report. B. In load-bearing areas, fill shall be compacted as recommended in the soils report or at least to 95% of maximum modified Proctor dry density. A moisture content within two percent (2%) points of optimum indicated by the modified Proctor test (ASTM D-1557) is recommended. C. Perform compliance tests within the fill as directed by the testing lab. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. Excavation shall conform to the dimensions and elevations shown on the drawings, but excavation lines shall be such as to provide sufficient clearance for the proper execution of the work to be installed. Allowances shall be made for work and inspections. Bottom of all excavations shall be trimmed to the levels indicated and sloping surfaces cut in steps shown on drawings. After carrying the excavation to the required depth, the Contractor shall await the inspection and testing of the bearing soil. B. Control of ground water, including all necessary equipment, to maintain all excavated areas in a dry condition shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Sides of temporary excavations can be cut to maximum slope of 1:1. However, no claim may be made by the Contractor for extra work for damages resulting from slope stability failure. D. The bottom of foundation excavations shall be compacted after excavation to densify any soils loosened in the excavation process. Backfill soils placed adjacent to footing or walls shall be carefully compacted with a light rubber tired roller or vibratory plate compactor to avoid damaging the footings and walls. Approved sand fills placed in footing excavations above the bearing level, in trench excavations, and in other areas which are expected to provide slab support and foundation embedment constraint shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 6 inches and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% of the maximum modified Proctor dry density. E. Test all footing cuts for compaction to a depth of 1 foot, as directed by the testing laboratory. 3.04 DEWATERING A. Refer to the soils report for an estimate of seasonal high ground water table. EARTHWORK 02220 - 3 of 5 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement I B. The geotechnical testing laboratory shall determine the depth of ground water just prior to construction to determine what dewatering will be required. C. Water control will consist of, but not necessarily be limited to, well points, sumps, and pumps, in conjunction with berms and any needed ditches. Deep wells will not be permitted. D. Approval by the Architect of data submitted shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for adequacy of dewatering system. In the event that during the progress of the work it is determined that the dewatering system is inadequate, the Contractor shall install and operate such additional dewatering equipment and/or make such changes in the system or plan of operation as may be necessary to perform the dewatering system in an adequate manner. E. Groundwater shall be maintained at least 24 inches below all earthwork, foundations, and compacted surfaces, or as directed by the testing laboratory. 3.05 BACKFILL UNDER AND AROUND BUILDING AREA A. All debris shall be removed from excavations prior to backfilling and filling. B. Backfill under and around building area shall be placed in loose layers not exceeding 12" and shall be compacted as defined in the soils report or at least to a density equal to 95% of the modified Proctor maximum dry density as per ASTM D698-70. C. Backfill in electrical plumbing and mechanical trenches shall be compacted to previously specified density. 3.06 GRADING A. Grade areas to lines and elevations indicated, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finish surface within specified tolerances. Compact and bring to uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown or between such points and existing grades. B. Unless shown on the drawings, slope the grade evenly to provide drainage away from the building. C. Complete the grading operations after the building has been finished, utilities installed, site improvements constructed, and all excavated materials, rubbish, and debris removed from the site. Leave grade for lawns and planted areas clean and at required grades. 3.07 TESTING A. A qualified licensed geotechnical testing laboratory shall be retained to perform all necessary quality control testing for earthwork. B. All testing shall comply with the project soils report. C. See structural drawings for a minimum testing program. D. Provide samples of materials proposed for fills as required. Cooperate with laboratory personnel in obtaining samples, and during quality control testing. 3.08 SPECIAL NOTES EARTHWORK 02220 - 4 of 5 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement A. Fill material shall not be placed against walls until 7 days after grouting of masonry cells. Compaction of exterior fill and interior backfill shall not be performed until wall grout has cured 14 days. B. Do not use drum compactor within 6 feet of walls. Compaction within 6 feet of walls shall be accomplished with a hand operated vibratory compactor. END OF SECTION 02220 EARTHWORK 02220 - 5 of 5 1 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 SECTION 02360 -TIMBER PILING PARTI-GENERAL Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All requirements of this Division 0 and I forms a part of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work I . Furnish and install 25 ton working load pressure treated round timber friction piles of number, circumferences, to depth and in locations shown or directed. B. Related work not specified under this subdivision 1. Excavation and backfill for utilities 2. Excavation and backfill for structures and site 3. Finish grading 4. Construction pile caps C. Data with bid 1. Submit with bid for review and evaluation complete details of the following items proposed for use: a. Timber piles including species and allowable wood stresses b. Preservative treatment including the net retention in weight per cubic foot c. Hammer and equipment 2. Furnish data and calculations indicating both static and dynamic stresses to be transmitted at head, midpoint and tip of piles. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Specifications, Codes and Regulations 1. The applicable provisions of the following publications of the latest issue as of date of opening of bids, but referred to by basic designation only, form a part of this specification except where the extent is limited by the reference thereto. a. Standard Building Code b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D25 Round timber piles D 1143 Method of test for load settlement relationship for individual piles under vertical axial load D2555 Establishing clear wood strength values D2899 Establishing design stresses for round timber piles c. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) C1 All timber products - pressure treatment (general requirements) C3 Piles - pressure treatment M4 Care of pressure-treated wood products d. Federal Specification Board (FED.SPEC.) RR-S-033 Shoes: for wood piles B. Foundation Data 1. Copies of all data collected by owner concerning subsurface conditions are shown on the drawings 2. Such additional data, as may be required by prospective bidders prior to date of openings C. Pile Identification 1. Prior to installation of piles, submit for review and acceptance a plan designating each pile by a suitable identifying symbol. D. Refusal 1. To be determined by the owner's representative in conformance with applicable codes TIMBER PILING 02360 - 1 of 6 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement . I and standards. E. Certification 1. Submit signed certificates containing the following: a. Preservative treatment conforms to these specifications b. Name and address of contractor and supplier c. Quality of piles and date or dates of shipments covered by certificate d. Name of preservative used and retention in pounds per cubic foot of wood treated F. Special Provisions 1. Where piles are shown within 15 feet of an existing structure, pre-drill holes therefor of diameter equal to I inch smaller than least dimension of pile cross section at its midpoint for a depth of half its length or 15 feet, whichever is greater. 2. Where piles are shown within 15 feet of an existing sewer line, pre-drill holes as specified to a level 5 feet below the invert of the sewer. 3. As soon as holes are drilled, insert pile therein and drive to penetration specified below. 4. Take care to insure that dynamic pile stresses created during driving do not exceed the crushing strength of affected piles. 5. Provide hammer having capacity of not less than 15,000 foot pounds of energy per flow and weight of striking element not less than 1.5 times the weight of largest pile to be driven. 6. Use gravity, air or diesel hammer with leads extending to the lowest point the hammer must reach. Provide acceptable undamaged or uncharred cap blocks at all times to protect heads while driving. 7. Should obstructions, e.g. boulders, concrete, piles or timbers be encountered which prevent securing adequate penetration or cause any pile to drift from its required location, cease driving and request instructions. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Timber Piles 1. ASTM D25, friction piles, clean peeled. 2. Fresh headed square headed and shaped to fit the driving head, compute minimum circumference as prescribed by ASTM D 2899 on the basis of the allowable stress for the species proposed across the critical section when subjected to the specified working load. Critical section is the computed area at a point one third of the distance above the tip. B. Preservative Treatment 1. ASTM D 1760 to a retention as listed in Table I for the soil contact, or AWPA Cl and C3 for "Creosote Treatment". Treat surfaced exposed by cutoffs and damaged surfaces as specified in AWPA M4. C. Shoes 1. . Fed. Spec. RR-S-00331 of size and type most suitable for the anticipated driving conditions. 2.2 TEST PILES A. General 1. Furnish test piles for locations shown, circumference and length if required by the geotechnical or structural engineer. 2. Furnish each pile tip with a driving shoe, if required. 3. The contractor shall provide an acceptable reaction assembly of two times the design load. The geotechnical engineer and laboratory shall provide the jack, instrumentation, monitoring and reports. TIMBER PILING 02360 - 2 of 6 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 4. Have testing performed by acceptable laboratory having demonstrated experience in such work and under the continuous on-site direction of a qualified registered professional engineer. 5. Drive each test pile in conformance with Section 05, driving piles to penetration shown for that location or penetration as directed. 6. Drive each test pile with the same type and size of hammer and operating under the same conditions as proposed for driving the permanent piles. B. Tests 1. Prior to ordering or initiating work of installing permanent piles, conduct and complete load bearing tests on each test pile in conformance with ASTM D 1143, except as follows: a. Should rebound measurements, after any loads specified in Paragraph 5.2.1., show net settlement greater than 1/2 inch, stop test and remove loading apparatus. b. Drive pile to an additional penetration of 5 feet or such other depth as may be directed. C. Repeat loading in 5.2.1. and additional pile driving as necessary until net settlement at 200 percent of working load is less than 1/2 inch, after which complete balance of test in conformance with ASTM D 1143, d. Service pile lengths will be determined by the geotechnical engineer prior to ordering. C. Pile Capacity 1. On the basis of the test results, the engineer will provide the contractor with a list showing the length and circumference of the pile to be used at each location, together with the average penetration at that location expressed in inches per blow for the last five blows to reach specified penetration, provided that successive blows have produced approximately equal net penetration for a minimum distance of the last three feet using the same hammer operating under the same conditions as was used to drive the test pile in that vicinity. 2. The right is reserved to require the driving and testing of additional test piles of lengths and circumferences as directed. 2.3 LOAD ON PILES A. Working Load 1. 25 tons per pile, but in no event greater than one half of maximum load per pile as determined by test piles and as specified below. B. Maximum Load 1. That concentric axial test load which causes a net settlement on the test pile of 1/2 inch when tested in conformance with ASTM D 1143. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 DRIVING PILES A. General 1. Unless otherwise specified or directed, install piles in locations, of circumferences and to penetrations shown or directed in each order and spacing to insure against distortion or injury to the pile being driven and to piles already in place. Use approved hammer of same type, size and under same operating conditions as employed for driving the test pile or piles pertinent to the location, including but not limited to cap-block arrangement, weight and length of stroke of striking parts of hammer, number of operating blows per minute, piston area, and effective piston pressure. 2. Handle piles in manner to avoid dropping, bruising or breaking of outer fibers. Do TIMBER FILING 02360 - 3 of 6 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement I not use sharp pointed tools in any manner whatsoever. Should any pile be damaged in handling, discard that pile or repair as directed or approved. 3. Drive each pile continuously at hammer's rated speed preliminary to final seating. 4. Provide a proper anvil and cushion to prevent damage to pile butt. Use cap or cushion block consisting of a solid block of hardwood of proper shape and dimension to fit hammer and with grain of block parallel to axis or pile. Should laminated materials be proposed, provide material of strength not less than that of hardwood. The continuous or frequent introduction of materials or the use of wood chips, small blocks shavings or similar materials to cushion hammer blows is prohibited. Splicing of piles will not be permitted. The use of pre-drilling, spudding or jetting will not be permitted except in exceptional circumstances or as specified and then only with specific approval in writing by the engineer. In such cases, final 15 feet of penetration to be obtained with hammer alone. B. Driving 1. Drive permanent piles of sizes and to penetrations and driving resistances directed. If directed, driving resistance is not obtained at directed penetrations, continue to drive pile for an additional 18 inches or until directed driving resistance is obtained, whichever comes first. In former event, stop driving and request instructions for either of the following alternatives: a. Pile to be accepted as driven b. Pull pile and replace with one of same length but of a larger standard circumference, as directed. C. Pull pile and replace with one of larger directed length, but of same standard circumference d. Let pile rest for 72 hours and then re-drive for an additional 18 inches or until directed resistance is obtained after driving 6 inches, whichever comes first 2. Penetration of piles in a group shall not vary more than 5 feet from the average penetration of that group. 3. Do not drive any pile within 50 feet of new concrete which has not attained a minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi. C. Measurement 1. Make measurements of penetration of resistance to penetration with minimum interruption of driving. Make no penetration measurements for determining resistance to driving when pile heads are damaged to an extent that may affect the validity of such measured resistance nor immediately after a fresh cushion block has been insulated under the striking part of hammer. D. Heaving 1. If, during driving of any pile, a previously driven pile shows evidence of heaving, re- drive each such heaved pile to its original driving resistance at no additional cost to owner. Remove soil that heaves during or after driving to maintain grades. E. Tolerances and Design Modifications 1. Permissible tolerances for piles in place are as follows: a. Location of center of top at cutoff elevation within 3 inches of that shown. b. Plumbness of top within two percent of length c. Cutoff elevation within 1/2 inch of that shown 2. Should any pile fail to meet the above specified tolerances, submit the data to the engineer for analysis to determine whether such deviation affects the capacity of the foundation. In such an event, the contractor, at his option, may elect to perform any of the following, subject to approval of the engineer, all at no additional cost to the owner. a. Pull each improperly placed pile and replace with same pile, if in acceptable condition, or with new pile, driven to proper tolerances and driving resistance. TIMBER PILING 02360 - 4 of 6 I McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement b. Drive new piles to proper tolerances and driving resistance in locations as directed. C. Request and pay engineer to redesign pile cap or other affected structural element and install such redesigned work. F. Damaged Piles 1. The engineer may direct the contractor to pull any pile for inspection. Should such pile show evidence of damage as determined by the engineer, replace it with a new pile of same characteristics without additional cost to the owner. Should the pile prove to be undamaged, re-drive it in same location. G. Pile Cut Off I . After all driving in an area is completed, saw off all tops of piles in a horizontal plane at elevations shown within tolerances specified above, unless lower cutoff is required to remove broomed or crushed material. Cutoffs to become property of contractor and be promptly removed from site. Where, for any reason whatsoever, a cutoff is below the permitted tolerance for the elevation shown, cutoff all other piles in the affected group to the same elevation. Where such group, increase the depth of the ' pile cap by the difference of the two elevations, all at no extra cost to the owner. 3.2 RECORDS, SURVEYS AND REPORTS A. Records 1. Maintain, in approved form, complete records for each pile including, but not limited to: a. Cutoff elevation material and preservative treatment b. Length below cutoff elevation c. Circumferences of butt, tip, 3 feet below butt, and at critical section as defined above d. Driving record listing resistance (blows per foot) for each foot of penetration, and calendar clock time for each measurement, times and duration of each interruption in driving e. Plan showing actual and theoretical location and plumbness B. Surveys 1. At completion of work under this subdivision in an area, have registered professional engineer or registered professional land surveyor make field survey of such work and prepare drawing showing actual locations of each with respect to locations shown or directed and plumbness of that pile. C. Reports 1. Prior to final payment, furnish in suitable format legible copies of records and survey plat to building officials having jurisdiction where so required by existing regulations, and in duplicate to engineer. PART IV - MEASUREMENT, PAYMENT AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.1 Measurement A. Piles will be measured to the nearest 1/10 linear foot in place in the work below cutoff elevation, exclusive of pile show, for each standard pile circumference. 4.2 Payment A. Contract price for piles is based upon linear footage of piles shown on drawings. In addition, the contract price includes all costs for test piles and test anchor piles and associated work. B. The total linear footage of piles of each standard circumference shown on the drawings is for working piles only, and does not include footage for test piles and test anchor piles. C. Payment for the total length of piles of the various standard circumferences and in the TIMBER PILING 02360 - 5 of 6 McCarthy and Associates 09,09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement locations shown, exclusive of test piles, will be included in the contract lump sum price. D. Payment for the specified number of pile tests will be included in the contract lump sum price, E. No payment will be made for withdrawn, broken or rejected piles, or for portion of pile remaining above cutoff point. 4.3 Adjustments A. Where the total length in place of piles of a standard circumference is different from that shown, the contract price will be adjusted by the difference between the two totals multiplied by the applicable contract unit price per foot for addition or deletion of such pile length. B. Where a pile has been directed to be pulled for inspection and that same pile is re-driven, the re-driven length will be paid for at one half the applicable contract unit price per foot. C, Where a test pile is directed to be pulled, replaced with a new pile and re-tested, such retest will be considered as a new pile test. Where total number of directed pile tests is different than the number specified or shown, the contract price will be adjusted by the difference between the two totals multiplied by the applicable contract unit price per each for addition or deletion of pile test. END OF SECTION 02360 TIMBER PILING 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 APA 11.09 SECTION 02361- TERMITE CONTROL PART1-GENERAL Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Soil treatment with termiticide. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label for tenniticide products. B. Product certificates. C. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA-Registered Label. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label. L Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor. b. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75. C. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Dragnet FT, Talstar, Prevail. TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - I of 2 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement d. Syngenta; Demon TC, Prelude, Probuild TC. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment tenniticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly- L Slabs-on-Grade: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. E. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. F. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground- supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. G. Post warning signs in areas of application. H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02361 TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 2 of 2 1 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division I specification sections, apply to this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE OF WORK 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete all cast-in-place concrete work, including formwork, reinforcing steel and all related work as shown and specified, except as specifically excluded hereinafter. 2. In addition to construction of cast-in-place concrete work, the work includes the items listed below: a. Setting anchor bolts, frames, and other items indicated to be embedded in concrete b. Grouting of structural steel bearing on concrete c. Concrete curbs d. Dowels for masonry walls e. Concrete walks f. Concrete pavement g. Laboratory field testing services 3. Cooperate with affected personnel or contractors in setting and/or fastening sleeves, piping, inserts, conduits, hangers, ties and similar items in the forms, where such items are to be furnished and installed under other subdivisions of these specifications. B. RELATED WORK NOT SPECIFIED UNDER THIS SUBDIVISION 1. Foundations and pads not shown on architectural, civil or structural drawings. 2. Furnishing steel frames and grating. 3. Furnishing miscellaneous steel shapes and plates embedded in concrete. 4. Furnishing anchor bolts for structural steel. 5. Furnishing piping and conduit embedded in concrete. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. APPLICABLE STANDARDS 1. Provide all materials and perform all work in accordance with the latest issue of ACI 301 "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete A" and the reference specifications listed therein. 2. The applicable provisions of the latest issue of the following ACI and CRSI Standards are made a part of these specifications. Where the provisions of any reference specification conflict with those of ACI 301, the more stringent provisions govern. CAST-W-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 ACI NUMBER 302.1R 304.R 304.2R 305R 306R 308 309R 315 318 347 70-56 75-18 B 63 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement TITLE Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete Placing concrete by pumping methods. Hot Weather Concreting Cold Weather Concreting Standard Practice for Curing Concrete Guide for Consolidation of Concrete Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures Building code requirements for reinforced concrete Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork Guide for Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete - Committee 503 Report Concrete committee 503 report. Cold weather concreting. TITLE Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, not less than 21 days prior to placing of concrete, the following proposed concrete mix design data: 1. Intended usage and location for each type 2. Mix design for each type 3. Cement content in pounds per cubic yard 4. Coarse and fine aggregate in pounds per cubic yard 5- Water-cement ratio by weight. 6. Cement type and manufacturer 7. Slump range 8. Air content range 9. Admixture types and manufacturers 10. Percent of admixtures by weight 11. Strength test data required to establish mix design B. Submit complete detail and placing shop drawings for all reinforcing steel including accessories that have been reviewed and stamped by the General Contractor. C. Refer to Section 01300 for all submittals. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement A. Portland Cement - ASTM C 150, Type I. Type III may be used where authorized by the Engineer, B. Air-Entraining Admixtures - ASTM C 260, Darax AEA, W. R. Grace & Company, SIKA AER, SIKH, MB-AE90, Master Builders, Air Mix, Euclid Chemical Corp. C. Water-Reducing Admixtures - ASTM C 494, Type D. WRDA-64, W.R. Grace & Company Plastiment, SIKA, Pozzolith N, Master Builders. D. No accelerators, retarders or admixtures containing chlorides will be permitted. E. Use fresh, clean and drinkable water for concrete. F. For normal weight concrete use coarse and fine aggregate to conform to ASTM C33 G. Super Plasticizer ASTM C494 Type. F or G where authorized by the Engineer. H. Fly-ash ASTM C618 Type C618. Maximum loss on ignition shall not exceed 3% by weight. The combined weight of fly-ash shall not exceed 20 percent of the total weight of cementitious material. The fly-ash present in blended cement conforming to ASTM C595 shall be included in the calculated percentage. Do not use for architectural concrete. I. Ground granulated blast-furnish slag ASTM C989. the combined weight of GGBFS shall not exceed 50 percent of the total weight of cementitious material. Slag used in blended hydraulic cement confirming to ASTM C595 shall be included in the calculated percentage. 2.02 PROPORTIONING A. Concrete Strength -- See structural drawings for minimum concrete compressive strength at 28 days. B. PROPERTIES L Provide concrete having the general properties specified for each class of concrete with the following tables to provide workability and consistency so concrete can be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation or bleeding, and to provide an average compressive strength adequate to meet acceptance requirements of ACI 301. 2.03 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE A. Concrete must be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with specifications for ready-mixed concrete ASTM C 94. B. Concrete shall be batched to produce a slump of 4" plus/minus V. Refer to 2.0213 unless noted otherwise. C. Provide at the site, delivery tickets for each batch of concrete showing the following: L Batch number, volume and date 2. Time of loading 3. Design 28-day compressive strength 4. Concrete type CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 5. Cement content in pounds per cubic yard 6. Water content in pounds per cubic yard 7.. Admixtures in amount per cubic yard 8. Maximum amount of water that may be added at the job site. D. Restrict the addition of mix water at the job site. Do not add water without the approval of the general contractor and do not exceed slump limitations or total allowable water to cement ratio. Use cold water from the truck tank and remix to achieve consistency. The reports shall indicate how much water was added at the job site. Note on delivery ticket amount of water added and name of person authorizing. E. During hot weather, conform to the detailed recommendations of ACI 305. F. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F., reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is higher than 90 degrees, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. G. Concrete should be deposited as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation of materials due to re-handling or flowing. H. Concreting should be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement. I. The use of the following is prohibited: 1. Partially hardened concrete 2. Contaminated concrete 3. Re-tempered concrete 4. Concrete that has been re-mixed after it has taken its initial set. 7. After concreting has been started, it should be carried on as a continuous operation until placing of a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries or joints, is completed. K. All concrete should be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placement and should be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of forms. 2.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. GENERAL 1. Inner surfaces of conveying equipment must be free of hardened concrete and foreign materials. 2. All reinforcing bars are to be tied in proper position prior to placing concrete. 3. Provide sufficient time for inspection of all preparatory work before proceeding with the placing of concrete. 4. Immediately prior to placing concrete, sprinkle semi-porous sub-grades sufficiently to eliminate suction and seal porous sub-grades, except where a vapor barrier is used. 5. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers continuously, no deeper than 18 inches. Horizontal cold joints will not be permitted. Fill forms completely using methods to ensure even distribution of aggregate around reinforcement and into corners of forms. 6. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is higher than 90 degrees CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 7. Concrete shall have a wet cure time of 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum temperature. 8. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation of materials due to re-handling or flowing. 9. Concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement. 10. The following conditions are prohibited: a. Partially hardened concrete. b. Contaminated concrete. C. Re-tempered concrete. d. Concrete that has been re-mixed after it has taken its initial set. 11. After concreting has been started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until placing or a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries or joints, is completed. B. CONSOLIDATION 1. Consolidate concrete by vibration in accordance with the detailed recommendations of ACI 309. 2. Internal vibrators must be used in beams, girders and framed slabs and along bulkheads or slabs-on-grade to thoroughly consolidate the concrete. Do not use grossly oversized equipment. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. C. FINISHING 1. Finish concrete slabs in accordance with the finishes and tolerances as specified in ACI 301, and the detailed recommendations in ACT 302. Confirm all finishes with Architect. 2. Dusting of slabs with cement or other materials to absorb excess bleed water is strictly prohibited. TOLERANCE II ITEM CLASS- FINIS Exterior Pavement B Broom or belt Exterior Walks/Curbs B Fine broom Interior Slabs A Troweled Exterior Steps A Nonslip 3. For flat, very flat and super flat floors, "F" numbers are required for defining flatness and levelness. Refer to ACI 301.1R, Fig. 8.15.1.1, for minimum required "F" numbers for type of slab use. D. NONSLIP FINISH 1. Give surface a dry shake application as specified in ACI 301 using crushed selected abrasive aggregate of aluminum oxide. The rate of application of blended mixture should not be less than 25 pounds per 100 square feet of surface. 2. Acceptable products are: TYPE MANUFACTURER Grip-It L&M Construction Chemicals Frictex N.S. Sonnebom Nonslip Euclid Chemical Co. CAST-TN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Emag 20 Lambert Corp. 2.05 REINFORCEMENT Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement A. GENERAL 1. Details of concrete reinforcement and accessories not covered herein or shown on drawings to be in accordance with ACT 315. 2. Reinforcement is to be secured in proper position and thoroughly clean of loose rust, scale, grease or other coatings. B. REINFORCING MATERIALS I. Unless otherwise indicated, for all reinforcing shown provide deformed bars conforming to ASTM A 615, or a 616 Grade 60. 2. Smooth dowels - ASTM A 615 and A 616, plain bars having a minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi. 3. Welded wire fabric - ASTM A 185 plain wire fabric in flat sheets. 4. Plain wire to conform to AS T M A 82. 5. Accessories to conform to ACI 315. 6. Where reinforcing rods are used as supports, use rods no lighter than No. 5. 7. Where concrete surfaces are exposed, make those portions of all accessories in contact with the concrete surface or within 1/2 inch thereof, of plastic or stainless steel. 8. Reinforcing steel should be free of kinks and non-shop bends. Field bends should be only as approved by the architect. C. FIBROUS REINFORCING (Synthetic) I . Reinforcing fibers to be virgin 100% polypropylene fibers, per ASTM C 1116, specifically manufactured for use in concrete, containing no reprocessed olefin materials, with the following minimum physical characteristics: a. specific gravity: 0.91 b. modulus of elasticity: 500-700 KSI C. tensile strength: 70-110 KSI d. fiber length: multi-design gradation, 3/4" maximum. 2. Reinforcing fibers to be supplied by the following approved manufacturers: a. "FIBERSTRAND 100", Euclid Chemical Company b. "FIBERMESH INFORCE e3 or STEALTH e3", SI Concrete Systems C. "FORTA SUPER-NET", Forta Corporation d. "NYCON FIBERS", Nycon, Inc. 3. Fibers to be added in manufacturer's approved amount with a minimum of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard for poly and 1.0 pounds per cubic yard for nylon. 4. Concrete to be batched and mixed in accordance with fiber manufacturer's recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion of fiber bundles into single strands within concrete. 5. Reinforcing fibers may be used in concrete slabs-on-grade in lieu of WWF with approval of the engineer. 6. Submit product data for review and approval. 7. For a "non-hairy" surface use a monofilament fiber. Collated fibrillated fibers wear away in a short period of time. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement D. FIBROUS REINFORCING (alternate to wwf on composite metal decks) PART 3 3.01 A 3.02 A 1. All fibers must meet the criteria in the Steel Deck Institute design manual (Publication No. 30). 2. Cold dravm steel fibers meeting the criteria of ASTM A820, at a minimum addition rate of 25 lb/yd3 (14.8 kg/m3) and possessing an average residual strength of at least 80 psi 550 kpawhentested ASTM C1399, may be used as a suitable alternative to the weldwd wire fabric specified for temperature and shrinkage reinforcement. 3. Reinforcing fiber to be supplied by the following approved suppliers: a. "NOVOMESH 850, or NOVOCON 1050" by SI Concrete Systems b. "DRAMIX 65/60" by Bekaert 4. Steel fibers do not replace rebar over girders, which are used to control negative moment. 5. Steel fibers are to be added at the batch plant and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. EXECUTION PLACING GENERAL 1. Place reinforcing in conformance with the requirements of CRSI 63. Place reinforcement in proper position prior to placing concrete. Placing reinforcement during concrete placement will not be permitted. 2. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, provide minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement as follows: a. Concrete deposited against the ground, 3". b. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with the ground, 2" for reinforcing bars No. 6 or larger, and 1-1/2" for reinforcing bars No. 5 or smaller. C. Interior surfaces, 1-1/2" for beams, girders and columns, 3/4" for slabs, walls and joists. d. See drawing for special conditions. 3. Support reinforcing for slabs-on-grade on staggered concrete bricks or metal or plastic bar chairs and spacers with metal plates. 4. Unless specifically authorized, do not bend reinforcement partially embedded in hardened concrete. 5. Support and fasten all dowels in the formwork prior to placing concrete. Do not place dowels after concrete is in place. JOINTS CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 1. Construction joints not shown in the contract documents must be located and made to least impair the strength of the structure. 2. No horizontal construction joints will be permitted in beams, girders or slabs. 3. Location of any construction joint not shown is subject to review and acceptance by Engineer. 4. Reinforcing is continuous through all construction joints. Obtain bond by roughening surface of concrete in an acceptable manner which will expose CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 B C, D Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement I aggregate uniformly and will not leave any latence, loosened particles or aggregate or damaged concrete at surface. 5. Construction joints shall be cleaned, wetted, and standing water removed. 6. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placement and should be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of forms. 7. Concrete wet cure time to be 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum temperature. EXPANSION JOINTS 1. Reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete (except dowels in floors bonded on only one side of joints) will not be permitted to extend continuously through any expansion joint. DOWELED SLIP JOINTS I . Use completely smooth round bars for dowels. 2. For construction joints, paint half of bar with red lead paint. When dry, coat painted end with satisfactory grease to insure against bond with concrete. 3. For control joints, paint and grease entire bar. 4. For expansion joints, paint, grease and provide a metal expansion cap for one end. 5. Place in forms to insure that bars are perpendicular to joint face. Stop reinforcement at doweled slip joints so that it will not extend through joint. JOINT MATERIALS I. Expansion joint filler non-bituminous type - ASTM D 1752, resin impregnated fiberboard Homosote 300 or Thermosetting Polyurethane, W. R. Meadows' Rescor. Asphalt impregnated materials are unacceptable. 2. Polyethylene Film - ASTM D 2103 minimum 6 mil. 3. Horizontal Joint Sealer - 2-component self-leveling urethane conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-227E, Type 1, Class A. Color to match concrete. Acceptable products are : TYPE MANUFACTURER Daraseal-U A. C. Hom Sonolastic SL2 Sonneborn Pourthane W. R. Meadows 4. Vertical Joint Sealer - 1-component Polyurethane conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-002306, Type Il, Class A, color to match concrete. Acceptable products are: TYPE M TURER SIKAFLEX IA SIKA SONOLASTIC NPI Sonneborn 5. Epoxy Joint Sealer - semi-rigid epoxy, MM80 as manufactured by Metzger McGuire Co., master fill 300 by Master Builders. 6. Epoxy Bond - 2-component 100 percent solids epoxy resin, amine cured. Acceptable materials are Concresive Series by Master Builders, Sonnebom=s Epogrip and Epiweld 580 by Lambert Corp. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 of 14 1 McCarthy and Associates 09,09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement Epoxy Grout - Epoxy bond filled with suitable mineral filler, 100 percent passing the No. 100 sieve, in ratio to insure thixotropic action without impairment of adhesive properties. Compressive Joint Material - expanded polystyrene having a compressive strength not less than 8 psi when the board is compressed to a deformation of 5 percent of its original thickness when tested in conformance with ASTM C 165, modified to change drying temperature to 150°F. Felt - 30 pound asphalt or coal tar roofing felt ASTM D 226 or D 227. E. PLACING DOWELS IN EXISTING CONCRETE Use deformed reinforcing bars as dowels. Drill holes in existing concrete of size 1/2" larger in diameter than the dowel using power-driven drill with tungsten-carbide tipped bit ground to insure against oversize hole, Clean out holes with air Thoroughly swab surfaces of hole and embedded portion of dowel with epoxy grout. Force dowel into place. Wipe off excess grout and let set for not less than 12 hours at a temperature above 60°F. 3.03 FORMWORK A. GENERAL 1. Provide and construct formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and 347. 2. Form design by P.E. registered in the State of Florida. 3. Observe and check formwork continuously while concrete is being placed to determine that there are no evidences of changes of elevations, plumbness, or camber and adjust forms as necessary. If, during construction, any such evidence or other defect appears, stop the work, remove concrete placed, if necessary, and repair formwork or supports before proceeding. 4. Earth cuts may be used as forms for footing vertical surfaces increase size 2 inch. 5. Forms and shoring is the responsibility of General Contractor. B. FORMWORK MATERIALS 1. Make forms of lumber, plywood, metal or other materials suitable to provide the strength and tolerances specified herein before and the surface finishes specified hereinafter, 2. Forming exposed surfaces use any of the following materials as suitable for the specified finish, and to produce smooth uniform surfaces, true-to-line, in order that surfaces produced will require little finishing: a. New plastic-bonded natural plywood, American Plywood Association, HD Overlay Plyform Class I, Ext-APA, or equal. 3. For forming exposed surfaces use plywood, or other nonmetallic surfaces free from knots, warps, breaks, or other defects likely to cause irregular surfaces. 4. Provide commercial formulation form coating compounds with maximum VOC of 350 mg/l that will not bond with stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface treatments. C. REMOVAL OF FORMS Forms and shoring in the formwork supporting the weight of concrete, in beams, slabs and other structural elements are to remain in place until the CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 D 3.04 A B C Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement I concrete has reached its specified 28-day compressive strength. 2. Formwork and facing forms for members such as grade beams, foundation walls and spread footings not supporting the weight of concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from the removal operations. 3. Arrange shores and other vertical supports so that the non-load carrying form-facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing the shores and supports. 4. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, continue curing of both the unexposed and exposed concrete by one of the methods specified in section "Curing and Protection". REMOVAL STRENGTH 1. Removal Strength - The concrete will be presumed to have reached its .specified strength when additional test cylinders (paid for by contractor) are field cured along with the concrete they represent and have reached the strength specified. REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS GENERAL 1. Patch all tie holes and repair all honeycombed and defective areas immediately after form removal. 2. For surfaces other than those to be backfilled against, use patching mortar. 3. For surfaces to be backfilled against, use mastic damp-proofing compound, except that where reinforcing is exposed, use patching mortar. 4. Remove all honeycombed and defective concrete down to sound concrete prior to patching. Thoroughly clean the holes of dirt and debris. PATCHING MORTAR I. Cut edges of honeycombed and defective concrete to form dove-tail (undercut) joints. No feather edges will be permitted. 2. Apply a chemical bonding agent to voided surface. An acceptable product is L&M Construction chemicals - Everbond or equivalent. 3. Patch the cement mortar as specified in ACI 301, or with proprietary patching compounds, except that proprietary patching mixtures may be not used on exposed surfaces. 4. Acceptable proprietary patching mixtures are: a. Euclid Chemical Corporation - Poly Patch b. SIKA - Sikaset Mortar C. Emaco R Series - Master Builders d. Lambert Corp, Lambco Vinyl Patch e. Sonneborn - Sonopatch MASTIC DAMP-PROOFING COMPOUND 1. Patch full depth of hole and flush the surface with emulsified asphalt mastic heavy viscosity for trowel application. Prepare and place in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Acceptable products are: a. W. R. Meadows - Sealmastic Trowel Mastic b. Euclid Chemical Company - Damp-proofing Asphalt Coatings CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement C. Sonneborn - Hydrocide 700 Mastic d. Lambert Corp - Waterban 60M 3.05 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES - GENERAL A. After removal of forms, give surfaces of concrete the following finishes as specified in ACI 301. SURFACE FINISH Unexposed Rough Form Exposed Smooth Form Exposed to Public View Smooth Rubbed 3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION A. GENERAL 1. Conform to the applicable detailed recommendations of ACI 301 and 308. 2. Hot weather curing to be in accordance with applicable ACI Standard 305. 3. All cast-in-place concrete must be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for a minimum of 7 days following the placing of the concrete by the use of a water spray, water saturated fabric, moisture retaining membrane or liquid curing compound. 4. Full curing days will be determined by the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof during which the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50°F. 5. Cure slabs-on-grade for the first 72 hours by the use of a. fog spraying b. ponding c. sprinkling d. continuously wet absorptive mats or fabric e, continue curing by use of moisture retaining cover until concrete has obtained its specified 28 day compressive strength f. or liquid curing compound after finishing process is completed. g. concrete wet cure time to be 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum temperature. 6. Submit materials and method of curing for review. 7. Do not use moisture retaining curing compounds for curing surfaces to receive the following coverings, unless it has been demonstrated that such compounds will not prevent bond of: a. Carpet b. Flexible flooring c. Ceramic tiled floors d. Other specified floor systems B. MATERIALS 1. Where moisture retaining membranes or curing compounds are used for curing, provide only materials conforming to the following requirements: a. Polyethylene Film - ASTM C171, Type Il b. Waterproof Paper - ASTM C 171, Type I C. Absorptive Cover - AASHTO M 182, Class 3, Burlap cloth made from Jute or Kenaf or ASTM C 440 cotton mats CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 d. ASTM C309 spray on at max. C TEMPERATURE, WIND AND HUMIDITY Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement I Do not permit concrete not fully cured to be exposed to excessive temperature changes or high winds. 3.07 A B 3.08 EMBEDDED ITEMS GENERAL 1. Prior to concreting, place all embedded items to be provided under this subdivision or to be furnished under other subdivisions for installation under this subdivision. 2. Give all contractors whose work is related to the concrete or must be supported by it, ample notice and opportunity to introduce and/or furnish embedded items before the concrete is placed. 3. Make certain that all embedded items furnished and set in forms by them are secured in position, and exercise due care not to disturb or damage their work while placing concrete. 4. Set anchor bolts for steel and equipment in accordance with setting drawings or templates which have been reviewed and found satisfactory. 5. Where holes in concrete for such purposes as recesses for railing posts, passageways for pipes, and the like are shown formed by sleeves, the contractor may, at his option, provide such holes by drilling with a acceptable diamond or tungsten carbide tipped drill bits. Fill with epoxy seal after railings are in place. EMBEDDED ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED UNDER THIS SUBDIVISION 1. Dovetail anchor slots and dovetail brick anchors - DAS-G20 beehive dovetail anchor slot as manufactured by Gateway Building Products, together with DBA-G14 dovetail brick anchors, provide masonry trades with one anchor for each 16" of anchor slot or fraction thereof plus one additional anchor for each vertical section. Place anchor slots F-4" on center in beams and walls where masonry abuts and one slot in each face of each column faced with masonry. Furnish anchors to space 16" on center in slots. 2. Plastic reglets for above and below grade counter flashing. Make of Type A rigid polyvinyl chloride, 0.060" thick, as manufactured by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. or equal. 3. Sleeves -galvanized steel pipe ASTM A 120, or plastic pipe ASTM D 2661, ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 2852, bituminized fiber pipe conforming to ASTM D 1861 or Wilson anchor bolt sleeve. 4. Column Anchor Bolts - ASTM F 1554. Furnish with one leveling nut plus one nut and one washer. 5. Anchor Bolts - ASTM A 307. As shown on drawings. 6. Cast Iron Frames and Grates - as manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company. Castings as manufactured by Flockhart Foundry Company or McKinley Iron Works may be acceptable, provided the dimensions and design are comparable in all respects. 7. Water stops locations as shown on drawings. VAPOR RETARDER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12 of 14 I McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement ' 1. Provide sub-grade under concrete slabs-on-grade with vapor barrier consisting of polyethylene film not thinner than 10 mils, conforming to ASTM E1745, or asphalt laminated reinforced Kraft paper with polyethylene coating on both sides. Moistop as manufactured by FortiFiber Building Systems Group. 2. Provide film in width and length not less than one foot larger than ' dimensions of slab sub-grade unless patently impracticable. Lap edges not less than 6" and tape continuously. Take care to avoid puncturing film. Immediately prior to placing concrete, tape-seal all tears, cuts and holes. 3.09 GROUTING OF BASE PLATES 1. Nonferrous grout acceptable products are: ' TYPE MANUFACIURE Crystex L&M Construction Chemicals Five Star U.S. Grout Sonogrout Sonneborn Euco N.S. Euclid Chemical Company Construction Grout Master Builders Vibroprvf 411 Lambert Corp. ' 2. Mix and place in conformance with printed instructions of the manufacturer. 3.10 TESTING ' A. GENERAL 1. The services of an independent testing laboratory shall be retained for obtaining test specimens and performing quality control work, routine testing of materials or proposed mix designs and of resulting concrete for compliance with technical requirements of specifications. ' 2. Testing of field-cured test cylinders, or testing required because of changes requested by contractor in materials or proportions of the mix, as well as any extra testing of concrete or materials occasioned by failure to meet ' specification requirements, to be at contractor's expense. 3. Failure of the testing laboratory to detect any defective work or materials is not in any way to prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered, nor is it to obligate the owner for final acceptance. 4. The testing agency and/or its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the specifications, not to approve or accept any portion of the work, not to act as foreman or perform ' other duties for contractor. B. SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE TESTING AGENCY Field Sampling - Secure from different batches, on a truly random basis, composite samples for all field testing required below in accordance with ASTM C 172 where applicable. Take all samples at discharge end of conveying system. Clearly mark each test specimen master as to exact part of the structure represented, class of concrete curing conditions, temperature of concrete, and time and date of sample. Compressive Strength Test - mold and cure test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31 and test each cylinder for strength in accordance with ASTM C 39. Take one "test set" consisting of four cylinders for each day's pour of 5 0 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 3.11 A Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement I cubic yards, or fraction thereof. Test cylinders one at 7 and two 28 days, one hold. 3. Slump Tests - determine slump range for each "test set" in conformance with ASTM C 143. 4. Air Content Test - determine air content for each "test set" for air-entrained concrete in accordance with ASTM C 231. 5. Submit two copies of the results in each of the above tests and inspection to the contractor and the owner's representative and Engineer. 6. Should any of the test results fail to meet the requirements specified, make an immediate telephone report to the contractor and the owner's representative. 7. Furnish evaluation reports of compression tests as recommended by ACI 214 when any compression test fails to meet the specified strength. 8. Criteria for acceptance of concrete cylinder tests: a) Every arithmetic average of any consecutive three tests equals or exceed fc, and b) No individual strength test (average of two cylinders) <fc by more than 500 psi. ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE GENERAL Acceptance of structure will be made in conformance with ACI 301, except that contractor must pay all costs incurred for providing any additional testing or analysis required when strength of structure is considered potentially deficient. S CRACKS 1. The contractor will be required to restore without cost to the owner any concrete which develops cracks within a period of one year after placement which has not been caused by action of the owner or others in over stressing the concrete. 2. Repair the cracks by means that will restore the cracked members to their designed strength and appearance by acceptable methods which will not impair the appearance of the affected surfaces, if exposed. Such repairs must be performed by use of suitable epoxy cements employed by an organization having satisfactorily demonstrated ability in the techniques necessary to effect such repairs, or by other acceptable methods. END OF SECTION 03300 CAST-TN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 14 of 14 ' McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 03320 PRECAST CONCRETE U-LINTELS AND SILLS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: precast concrete U-lintels and sills B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Masonry Units 2. Concrete Reinforcement 3. Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 1. C33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates 2. C150 - Specification for Portland Cement B. Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute (PCI) Standards: Manual for Quality Control for Precast and Pre-Stressed Concrete MNL-116. C. American Concrete Institute: Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318) D. American Concrete Institute: Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's catalog engineering data. B. Manufacturer shall rate U-lintel units for gravity, uplift, and lateral loads in units of pounds per linear foot. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator's Qualifications: Units shall be fabricated by a firm engaged in the manufacturing of precast and pre-stressed concrete U-lintels and sills for a minimum of 5 years. Fabricator shall have a quality assurance program that complies with the procedures of Manual 116 by the Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute (PCT). B. Plant records of production and quality control shall be kept in accordance with PCI recommendations and made available upon request for the Architect. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ' A. If storage is required prior to erection, take all necessary precautions to provide protection to prevent damage prior to installation. Maintain units free of dirt and airborne pollutants until immediately prior to erection. 1 PRECAST CONCRETE U-LINTELS AND SILLS 03320- 1 of 2 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Replace all units that are damaged due to mishandling at the job site. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I or 111, gray color 2. Aggregates: ASTM C33 1 Water: Potable 4. Admixtures: Shall not contain calcium chloride or chloride ions 2.02 FABRICATION A. Unless specified otherwise, conform to PCI MNL-116. B. All U-lintel units 14 feet in overall length and shorter shall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 3500 psi at 28 days. C. All U-lintel units exceeding 14 feet in overall length shall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 6000 psi at 28 days and shall be pre-stressed concrete. D. All sill units shall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. E. All units shall be sand block finish except pre-stressed, 6" wide, and 12" wide U-Lintels shall be smooth form finished. F. Tolerances shall be per PCI MNL-116. G. Minor patching in plant is acceptable provided structural adequacy of units is not impaired. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FURNISHING A. Furnish to the concrete masonry unit installer, all units that will be installed as part of the work of that section. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect all stored and installed units from job site debris and impact. B. Units damaged during storage shall be replaced if beyond repair to restore its structural adequacy. END OF SECTION 03320 PRECAST CONCRETE U-LINTELS AND SILLS 03320- 2 of 2 ' McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply this Section. ' 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide labor, material, equipment and perform'operations necessary for, and ' incidental to, erection of masonry work. S. Related sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 3 section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" ' C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels in unit masonry are specified in Division 5 Section Metal Fabrication". 2. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry are specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry". 3. Reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing are specified in Division 7 Section Flashing and Sheet Metal". 4. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are specified in Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames". ' 5. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are specified in Division 8 Section "Custom Hollow Metal Work". 6. Sealants 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths ' (fm): I. fm = 1500 psi on net area. ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, manufacturers literature and/or drawings of material that is pre- fabricated or pre-assembled. I . Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. 1 Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing ' of Concrete Reinforcing" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. 3. Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General Contractor. 1 UNIT MASONRY 04200-1 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 4. Material certificates signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying that each type of masonry unit complies with requirements specified in referenced unit masonry standard, including fire performance characteristics. 5. Hot weather construction procedures evidencing compliance with requirements specified in referenced unit masonry standard. 6. Results from tests and inspections performed by Owner's representatives will be reported promptly and in writing to Architect and Contractor. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit masonry standard: ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures". B. Fire performance characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistances has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Single source responsibility for masonry units: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from the manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. D. The contractor shall retain a qualified testing laboratory to perform the following tests: 1. Sample and test grout in accordance with ASTM C1019 for each 5000 square foot of masonry. 2. Slump tests - ASTM C143. E. When requested by the Architect/Engineer, a qualified testing laboratory shall be retained to perform masonry prism test in accordance with ASTM E447, Method B, modified as follows: 1. Prisms shall be stack bond, one unit long and thick with a full mortar bed. 2. Limit height/thickness ratio from 1.33 - 5.00 3. Provide a minimum of one joint. One set of three (3) prisms prior to construction and during construction for each 5000 square feet of wall. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry material to project in undamaged condition. , B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, ' contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air-dried condition. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location. ' D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained ' and contamination avoided. 1 i7NiT MASONRY 04200-2 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. B. Extend cover to minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. C. Where one wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. D. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. E. Stain prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. F. Protect base of walls from rain splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of covering spread on ground and over wall surface. G.' Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. H. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finish from mortar droppings. 1. Hot weather construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard. PART2 GENERAL 2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specified in this Section applicable to each material indicated. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry required. B. Masonry Units for Fire-Rated Walls 1. Provide fire-rated units which are rated product of manufacturer listed in latest revision of building materials list, published by UL. In lieu of above rating, furnish fire resistive units on basis of examination, tests and report by nationally recognized testing agency acceptable to governing authorities and codes having jurisdiction. Report must state that units proposed to be furnished are equivalent in fire rating to those products furnished by producers in above UL building materials list. UNIT MASONRY 04200-3 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement C. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated below for size that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units. D. Concrete masonry units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings. E. Provide Type II, non-moisture controlled units. F. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. G. Hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units: ASTM C 90, Grade N and as follows: I . Unit compressive strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. 2. Use inspection and ceanout holes at bottom of wall reinforced vertical cells for grouting lifts over 5 feet high. Cleanout holes should be 3" minimum, see ACI 530.1-02, Section 3.2F. See grout space requirements for various grout pour heights in ACI 530.1-02, Section 3.5C with Table 7. See Florida Building Code page 35.1 H. Weight classification: Normal weight 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Mortar - Type M or S B. Grout - 2500 psi at 28 days C. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or 11, Provide natural color. D. Ready-mixed mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in this article, combined with set controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 270. E. Hydrated lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. F. Aggregate for mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. G. Aggregate for grout: ASTM C 404. H. Water: Clean and potable. 2.04 REINFORCING STEEL A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article, formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. UNIT MASONRY 04200-4 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Description: Welded wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner an tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire diameter for side rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage). C. For single wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: 1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches O.C. D. For multi-wythe masonry provide type as follows: 1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross spaced not more than 16 inches O.C. 2. Number of side rods for multi wythe concrete masonry: One side rod for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches or less in nominal width. E. Tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box-type cross ties spaced not more than 16 inches O.C., with side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of backup wythe and ties extended to engage the outer wythe by at least 1-1/2" inches. F. Use units with adjustable two piece rectangular ties where horizontal joints of facing wythe do not align with those of backup by more than and where indicated. G. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering joint reinforcement that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AA Wire Products/Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America 2.05 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of reference unit masonry standard and this article. B. Galvanized carbon steel wire: ASTM A 82, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. C. Wire diameter: 0.1875 inch. D. Galvanized heavy thickness steel sheet: ASTM A 635 (commercial quality) hot-rolled carbon steel sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525, Class B3, for rigid anchors fabricated from steel sheet or strip with a thickness of 0.180 inch and greater. E. Steel plates and bars: ASTM A 36, hot dipped galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153, Class B3, as applicable to size and form indicated. 1 UNIT MASONRY 04200-5 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement I F. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2.06 BENT WIRE TIES A. Individual units prefabricated from bent wire to comply with requirements indicated below: Tie shape for hollow masonry units. laid with cells vertical: Rectangular with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. B. Type for masonry where coursing between wythes align: Unit ties bent from one piece of wire. C. Type for masonry where coursing between wythes does not align: Adjustable ties composed of two parts, one with pintles, the other with eyes, maximum misalignment 1-1/4 inches. 2.07 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL WORK A. General: Two piece assemblies as described below allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and framework parallel to plane of wall, but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it. B. For anchorage to concrete framework, provide manufacturer's standard with dovetail anchor section formed from sheet metal and triangular shaped wire ties section seized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face and as follows: 1, Wire diameter: 0.1875 inch 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Unit type masonry inserts in concrete: Cast iron or malleable iron inserts of type and sized indicated. B. Dovetail slots: Furnished dovetail slots, with filler strips, or slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.0336 inch (22 gage) sheet metal. 2.09 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS A. Anchors as described below, with capacity to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory. 1. Type: Chemical anchors 2. Type: Expansion anchors UNIT MASONRY 04200-6 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Corrosion protection: Carbon steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). C. For cast-in-place and post-installed anchors in concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times loads imposed by masonry, D. For post-installed anchors in grouted concrete masonry units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times loads imposed by masonry. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES ' A. Non-metallic expansion joint strips: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2 (closed cell), Class A (cellular rubber and rubber-like materials with specific resistance to petroleum base oils), Grade 1 (compression deflection range of 2-5 psi), compressible up to 35 percent, of width and thickness indicated, formulated from the following material: 1. Neoprene 2. Urethane 3. Polyvinyl chloride B. Pre-formed control joint gaskets: Materials as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1, Styrene-Butadiene rubber compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation 2AA-805 2. Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D 2287, General Purpose Grade, Type PVC- 65406 . C. Bond breaker strips: Asphalt saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job mixed detergent solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2 cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water, B. Job mixed muriatic solution: Solution of 1 part muriatic acid and 10 parts clean water, r mixed in a non-metallic container with acid added to water. C. Proprietary acidic cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength, general purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned, D. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a concentrated blend of surface acting acids, cheating, and wetting agents. E. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. UNIT MASONRY 04200-7 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement F. Available products: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be used to clean until masonry surfaces includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. "Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent", ProSoCo, Inc. 2. "Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent", ProSoCo, Inc. 3. "Sure Klean Vana Trol", ProSoCo, Inc. 2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, antifreeze compounds, or admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. C. Procedures of ASTM C780 is to be used to test and evaluate mortar and establish pre- construction datum and quality control testing for types of mortar indicated below: 1. Type M or S D. Grout for unit masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 and referenced unit masonry standard. 2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete masonry unit tests: For each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested by qualified independent testing laboratory for strength, absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C 140, if required by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Mix mortar and grout in power driven, drum type mixers. Operate mixer a minimum of S minutes after addition of all materials. B. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. C. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other sections of the specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. Coordinate masonry with all adjacent work of other trades. UNIT MASONRY 04200-8 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement D. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. E. Cut masonry units with motor driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unshipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining constructions. Use full size units without cutting where possible. F. Matching existing masonry: Where applicable, match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of new masonry with existing masonry. G. Do not use masonry units with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with construction tolerances of ACI 530 or N.C.M.A. 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Bond pattern for exposed masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. 1. One half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bounded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at comers. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. E. Stopping and resuming work: In each course, rack back 1/2 unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3 unit length for one -third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly (if required), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. F. Re-temper mortar as necessary to keep plastic. Use no mortar after setting has begun or after 2 1/2 hours of initial mixing. G. Built-in work: As construction progresses, built-in items specified under this and other sections of the specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. H. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. UNIT MASONRY 04200-9 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. J. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. K. Reinforced vertical concrete blocks cells, grouting solid where indicated on plan. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. 3.06 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch of exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated, C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bed reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. D. Provide horizontal joint reinforcement at doors and windows for first and second block course above and below apertures. Run reinforcing continuous or extend two feet from aperture edge. .? 3.07 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following:. 1. Provide an open space not less than I inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 26 inches ox. horizontally. 3.08 MOVEMENT (CONTROL AND EXPANSION) JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. UNIT MASONRY 04200-10 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond breaker strips on in ends of block units on one side of control joint. Fill the joint with mortar and rake joints in exposed faces. 3,09 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1'-0" for brick size units and 2'-0" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide reinforced precast concrete lintels. Cure precast f lintels before handling and installation. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. General: Install reinforced unit masonry to comply with requirements Or referenced unit masonry standard. B. Temporary formwork: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. Contractor is completely responsible for the proper design and construction of all temporary forms and bracing, C. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. D. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. E. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. ' 3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. C. Final cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: r UNIT MASONRY 04200-11 of 12 1 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 D Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement I 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and non.-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet all surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in N.C.M.A. TEK 45 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY 04200-12 of 12 APA 11.09 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking and hailers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency . certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade. 1. Application: Framing other than interior partitions. 2. Species: a. Southern pine; SPIB. b, Douglas fir-south; WWPA. c. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. B. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 of 2 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture, B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. 2.6 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated .on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 2. USP Structural Connectors. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Metal framing anchors shall be stainless steel. D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. D. Comply with. AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. E. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 of 2 I APA 11.09 SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A, Section Includes: 1. Roof sheathing. 2, Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Plywood: DFPA CD with exterior glue. 2.2 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: DFPA CD with exterior glue. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof sheathing, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated in Structural Specifications. D. Coordinate roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. END OF SECTION 06160 SHEATHING 06160 - 1 of 1 I McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Clearwater Beach Restrooms SECTION 06192 PREFABRICATED METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES PART I GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE OF WORK 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services for fabrication, delivery, unload and store in locations directed and erect all wood trusses shown and specified to include the following: a. Gable-shaped trusses. b. Hip and girder trusses at hip ends of roof. C. Scissors trusses. d. Monopitch trusses. e. Parallel chord 4 x 2 wood trusses. f. Piggy back trusses. B. Related work not specified under this subdivision: I . Roof sheathing is specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" or on the structural drawings. 2. Setting anchor bolts, cast-in-concrete or masonry. 3. Pressure treated lumber. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Prefabricated metal-plate-connected wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-connected members that are fabricated from dimension lumber and that have been cut and assembled prior to delivery to the project site. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Publication 1. Western Wood Products Association Publication: Standard Grading Rules For Western Lumber. 2. National Forest Products Association Publication: National Design Specification for Stress Graded Lumber and its Fastenings 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Standards: Standard Grading and Dressing Rules for Douglas Fir, West Coast Hemlock, Sitka Spruce, White Fir, and Western Red Cedar Lumber, No. 16 4. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau: Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber 5. Southern Forest Products Association. PRE-FAB METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-1 of 5 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Clearwater Beach Restrooms B. TPI Standards: Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following Truss Plate Institute (TPI) publications: 1. "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 2. "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Parallel Chord Wood Trusses." 3. "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses." 4. "Commentary and Recommendations for Bracing Wood Trusses." 5. "Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." C. Connector Plate Manufacturer's Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with TPI quality control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI "Quality Standard for Metal Connector Plate Manufacture." D.. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of N.F.P.A. "National Design Specification for Wood Construction." E. Single-Source Enginccring Responsibility: Provide trusses engineered by the metal plate connector manufacturer to support superimposed dead and live loads indicated, with design approved and certified by a qualified professional engineer. F. Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the installation of metal-plate-connected wood trusses similar to those of this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. G. Fabricator's Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements for quality control and is experienced in prefabricating metal-plate-connected wood trusses similar to those of this Project that have a record of successful in-service performance: Fabricator participates in a recognized quality assurance program that involves inspection by SPIB; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; Truss Plate Institute; or other independent inspection and testing agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. H. Single Source Responsibility for Connector Plates: Provide metal connector plates from a single manufacturer. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for lumber, metal connector plates, hardware, fabrication process, and fasteners. B. Shop drawings indicating species, species group, sizes, and stress grades of lumber to be used; pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required; type, size, material, finish, design values, and location of metal connector plates; and bearing details. 1. To the extent engineering design considerations are indicated as fabricator's responsibility, include design analysis indicating loading, assumed allowable stress, stress diagrams and calculations, shop drawings and other information PRE-FAB METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-2 of 5 I McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Clearwater Beach Restrooms needed for review that have been signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Product certificate, signed by officer of fabricating firm, certifying that metal- plate-connected wood trusses supplied for Project comply with specified requirements. D. Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General Contractor. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and store trusses with care and comply with manufacturer's instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning, or other cause which trusses are not designed to resist or endure. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 . CONNECTOR PLATE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal connector plates that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Simpson Strong-Tie Connectors 2. Hughes Manufacturing. 3. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 4. Bemax of Florida, Inc. 2.02 LUMBER A. Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill, and grading agency. B. Lumber Standard: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSO) Board of Review. I . SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. C. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. D. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by PS 20 to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Moisture Content: Seasoned, with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Any species and grade that complies with the following requirements for species group as defined in Table 8.1a of N.F.P.A National Design Specification, for extreme fiber stress in bending "Fb" for single and repetitive members, and for modulus of elasticity "E": PRE-FAB METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-3 of 5 McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Clearwater Beach Restrooms a. Group II species, "Fb" of 1200 psi for single member use and of 1400 psi for repetitive member use, and "E" of 1,600,000 psi. 2.03 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. General: Fabricate connector plates from metal complying with requirements indicated in this article. B. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: Structural (physical quality steel sheet complying with ASTM A 591, Coating Class C, and, for structural properties, with ASTM A 446, Grade A; zinc coated by electro-deposition; with minimum coated metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.047 inch. C. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: Structural (physical) quality steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, Grade A; zinc coated by hot-dip process to comply with ASTM A 653, Designation G60; minimum coated metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.036 inch. D. Exterior Coastal Areas: Stainless steel, Type 316L. 2.04 FASTENERS A, General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. With galvanized connector plates, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 653. 2. With stainless steel connector plates, provide fasteners per AISI Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2. I. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. 2.05 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of type, size, metal, and finish indicated that comply with requirements specified including the following: 1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which reports exist from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with the building code in effect for this Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes allowable design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525 for Coating Designation G60 and with ASTM A 446, Grade A (structural quality); ASTM A 653 (commercial quality); or ASTM A 527 (lock-forming quality); as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. 2.06 FABRICATION PRE-FAR METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-4 of 5 I McCarthy and Associates 09.09 Clearwater Beach Restrooms A. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness, and anchorage details required to withstand design loadings for types of joint designs indicated. B. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with full-bearing joints closely fitted, particularly at peak heel joints, to comply with tolerances specified in TPI "Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." Position members to produce design camber indicated. C. Connect truss members by means of metal connector plates accurately located and securely fastened to each side of wood members by means indicated or approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect and brace trusses to comply with applicable requirements of referenced TPI standards. B. Where trusses do not fit, return them to fabricator and replace with trusses of correct size; do not alter trusses in the field. C. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other, located accurately at design spacings indicated. D. Joist trusses in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. E. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated. F. Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain design spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply with other indicated requirements. G. Do not cut or remove truss members. END OF SECTION 06192 PRE-FAB METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-5 of 5 APA 11.09 SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Standing and running trim. 2. Plywood ceilings and soffits. PART2-PRODUCTS Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 2.1 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim: 1. Species and Grade: Eastern white pine, eastern hemlock-balsam fir-tamarack, eastern spruce, or white woods, Finish or 1 Common (Colonial). 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. 3. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). B. Fiber Cement Trim: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. James Hardie. b. CertainTeed. 2.2 PLYWOOD CEILING AND SOFFITS A. Plywood Type: Exterior Grade. B. Thickness: 5/8 inch. C. Face Species: Any. D. Pattern: Texture IA 1; grooves 4 inches o. c. E. Surface: Rough sawn. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prime lumber to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION. A. Install fiber cement trim to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths available. 1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 2_ Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members. C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at comers. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 1 of 2 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroorn Replacement 3.4 CEILING SOFFIT A. T 1-11 Plywood: Install panels with edges over framing or blocking. Nail at 6 inches ox. at panel perimeter and 12 inches o.c. at intermediate supports unless manufacturer recommends closer spacing. Leave 1/16-inch gap between adjacent panels and 1/8-inch gap at perimeter, openings, and horizontal joints unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. 1. Seal butt joints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations. 3.5 SOFFIT VENTS A. 4" perforated vent as indicated on drawings. 1. Install on full lengths with joint caps. Miter corners at four comers of building. END OF SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 2 of 2 r I APA 11.09 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: L Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A, Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 1 a following: L CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Corning. Unfaced, R-19 Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 .INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to rain at any time, C, Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. B. R-19 Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: I. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 1 Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-ram) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. END OF SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - I of 1 r APA 11.09 SECTION 07411 - METAL ROOF PANELS PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal roof panels. Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements indicated on the drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated with documentation that the product meets requirements as noted on the drawings. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 5-V PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: finish, 26 gauge. Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated AZ-55 Galvalume 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts. Separation felt: ASTM D226 Type I (No. 15) saturated felts. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Panel Fasteners: #9 x 2" metal roofing screws with sealing washer and compatible with material of roof panels. 2.4 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product to meet wind pressures indicated on Drawings. 3. Profile: 5-V crimp. 4. Material: 26 gauge Galvalume. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411- 1 of 3 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, :fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. C. Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. B. Separation Sheet: Apply in same direction as metal panels and lap top of drip edge over felt underlayment. 3.2 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. Install 5-V crimp metal roofing system in strict accordance with McElroy Metal 555-V crimp Installation Guide and NOA No. 07-0905.08 over underlayment specified. Other roofing manufacturers will be accepted with current NOA number that meets State building product approvals. I. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. 2. Lap sheets per manufacturer's requirements. 3. Provide metal-backed neoprene or EPDM washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal roof panels. 4. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer. 5. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 2 of 3 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with (lashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a. complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed. unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 3 of 3 r APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and point substrates. B. Stain-rest-Response Characteristics: Where elastorneric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - l of 5 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. E. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Available Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. C. Tremco; Tremsil 200 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. F. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant: 1. Available Products: a, Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 550. b. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; POURTHANE. C. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 High Shore Type I (Self Leveling). d. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 Type I (Self Leveling). e. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200. f Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-270SL. g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM 7201. h. Tremco; THC-901, i. Tremco; THC-900. j. Tremco; Vulkem 245. k. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR 300, Type H. 1. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR 300, Type M. 2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable). 3. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic). 4. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. G. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. Available Products: a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - la. b.. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Ultra. C. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 1. d. Tremco; Vulkem 116. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS.(nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 5, Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. M 2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), 0 (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 of 5 I APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Sackings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. L Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant. a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 of 5 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement r B. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior and exterior perimeter joints between frames of doors. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior and exterior joints of T 1-11 to masonry and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Joust-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior control and expansion joints in horizontal traffic surfaces of concrete walks. 1. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent pourable urethane sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 of 5 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-curing silicone sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Match color of plumbing fixtures. END OF SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5 of 5 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 08100 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all items shown on the drawings and as specified, but not limited to, the following. 1. Steel Doors 2. Steel Door Frames ' 3. Louvers Installed in Steel Doors 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of door assemblies required to comply with the Florida Building code Approval System. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Steel Doors and Frames in this section must meet all standards as established by the following listing. 1. Door and Hardware Preparation ANSI 115.1. 2. Life Safety Codes NFPA-101 (Latest edition). 3. Fire Doors and Windows NFPA-80 (Latest edition). 4. Steel Door Institute ANSI/SDI-100 (Latest edition) 1.4 SUBNHTTAL A. Coordinate approved shop drawings with all other trades and manufacturers whose products are used in conjunction with the Steel Doors and Frames under section 08100. B. Finish hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. C. The steel door and frame supplier will furnish to the architect (6) complete copies of the proposed steel door and frames schedule and/or shop drawings. Using the same reference number for details and openings as those on the contract drawings. After receipt of the approved door schedule the steel door and frame supplier will make any corrections submit to the architect (6) sets of corrected schedules, for file and field use. D. Include details on the following list of items: 1. Frame elevations 2. Door design elevations 3. Frame sections 4. Details of construction 5. Anchorage 6. Opening conditions 7. Joints and connections 8. Hardware locations E. Upon request of the architect or for any substitution to this specification, (4) copies of the door manufacturers catalog cut sheets are to be submitted to the architect before any material is placed on the job site. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Steel Doors and Frames complying with the Steel Door Institute recommended specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSI/SDI 100 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 1 of 5 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement I 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All steel doors and frames must be properly marked with door opening mark number to correspond with the schedule. B. Deliver all the steel doors in cartons and palletized to provide protection during transit and job storage. C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage is to be repaired, provided they are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect. D. Store doors and frames at the building site under cover. Place units on wood sills or on the floor in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If the wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. Provide a 1/4 inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company - Series H with GrainTech finish. B. Door assemblies shall resist the cyclic pressures, static pressures, and missile impact loads as detailed in Florida Building Code Test Protocols TAS 201, TAS 202, and TAS 203. 2.2 HARDWARE LOCATIONS AND GENERAL REINFORCEMENTS A. Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the manufactures standard location. B. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100. C. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced and function holes provided at the factory in accordance with the hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Through bolt holes, attachment holes, drilling and tapping for surface hardware, shall be done by others. 2.3 STEEL DOORS A. Material - Exterior doors and as indicted on the schedule 1. Face Sheets to be made of commercial quality hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Grade III - l4ga. 2. Vertical edges are to have continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at lock and hinge edges with visible edge seams. The internal portion of the seam shall be sealed with epoxy. 3. Hinge reinforcement shall be not less than 7gage (3/16") plate 1-1/4" X 911 . Approved equal is a 12 gage continuous channel with formed holes drilled and tapped. The manufacture to provide test information that this type reinforcement is equal to a 3/16" or 7 gage plate reinforcement. 4. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 14 gage galvanized A60, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a steel closure channel flush with the face sheets and screwed into the door. Plastic fillers are not acceptable. 5. Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors and laminated to inside faces of both panels using contact adhesive applied to both panels and honeycomb core. 6. Doors shall be laminated full-flush design with GrainTech; color will be selected from six standard finishes. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 2 of 5 1 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 2.4 STEEL FRAMES A. Materials - exterior and as indicted on the schedule. 1. Are to be hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM designations A924 A60, 16ga. 2. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame comer or intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint. B. Materials all other frames as indicted on the schedule. 1. Will comply with ASTM A366-68 or ASTM A569-66T, l6ga. 2. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame corner or intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Steelcraft Manufacturing - F series C. Fabrication 1. General design and construction a. Provide steel frames for doors to the size and design as shown on the architectural drawings. b. All finished work to be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects. C. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends to be as scheduled and shown on approved shop drawings. d. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be fabricated in sections designed for splicing in the field by others. e. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100. f. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for template mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and template provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only; all drilling, and tapping shall be done by others. g. Hinge reinforcements, to be 7ga steel. D. Anchors 1. Floor anchors shall be provided at each jamb. 2. Anchors for in masonry are to be of the wire type. 3. Dust boxes/mortar guards to be no less than 26 gage. 4. All frames that are welded, to be provided with a steel spreader temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only not to be used to size the frame opening. 5. Loose glazing stops are to be of 18 gage galvanized at labeled openings and 20 gage galvanized on non-labeled openings, butted at the corner joints and secured to the frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screws. 6. Provide 3 silencers on single door. 2.5 STEEL LOUVERS A. Materials 1. Materials to be galvanized hot-dipped coated steel that complies with ASTM designations A942, A60, 16 gauge. 2. The blades of the louver are welded to a fabricated sub-frame. 3. Louver is held in place by auxiliary frame, 16 gauge anchored with phillips screws from inside requiring no drilling through door. 4. Acceptable Manufacturer STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 3 of 5 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement a. Anemostat Door Products AFDL Inverted Y Non-Vision Louver with gray primer. 2.6 LABELED DOORS, FRAMES, AND LOUVERS A. Construct and install doors and frames to comply with current issue of National Fire Protection Association (Nl~PA) Standard Number 80, as scheduled. B. Doors and/or frames for labeled openings are to bear either a stamped or applied label from Warnock Hersey or Underwriters Laboratory 2.7 PRIME FINISH: A. Doors and frames are to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall receive a coat of rust inhibiting baked on primer applied at the factory. The finish shall meet the requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI A250.10 "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces." The baked on prime finish is not intended to be the final layer of protection from the elements. Field painting using a good grade of paints are to be used in accordance with the recommendations of the door and frame manufacturer. For specialty types of finished coatings, the paint supplier should also be consulted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to make sure that all dimensions for existing opening or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.) given to the steel manufacturer are accurate. B. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to see that any scratches or disfigurements caused in shipping or handling are properly cleaned and touched up with a rust inhibiting primer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Frames 1. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked for rack, twist and out of square conditions. 2. Place frames prior to enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. 3. Fill frames in masonry walls with mortar. 4. When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the plaster or mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames will coat the inside of the frames, in the field, with a corrosion inhibiting bituminous material. 5. SDI-105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames" and SDI-110 "Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction" shall indicate the proper installation procedures. B. Doors 1. Install doors plumb and in true alignment in a prepared opening and fasten them to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. 2. Proper door clearance must be maintained in accordance with SDI-I10. 3. Where necessary, only metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain clearances. 4. "Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware" published by DHI is recommended for further details. C. Hardware must be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 4 of 5 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Check and re-adjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper condition. B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply to touch-up or compatible air-drying primer. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. After installation, copies of the door schedules will be turned over to the owner when the building is accepted. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 5 of 5 ' APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 08620 - TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Production fabricated engineered leak proof tubular daylighting system (VELUX SUN TUNNELT"') consisting of an exterior pitched/low profile roof flashing with a self aligning pivoting device for installation in metal roofs with a polycarbonate dome, an interior ceiling ring and dual diffuser joined by a flexible/rigid reflective tunnel meeting State of Florida Hurricane Impact Requirements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Section 07411 -Metal Roof Panels. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tubular daylighting device (VELUX SUN TUNNELT`f)with exterior roof flashing with intermediate tunnel pivoting device, exterior dome/interior diffuser, reflective tunnel, adjustable elbow and components required for a complete and weatherproof installation shall be manufactured to the highest standards of quality and craftsmanship in accordance with VELUX Manufacturing Standards that comply with the ICBO ES Acceptance Criteria for Quality Control Manuals. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Exterior Dome: Poycarbonate. B. Flashing System: Pitched TMF/TMR is a Galvalume.030" thick pitched flashing that projects 2 7/8" high backside and 10 1/2" on front side above the roof deck for the 10" and 14" Ilashuig. C. Pivot/Intermediate rings: Pivoting socket joint which secures upper elbow, allows for an additional I 1 degrees of adjustability to help align tunnel sections, and provides a thermal break between the flashing and the dome and between the tunnel and the dome. D. Condensation control: Integral internal condensation collection gutter and drainage slots E. Insect Barrier/Dome Seal -- polyurethane foam between the dome and the intermediate ring. F. Rigid tunnel: 10-inch diameter, 2-foot 98% super specular reflective silver backed aluminum with a 20 year warranty. G_ Rigid elbows : 45 degree adjustable 10 and 14-inch nominal outside diameter, 98% super specular reflective silver backed aluminum with a 20 year warranty. H. Flexible Tunnel: Metalized polyester, fiberglass scrim and spring steel wire. 1. Round ceiling ring: A round dual diffuser assembly with a paintable acrylic trim ring and mounting ring. J. Interior Dual Diffuser: Frosted/prismatic acrylic lower diffuser with a clear acrylic upper. A Santapreme gasket provides the seal and a 1/2" (14mm) air space separates the two diffusers. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's unit dimensions, rough opening and finished framing dimensions, affected related work, and installation requirements are shown in manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Product Data: For Model TMF/TMR VELUX SUN TUNNELS, sizes and glazing options are indicated in manufacturer's printed material. 1 1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING, STORAGE A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08620 - 1 of 3 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. VELUX America Inc. product Model TMF/TMR VELUX SUN TUNNELS with exterior dome, flashing system, reflective aluminum tunnel and interior diffuser as specified in this section and as manufactured by VELUX America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Exterior Dome: Polycarbonate (for impact), 3.25 mm thick (0.125 inch), injection molded. Maximum positive load, 3.8 KPa (80 psf), maximum negative load, 3.6 KPa (75 psf). B. Flashing System: one piece, self-flashing, 0.030" thick Galvalume, aluminized sheet steel. C. Fasteners: Exterior dome to flashing system 48 x 3/4" Philips 18-8 corrosion resistant screws, Flashing to roof sheeting 1 1/2" pan head 18-8 stainless steel screws, Intermediate ring to flashing system #10 x 1/2" Phillips Flathead, Tunnel joint screws #6 x 3/8" Phillips pan head self drilling. D. Rigid Tunnel: Alanod PVD coated aluminum, MIRO Silver 4270 0.51 nun (0.020 inches) thick, 98% total reflectance. E. Interior Diffuser: Dual diffuser system, Clear acrylic diffuser over a standard frosted lower diffuser jointed by a flexible gasketing system that maintains a 3/4" air gap between the diffusers. An optional K-12 clear prismatic acrylic is also an option for the lower diffuser. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Flashing: Galvalume, aluminized 0.030 sheet. B. Ceiling ring and trim ring, material is Acrylic C. Dual diffuser Ceiling ring gasket: flexible Santapreme (TPE) D. Spring snap-rings: stainless steel, 1". E. Fasteners: Exterior dome to flashing system 48 x 3/4" Philips with washer 18-8 corrosion- resistant screws, Flashing to roof sheeting 1 1/2" pan head stainless steel screws, Intermediate ring to flashing system # 10 x 1/2" Phillips Flat head, Tunnel joint screws 46 x 3/8" Phillips pan head self drilling. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Finish, fabricate and shop prepare all assemblies under responsibility of the manufacturer. B. Fabricate to allow for thermal movement of materials where subject to a temperature differential. C. Provisions shall be made to insure against accumulated water in contact with system components. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify rough opening dimensions and proper orientation of tubular daylighting device. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions for standing seam metal roof installation. B. Align tubular daylighting device free of warp or twist, maintain dimensional tolerances. C. Apply sealant to the roof deck or bottom side of the flashing prior to attaching the flashing system to the roof sheathing with the supplied 1 1/2" pan head stainless steel screws in the TTJBTJLAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08620 - 2 of 3 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement locations of the pre punched holes to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. D. Provide thermal isolation when components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in ceiling rough opening to maintain continuity of thermal barriers. E. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier material. END OF SECTION 08620 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08620 - 3 of 3 I City of Clearwater 09.09 I PART f - GEI RAI{ Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement FINISH HARDWARE Section 08710 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work in this section shall include furnishing of all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items that are specifically excluded from this section of the specification, 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Steel Doors and Frames 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish labor and material to complete hardware work indicated, as specified herein, or as may be required by actual conditions at building. B. Include all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, other devices, if necessary, as required for proper hardware application. The hardware supplier shall assume all responsibility for correct quantities. C. All hardware shall meet the requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having jurisdiction over this project, notwithstanding any real or apparent conflict therewith in these specifications. D. FASTENERS: 1. Hardware as furnished shall conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. Typically, all exposed screws installation. 3. Insofar as practical, furnished concealed type fasteners for hardware units that have exposed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat head screws, finished to match adjacent hardware. 3. Door closers and exit devices to be installed with closed head through bolts (sex bolts). E. HURRICANE OPENINGS-, 1. Provide hardware for hurricane openings in compliance with local jurisdiction. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 1 of 6 City of Clearwater 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by local authority for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished and have in their employ an AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant). This person is to be available for consultation to the architect, owner and the general contractor at reasonable times during the course of work. A. The finish hardware supplier shall prepare and submit to the architect six (6) copies of a complete schedule identifying each door and each set number, following the numbering system and not creating any separate system himself. He shall submit the schedule for review, make corrections as directed and resubmit the corrected schedule for final approval. Approval of schedule will not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing all necessary hardware, including the responsibility for furnishing correct quantities. A. No manufacturing orders shall be placed until detailed schedule has been submitted to the architect and written approval received. A. After hardware schedule has been approved, furnish templates required by manufacturing contractors for making proper provisions in their work for accurate fitting, finishing hardware setting. Furnish templates in ample time to facilitate progress of work. A. Hardware supplier shall have an office and warehouse facilities to accommodate the materials used on this project. The supplier must be an authorized distributor of the products specified. F. The hardware manufactures are to supply both a pre-installation class as well as a post-installation walk-thru. This is to insure proper installation and provide for any adjustments or replacements of hardware as required. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing contractors hardware items required by them for their application; deliver balance of hardware to job; store in designated location. Each item shall be clearly marked with its intended location. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The material furnished shall be warranted for one year after installation or longer as the individual manufacturer's warranty permits. A. Overhead door closers shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 2 of 6 r City of Clearwater 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement ' commencing on the Date of Final Completion and Acceptance, and in the event of failure, the manufacture is to promptly repair or replace the defective with no additional cost to the Owner. I PART II - PR- M T 1 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from only one manufacturer. B. All numbers and symbols used herein have been taken from the current catalogues of the following manufacturers. PRODUCT' ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER ACCEPTABLE SUBSTITUTE 1) Hinges Hager 1) Locks & Latches Best 1) Cylinders, Keys, Keying Best 1) Exit Devices Von Duprin 1) Door Closers LCN 1) OH Stops/Holders Glynn Johnson 1) Push Button Access Best 1) Magnetic Locks Locknetics 1) Wall Stops/Floor Ives Stops, Flushbolts 1) Kick Plates Ives 1) Threshold/Weather-strip National Guard 1) Silencers Ives 1) Key Cabinet Lund Stanley, Bommer Schlage None (No Substitution) None (No Substitution) None (No Substitution) Rixson None (No Substitution) Sentronics Rockwood, Trimco Rockwood, Quality Pemko, Zero Rockwood, Trimco Key Control C. If material manufactured by other than that specified or listed herewith as an equal, is to be bid upon, permission must be requested from the architect seven (7) days prior to bidding. If substitution is allowed, it will be so noted by addendum. 2.02 FINISH OF HARDWARE: A. Exterior Hinges to be Stainless Steel (32D). Door Closers to be Aluminum. Locks to be Satin Chrome (26D). Overhead Holders to be Satin Chrome (26D), Flat Goods to be Stainless Steel (32D) and the Thresholds to be Mill Finish Aluminum. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 3 of 6 City of Clearwater 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 2.03 HINGES AND PIVOTS: A. Exterior butts shall be Stainless Steel. Butts on all out swinging doors shall be furnished with non-removable pins (NRP). B. Doors 5' or less in height shall have two (2) butts. Furnish one (1) additional butt for each 2'6" in height or fraction thereof 2.04 KEYING: A. All locks and cylinders to be keyed to the owner's existing BEST system. A. Combinated to Owner's instructions. (Permanent cores need to be ordered at least 5 weeks prior to turning over to the City of Clearwater.) A Provide Two (2) each change keys per lock and Six. Owner to provide additional keys needed. A Hardware supplier to provide temporary cores during the construction phase. The city will change out the temporary cores for the permanent cores. All cores become the property of the city upon completion of the work. 2.05 LOCKSETS: A. Locksets shall be Heavy Duty Cylindrical type, unless specified otherwise, in "35H" series, 15H Design as manufactured by BEST on New Construction "93K" series, 15D Design as manufactured by BEST only where scheduled. 2.06 DOOR CLOSERS: A. All closers shall be LCN 4011 or 4111 Series having non-ferrous covers, forged steel arms separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arm mounted on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Furnish with non-hold open arms unless otherwise indicated. A. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided. A. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature ranges of 120 degrees Fahrenheit to -30 degrees Fahrenheit, without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 4 of 6 r City of Clearwater 09.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with the standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL IOC. A. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non-critical screw valves of V-slot design to reduce possible clogging from particles within the closer. Closers shall have separate and independent screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and hydraulic backcheck. Backcheck shall be properly located so as to effectively slow the swing of the door at a minimum of 10 degrees in advance of the dead stop location to protect the door frame and hardware from damage. Pressure relief valves (PRV) are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable substitutions: A. None (No Substitution) 2.07 TRIM AND PLATES: A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be.050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be 8" high All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door. B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the hardware schedule. 2.08 DOOR STOPS: A. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers equal to Ives WS407 Series are preferred, but where not practical furnish floor stops equal to Ives FS436 or FS438 series. Where conditions prohibit the use of either wall or floor type stops, furnish surface mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn Johnson, 450 Series. 2.09 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP: A. Thresholds and weather-strip shall be as listed in the hardware schedule. 2.10 DOOR SILENCERS: A. Furnish (3) rubber door silencers equal to Ives SR64 for hollow metal frames. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 5 of 6 City of Clearwater 09.09 PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement A. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with the Finish Hardware schedule. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. B. Contractor to provide a secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. C. No hardware is to be installed until the hardware manufactures have provided a pre-installation class. This is to insure proper installation of the specified products. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Contractor shall adjust all hardware in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Prior to turning project to owner, contractor shall clean and make any final adjustments to the finish hardware. 3.03 PROTECTION: A. Contractor shall protect the hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. B. Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. DOOR HARDWARE SET: Doors #1, #2, & #3 each to have: 1 1/2 pr. Butt Hinges #BB 1191 - 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 - NRP US32D Hagar 1- Deadbolt #83T7LSTK626CS 626 Best 1 - Closer & Stop #4111 TB 689 LCN 1 - Push/Pull Set 73CL12 US32D Rockwood 1 - Tubular Pull RM301 -1 1/4" diameter 12 CTC Rockwood 1-- Kick Plate 34" x 8" LDW US32D Rockwood 1 -Threshold #158 Alum Pemko 1 - Door Shoe #216 U Alum Pemko END OF SECTION FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 6 of 6 I APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement r SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) PART1-GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ' 1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath solid-plaster bases. B. See Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing (transverse and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 0 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before stuccoing, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. ' 1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated. 2. For interior plasterwork, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of ' Substantial Completion. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Exterior Plasterwork: Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Plastic Trim: Fabricated from high-impact PVC. 1. Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges. a. Small-nose style; use unless otherwise indicated. 2. Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated and flange length required to suit applications indicated. a. Bull-nose style; use unless otherwise indicated. , 3. Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. ' 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1 of 2 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. 2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type [1] [11]. 1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. 2.5 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed I lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. B. Portland Cement Base-Coat Mixes: 1. Over Concrete Unit Masonry: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows: a. For cementitious material, mix I part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sutra of separate volumes of each component material). C. Portland Cement Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes: For cementitious materials, mix I part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. 3.2 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External Corners: 1. Install comerbead at exterior locations. C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. 3.3 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases. C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float sand finish to match Architect's sample. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing (check cracking), dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. END OF SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 2 of 2 City of Clearwater 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 09623 WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This specification covers preparation, materials, services, and equipment required for the application of PROFESSIONAL@ Water Sealant & Anti -Graffiti ant for projects involving either old or new construction. Any substantial deviations shall be referred to the manufacturer or authorized representative. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Concrete Block walls to receive water repellent and/or anti -graffiti ant. Exterior split-faced concrete block shall be coated with graffiti -resistant coating. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets for the specified water repellents, graffiti resistant coatings and cleaners. Submit description for protection of surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, and final cleaning. ' C. Applicator Qualifications: Submit qualifications of applicator; stating applicator has a minimum of 3 years experience using the specified or a similar products. Provide a list of scvcral most recently completed projects, including project name and location, names of ' owner and architect, and description of products used, substrates, and method of application. D. Environmental Regulations: Submit applicable environmental regulations. E. VOC Certification: Submit certification that water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings furnished comply with regulations controlling content of volatile organic compounds (VOC). ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: ' 1. 1. Experience in the application of the specified or similar products. 2. 2. Employs persons trained in the application of the specified products or similar products. WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITT RESISTANT COATINGS 09623 - I of 7 City of Clearwater 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Pre-Application Meeting: Convene a pre-application meeting 2 weeks before the start of application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including the Contractor, Architect, Applicator, and Professional Products of Kansas' representative. Review environmental regulations, test panel procedures, protection of surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, field quality control, final cleaning, warranty application procedures, and coordination with other work. 11.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS A. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local environmental regulations. 1.06 TEST PANELS A. Before full-scale application, review manufacturer's product data sheets to determine the suitability of each product for the specific surfaces- Apply each water repellent and graffiti resistant coating to test panels to determine appropriate strengths, coverage rates, compatibility, effectiveness, surface preparation, application procedures, and desired results. B. Apply graffiti resistant coatings to test panels in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Allow a minimum of S days curing time prior to applying graffiti paint to test panels. Apply graffiti paint to test panels and allow at least 24 hours or longer for paint to cure. Apply cleaner to evaluate ease of graffiti removal. Repeat cycles of cleanings as directed by Architect. Do not begin full-scale application until test panels are inspected and approved by the Architect. C. Submit Sections I & 2 of Manufacturer's warranty application using information resulting from test panel application. These sections must be submitted to Manufacturer for approval prior to project commencement. Section 3 to be completed and submitted at project completion. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in original, tightly sealed, unopened containers, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. Verify that the product matches that of the original sample applied on the test panel. B. Storage and Handling: Store containers upright in a cool, dry place. Keep away from sparks and open flame. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 09623 - 2 of 7 I City of Clearwater 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement A. Surface Preparation: Contractor or applicator shall be responsible for providing a clean, dry substrate free from oil, dirt, grease, efflorescence, form release agents or any other coating, which may inhibit penetration and adhesion of water repellent and graffiti resistant coating. This requirement applies to new construction, renovation or remedial projects. Substrate must be completely dry prior to applying product. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature: Product maybe applied at any temperature providing that there is no frozen moisture present in the substrate. When applied at temperatures below 40 degrees Fahrenheit the product may cure at a slower rate. Optimal temperature range for application is between 40YF (5Y'C) or below 95YF (35Y'C). 2. Do not apply material if the substrate is wet or contains frozen moisture. Allow substrate to dry for a minimum of 48 hours after rain or 72 hours after power washing. 3. Do not apply material during inclement weather or if precipitation is expected within 12 hours. 4. Do not commence application under windy conditions. C. Protection: 1. Special precautions should be taken to avoid fumes from entering the building. Heating and air conditioning, ventilation systems, and fresh air intakes should be turned off and covered. 2. Protect shrubs, metal, glass, vehicles, and other building hardware from overspray. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 2.01 MANUFACTURER Professional Products of Kansas, Inc., 4456 S. Clifton, Wichita, KS 67216, (800) 676- 7346, (316) 522-9300, Fax (316) 522-9346 2.02 WATER REPELLENT AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS A. Professional@ Water Sealant & Anti-Grafftiant, Super Strength: First coat in the two- coat process. Depending on the porosity of the substrate, it may be used for the second coat as well. Penetrating silicone rubber graffiti resistant coating for use on vertical concrete, brick, sandstone, limestone, stucco, split face block, concrete block, and fluted block. Non-sacrificial, will withstand repeated cycles of graffiti tagging and removal with no requirement to reapply the sealant. May enhance or darken some substrates. Will not form a surface film or gloss. Inorganic, it is not affected by UV rays, salts, acid rain, etc. Breathable, it allows moisture vapor to escape while preventing liquid penetration. Flexible, it bridges hairline cracks and allows for building movement. Provides a graffiti barrier as well as waterproofing protection. 1. Form: Liquid 2. Color: Clear 3. Active Substance: RTV Silicone Rubber 4. Percent Active Material: 15% WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 09623 - 3 of 7 City of Clearwater 11,09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 5. Flash Point: 105Y B. Professionalg Water Sealant & Anti-Graffitiant, Extra Strength: May be used as the second coat in the two-coat process. Porosity of substrate is the determining factor. THE SECOND C' OAT SHO(JLD BE APPLIED TO THE ENTIRE STRUCTURE TO ACHIEVE WATER REPELLENT PROTECTION IN ADDITION TO GRAFFITI PROTECTION. 1. Form: Liquid 2. Color: Clear 3. Active Substance: RTV Silicone Rubber 4. Percent Active Material: 8% 5. Flash Point: 105Y C. The graffiti resistant coating product listed above is selected as a standard of quality. Application procedure and coverage rates must be in conformance with results achieved in test panels and manufacturer's application instructions. 1. Proposed alternate products must be equal in terms of chemical composition and performance standards. Products must be penetrating, permanent treatments using a silicone rubber base and not contain any paraffin waxes, urethanes or polysiloxanes. Silane and siloxane based products will not be considered because of their lack of elongation. Products must be non-sacrificial, allowing for repeated cycles of tagging and cleaning without the requirement to reapply the sealant. 2.04 CLEANERS A. CLEANER: Phase II Cleaner (for graffiti removal), manufactured by Professional Products of Kansas, Inc. No other product will be accepted as they may void the warranty. B. Extra Material: provide one gallon Phase IT Cleaner, manufacturer's instructions, MSDS and product data to Owner. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify the following: 1. 1. The required joint sealants have been installed. 2, 2. New masonry and mortar have cured a minimum of 28 days. 3. 3. Surface to be treated is clean, dry, and contains no frozen moisture. 4. 4. Environmental conditions are appropriate for application. 3.02 PROTECTION WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 09623 - 4 of 7 I City of Clearwater 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement ' A. Protect surrounding areas, glass, landscaping, building occupants, pedestrians, vehicles, and non-masonry surfaces during the work from contact with water repellent ' and graffiti resistant coatings. B. Special precautions should be taken to prohibit fumes from entering the building. Heating and air conditioning ventilation systems and fresh air intakes should be turned off and covered. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean all dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, efflorescence, form release agents or any other coating or material from surfaces that may interfere with penetration, performance, adhesion, or aesthetics of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Thoroughly remove cleaner residues. Allow surfaces to dry completely before application of water ' repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. B. Repair, patch, and fill all cracks, voids, defects, and damaged areas in surface as ' approved by the Architect. Allow repair materials to cure completely before application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. C. Seal all open joints. D. Allow new masonry and concrete construction and repointed surfaces to cure for a minimum of 28 days before application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings to substrates in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, environmental regulations, and application procedures determined from the test panel results approved by the Architect. Graffiti protection requires a two-coat application. In most cases, the first coat will be Super Strength. The second coat will be either Super or Extra, depending on the porosity of the substrate. B. Apply to clean, dry, cured, and properly prepared surfaces approved by Architect. C. Apply material as shipped by the manufacturer. Do not dilute. D. Do not apply to below-grade surfaces. E. Do not apply to painted surfaces. F. Do not apply anti-graffitiant to horizontal surfaces. G. Do not apply to compensate for structural or material defects in substrates. WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 09623 - 5 of 7 City of Clearwater 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement H_ Do not apply to substrates such as asphalt or polystyrene, which may be affected by ' the solvent carrier. 1. Apply material using a high-volume, low pressure, pump-up sprayer (between 40-60 psi), with solvent resistant fittings. Foam roller, or brush of natural bristle or foam may be used in areas where spray application is not appropriate. 1. Vertical Applications: Apply in a flood coat, from top to bottom, being sure to obtain a 4 to 6 inch rundown of product from the point where the spray makes contact with the surface. Work all the way down the building covering the rundown as you go. Avoid excessive overlapping. Allow first coat to dry to the touch prior to applying second coat. Apply the second coat in the same manner, a. Extremely dense substrates may require back rolling after product is applied to smooth out any rundown lines. b. Brush any excess product that may accumulate on ledges and other areas that may hold excess material. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Inspect the water repellent and graffiti resistant coating work with the contractor, Architect, applicator, and Professional Products of Kansas representative, and compare with test panel results approved by the Architect. Determine if the substrates are suitably protected. Allow the test panel to cure for 5 days prior to applying graffiti paint for testing purposes. B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide the services of a manufacturer's authorized field representative to verify specified products are used; protection, surface preparation, and application of graffiti resistant coatings are in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions; the test panel has been approved by the Architect. C. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering material performance for a period of five (5) years for graffiti protection and Ten (10) years for Vertical water repellent applications from the date of project completion. 3.06 FINAL CLEANING A. Upon completion of all work covered in the specification, the Contractor shall remove all equipment, material and debris, leaving the area in an undamaged and acceptable condition. Dispose of coating containers according to state and local environmental regulations. WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 09623 - 6 of 7 City of Clearwater 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Repair, restore, or replace to the satisfaction of the Architect, all materials, landscaping, and non-masonry surfaces damaged by exposure to water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Professional Products of Kansas, Inc. 4456 S. Clifton Wichita, KS 67216 (800) 676-7346 (316) 522-9300 Fax (316) 522-9346 www.watersealant.com END OF SECTION WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 09623 - 7 of 7 APA 11.09 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. . B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Owner will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Toilet partitions. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Light fixtures. d. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b_ Ceiling plenums. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, fmish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. PAINTING 09900 - 1 of 7 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1 Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, the Owner will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND RANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions, 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.785 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers Nantes: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: PAINTING 09900 - 2 of 7 r APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1. Porter Paint Company (Paint Schedule is based on Porter Paint. If another manufacturer is submitted, submit both Porter Data Sheets along with Data Sheets for paint proposed to be used. All products must be equivalent or exceed quality of Porter Products scheduled ' for Architect's approval.) 2. ICI Dulux Paints. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examinc substratcs, arcas, and conditions, with the Applicator prescnt, undcr which painting. will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. i 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and ¦ surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and ' conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on r characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and r mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. Power spray exterior of existing building to be repainted. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and PAINTING 09900 - 3 of 7 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. ' a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler, Sand smooth when dried. , 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. b. Trcat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- ' brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspeeular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. PAINTING 09900 - 4 of 7 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Ductwork. 3. Insulation. 4. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. 3. Panelboards. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. 1. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, PAINTING 09900 - 5 of 7 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroorn Replacement holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture; and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL X The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 1 The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. C, Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. 1. Color retention. in. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P 1. PAINTING 09900 - 6 of 7 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3,7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Sand Float Stucco: 1. First Coat: "PorterLock" #6010 Pigmented Sealer 2. Intermediate Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic B. Fiber Cement Trim: 1. First Coat: 2. Intermediate Coat: 3. Top Coat: C. P.T. Wood: Painted: 1. First Coat: 2. Intermediate Coat: 3. Top Coat: #515 Series Primer "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic #515 Series Primer "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic D. TI-I I Plywood: 1. First Coat: 2. Intermediate Coat: 3. Top Coat: E. Doors and Frames: 1. First Coat: 2. Intermediate Coat: 3. Top Coat: #515 Series Primer "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic "Porter Guard" #215/212 series, DTM Primer "Porter Guard" #2905 series, DTM Gloss Enamel "Porter Guard" #2905 series, DTM Gloss Enamel F. Split-face Masonry: 1. Refer to Section 09623 Water Repellents and Graffiti-Resistant Coating. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Interior Masonry Walls: 1. First Coat: 2. Intermediate Coat: 3. Top Coat: B. Interior T1-11 Ceilings: 1. First Coat: 2. Intermediate Coat: 3. Top Coat: C. Concrete Floor Sealer : 1. First Coat: 2. Top Coat: END OF SECTION 09900 Porter #896 Block Filler Porter #9370 Duraglaze Epoxy Porter #9370 Duraglaze Epoxy 4515 Series Primer "3939 Portersept'Exterior Satin Acrylic "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic Cantol 227 Water-based Seal & Finish for Concrete Cantol 227 Water-based Seal & Finish for Concrete PAINTING 09900 - 7 of 7 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 09910 - DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOORING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Work described in this section includes surface preparation and installation of Silikal reactive resin industrial floor system. B. See drawings for locations and quantities. 1.2 RELATED WORK - SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-place concrete (Section 03300) 1. See Paragraph 1.8 - Requirements for New Concrete. B. Painting (Section 09900) 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Silikal 61 CQ is a 4-6mm (3/10-1/4") thick troweled surfacing composite of Silikal 100% reactive binder resin and Silikal colored quartz aggregate with specified Silikal primer and topcoat. B. The Silikal coating system shall cure completely and be available to normal operations in no more than 90 minutes at temperatures as low as 0 °C. after application of the final coat. C. The finished Silikal floor coating system shall be uniform in color combinations, texture, and appearance. All edges that terminate at walls, floor discontinuities, and other embedded items shall be sharp, uniform, and cosmetically acceptable with no thick or ragged edges. The Contractor shall work out an acceptable masking technique to ensure the acceptable finish of all edges. D. See Paragraph 3.04 and/or 3.07 for number and thicknesses of cach coat/layer in each system. E. All resins must be manufactured and tested under an ISO 9001 registered quality system and ISO 14001 ecology management system. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Acceptable manufacturer: Silikal GmbH, Germany. B. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Pre-qualification requirements: Only approved applicators, licensed by Silikal shall be considered for qualification. In no case will Silikal permit the application of any of its materials by untrained, non-approved Contractor or personnel. 2. Each approved applicator shall have been qualified by the Manufacturer as knowledgeable in all phases of surface preparation. 3. Each approved applicator must have three (3) years experience of installing resinous flooring systems and submit a list of five projects/references as a prequalifieation requirement. At least one of the five projects/ references must be of equal size, quantity, and magnitude to this project as a prequalification requirement. Owner has the option to personally inspect the projects/references to accept or reject any of the Contractors prior to bid time as a prequalification requirement. C. Subcontractor Qualifications: 1. The only approved and specified subcontractors for this resurfacing work shall be for shot-blast cleaning of the concrete substrate. D. Acceptance Sample: DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOORING 09910 - I of 7 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1. Representative sample of the specified flooring system shall be submitted to the Owner prior to the bidding phase of the project. All bidders shall inspect the "acceptance sample" before submitting their bids. 2. The installed flooring system shall be similar to the acceptance sample in thicknesses of respective filmlayers, color, texture, overall appearance and finish. E. Bond Testing: I. Surface preparation efforts shall be evaluated by conducting Bond Tests at the site prior to application of the flooring system(s). 2. See Paragraph 3.3 - B or consult with Material Manufacturer for specific procedure. F. Pre-Job Meeting 1. Owner requires a Pre-Job Meeting with representatives of Owner, Contractor/Applicator, and Material Manufacturer in attendance. The agenda shall include a review and clarification of this specification, application procedures, quality control, inspection and acceptance criteria, and production schedules. Applicator is not authorized to proceed until this meeting is held or waived by Owner. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete B. ACI 302.1R-80 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction C. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) and (Food and Drug Administration (FDA) authorization) for incidental contact with foodstuffs. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Acceptance Sample: As required by owner, one foot square (1 ft. by I ft.) sample of the specified acrylic flooring system applied to hardboard or similar backing for rigidity and ease of handling. B. Manufacturer's Literature: Descriptive data and specific recommendations for surface preparation, mixing, and application of materials. C. Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each respective product to be used. D. Cleaning and Maintenance. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All material shall be delivered in original Manufacturer's scaled containers with all pertinent labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in dry protected area between 25° and 80° Fahrenheit. Keep out of direct sunlight. Protect from open flame; keep all containers grounded. C. Follow all Manufacturer's specific label instructions and prudent safety practices for storage and handling. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS 1 A. Material, air, and surface temperatures shall be in the range of 32° to 85° Fahrenheit during application and cure, unless a special formulation is being used and Manufacturer has been consulted. B. Relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 85 percent and the surface temperature shall be at least 5 degrees above the dew point. C. Conditions required of new concrete to be coated: 1. Concrete shall be moisture cured for a minimum of 7 days at 70° F. The concrete must be fully cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to application of the coating system pending moisture testing. DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOORING 09910 - 2 of 7 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 2. Surface contaminants such as curing agents, membranes, or other bond breakers should not be used. 3. Concrete shall have a "rubbed" finish; float or darby finish the concrete (a hard steel trowel is neither necessary nor desirable). 4_ Drains should be set to the concrete grade rather than raised to the finished grade of the topping. D. Concrete shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than 5 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hour period as determined by proper Calcium Chloride Testing. Concrete R/H must be 85% or less as measured by protimeter. Readings greater than 5 by the Calcium Chloride method or 85% by protimeter, may require a preliminary treatment with Silikal RE40. E. Foodstuffs are the responsibility of the Owner and shall have been removed from the area of application by the Owner or his representatives. F. Vapor barriers and/or suitable means shall have been installed beneath grade slabs to prevent vapor transmission. Consult Technical Department. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Silikal warrants that materials shipped to buyers are at the time of shipment substantially free from material defects and will perform substantially according to Silikal published literature if used strictly in accordance with Silikal's prescribed procedures and prior to expiration date. B. Silikal's liability with respect to this warranty is strictly limited to the value of the material purchased. C. Silikal has no responsibility for the application and processing of products and is under no circumstances liable to any third party whatsoever. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Silikal GmbH, Germany 2.2 MATERIALS A. Silikal 61 CQ Decorative Quartz Flooring 1. 1. Moisture Vapor Treatment (if required) a. Silikal RE40 2. Saturating Primer/Silikal Coat: a. Silikal R41 with Additive I 3. Patching/Sloping (if required) a. Silikal R17 Polymer Concrete 4. Coving (if required): a. Silikal HK20 with Silikal filler CQ 5. Topping: a. Silikal R61 Quartz, consisting of Silikal R61 resin and Silikal Filler 6. Topcoat(s): a. Silikal R81 Colorless Silikal Topcoat Resin. 7. Silikal CQ for broadcasting: Color/s to be chosen by owner. 8. Aluminium Oxide (if required) 2.3 PRODUCT INSTALLATION & APPLICATION CRITERIA A. All Silikal Material Systems Excepting Moisture Vapor Treatment: 1. Pot Life at 68° F .................................... 10-15 minutes 2. Cure Time at 68° F ............................... 60 minutes DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOORING 09910 - 3 of 7 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3. Recoat Time at 680 F ............................ 60-90 minutes 2.4 MIXES A. Follow manufacturer's prescribed procedures and recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREWORK INSPECTION A. Examine all surfaces to be coated with Silikal material systems and report to the Contractor and/or Engineer any conditions that will adversely affect the appearance or performance of these coating systems and that cannot be put into acceptable condition by the preparatory work specified in Paragraph 3.3, B. Do not proceed with application until the surface is acceptable or authorization to proceed is given by the Engineer. 3.2 GENERAL. A. Material storage area must be selected and approved by Applicator and the Contractor. B. If existing ventilation is inadequate, Applicator will provide sufficient ventilation to allow complete air exchange every five (5) minutes. C. Applicator will protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated with masking and/or covers. Owner's equipment shall be protected from dust, cleaning solutions, and flooring materials. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation - General 1. Concrete substrate must be clean and dry. Dislodge dirt, mortar spatter, paint overspray, and other dry surface accumulations and contamination by scraping, brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and/or compressed air blowdown. 3. New concrete: See 1.8 - C for requirements. 4. Surfaces that are heavily contaminated shall be cleaned with the appropriate degreaser, detergent, or other appropriate cleaner/surfactant followed by thoroughly rinsing with fresh water to remove the accumulation prior to mechanical cleaning efforts. Mechanical cleaning will not remove such deposits, but only drive them deeper. 5. Concrete shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than 5 lbs. per 1000 sq; ft. per 24 hour period asdetermined by proper Calcium Chloride Testing and no more than 85% R/H as measured by Protimeter B. Bond Testing 1. The applicator shall evaluate all surface preparation by conducting bond tests at strategic locations. 2. Mix six (6) ounces of the primer to be used in the application with 5% by volume Silikal Powder Hardener. Add #10-4 12 mesh, dry quartz sand until an easily trowelable mixture is obtained. Apply palmsized patties 1/8" to 1/4" thick. 3. After one (1) hour at (68° F.), patties must be cured tack-free and cooled to ambient temperature of concrete. Remove patties with hammer and chisel and examine fracture/delamination plane. Concrete with fractured aggregate must be attached to the entire underside of the patty. 4. If only laitance or a small amount of concrete is attached or if interface between patty and substrate is tacky, further substrate preparation is required. 5. If further surface preparation is required, bond tests shall be conducted again when this has been completed. DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOORING 09910 - 4 of 7 I APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 6. If no amount or kind of surface preparation produces satisfactory bond tests, the applicator shall report that to the Owner, Engineer, and Manufacturer. C. Mechanical Surface Preparation and Cleaning 1, All accessible concrete floor surfaces shall be mechanically blast cleaned using a mobile steel shot, dust recycling machine such as BLASTRACV, or approved equivalent. All surface and embedded accumulations of paint, toppings, hardened concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes, and other similar surface characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a profile similar to 40 grit sandpaper and exposing the upper fascia of concrete aggregate. 2. Floor areas inaccessible to the mobile blast cleaning machines shall be mechanically abraded to the same degree of cleanliness, soundness, and profile using vertical disc scarifiers, starwheel scarifiers, needle guns, scabblers, or other suitably effective equipment. 3. After blasting, traces or accumulations of spent abrasive, laitance, removed toppings, and other debris shall be removed with brush or vacuum. 4. Conduct Bond Tests to check adequacy of surface preparation. See Paragraph 3.3 - B (Bond Testing). 5. Application of the respective specified material system(s) must be completed before any water or other contamination of the surface occurs. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Application of Silikal 61 CQ flooring system consists of 1. Applying moisture vapor treatment (if required) 2. Applying the primer, 3. Applying roving (if required), 4. Performing patching and sloping with polymer concrete (if required), 5. Re-priming polymer concrete areas 6. Applying the topping, broadcasting the quartz 7. Applying the topcoat(s), a. Time for curing (45 - 60 minutes) shall be allowed between each coat. b. Thicknesses are specified below and/or in Paragraph 3.7. B. Open only the containers of component materials to be use in each specific application as needed. Refer to Manufacturer's data sheets for pot-life/temperature relationship to determine size of batches to mix and mix ratios for each respective coat of the system. C. Measure, add, and mix the Silikal BP-Powder Hardener into the respective resin components in the proportions recommended by the Material Manufacturer. Pot life is short, so mix only as much material at a time as can be easily and efficiently applied. 3.5 MOISTURE VAPOR TREATMENT A. Mix moisture vapor treatment products as recommended by manufacturer. B. Pour out all resin onto the concrete surface and spread it with a squeegee. After a short operating time (appr. 10 minutes) the excess must be removed with the squeegee. The remaining resin can be rolled out with a lint free resin proof roller. 1. Resin films as well as the building of puddles have to be avoided! 2. The waiting time between the coats depends on the absorbency of the substrate and is normally between one and three hours. Before applying the second coat if required, the impregnation of the first coat into the substrate should be evident. C. If required, repeat the above process. 1. During application of the treatment take care that there is no film building at the surface. 2. The surface texture has to be maintained after every step. DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOORING 09910 - 5 of 7 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3.6 PRIME COAT A. Mix primer components according to manufacturers instructions. B. Pour the mixture batches onto the floor surface and use a 9" or 18" wide, 1/2" - 3/4" thick- napped, solvent resistant paint roller to roll out the material at a rate of 100 sq. ft./ gal. to form a uniform, continuous film, ensuring that all crevices, cracks, other surface discontinuities have been saturated and coated. Use a paint brush to reach areas inaccessible to the roller. Work quickly and deliberately; the pot life is short (10 -15 minutes). Do not leave any "puddles"; roll out any such accumulations. C. Allow the primer coat to cure. D. If any of the concrete has absorbed all of the primer or if the concrete still has a dry look, reprime these areas before applying the next layer. 3.7 COVING (IF REQUIRED) A, Surface Preparation 1. If concrete walls are to be painted prior to installation of cove base, the bottom portion of the walls shall remain uncoated to the height of the cove base to insure a proper bond to the concrete wall. 2. If walls are constructed of a non-compatible material or if a coating exists, a backer board of 1/2" cement board cut to the desired height of the cove base needs to be installed. The top of the backer board should be cut at a 45° angle to create a "beveled" edge. 1 If a backer board needs to be installed it shall be fastened using a high grade construction adhesive as well as counter sunk screws or concrete masonry anchors. B. System Description 1. Cove base shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations and shall be: C. Application area requires prime coat according to 30402 D. Trowel-On Cove Base consisting of a trowel applied radius/base mix with a termination strip installed at the top of the base. 1. Cove base will receive a broadcast and top coat consistent with flooring system. 3.8 PATCHING/SLOPING (IF REQUIRED) A. Mix polymer concrete components as recommended by the Material Manufacturer. B. Use mixture to repair any damaged concrete, or to slope any areas as needed. C. Once cured, material must be re-primed before next layer is applied. 3.9 TOPPING ¦ A. Size the batches, and mix according to Manufacturer's instructions. The entire batch should be ¦ poured and spread at.once, i.e., do not let material set in pail. B. Spread the topping material with a gauge rake set to a depth of 1/8 Lightly trowel to a uniform thickness of 1/8" as necessary. C. If necessary, roll with a porcupine roller to release trapped air. D. Broadcast colored quartz into the fresh material before it begins to cure, Broadcast by hand, or use a backpack type blower or sand blast pot to achieve an even broadcast. The quartz must `rain' down and not be thrown into the wet base coat. E. Allow the topping to cure. F. Remove excess quartz by sweeping, "blow-down", and/or vacuuming. 3.10 TOPCOAT A. Apply with clean rollers at a rate of 80 - 90 sq. ft./gal. in the same way as the Silikal Primer was applied as described in Paragraph 3.04.02. DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOORING 09910 - 6 of 7 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. (If Required) Broadcast aluminum oxide, or other suitable material into wet topcoat resin; size and rate as determined by owner. C. Allow topcoat to cure. Floors without aluminum oxide broadcast may be lightly sanded if required. Vacuum all dust, paying particular attention to edges and corners. 3.11 SECOND TOP COAT A. Apply with clean rollers at a rate of 100 - 125 sq. ft./gal. in the same way as the Silikal Primer was applied as described in Paragraph 3.6. B. Allow topcoat to cure. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLANSPECTION A. Applicator shall request acceptance of surface preparation from the Engineer before application of the prime/seal coat. B. Applicator shall request acceptance of the prime coat from the Engineer before application of subsequent specified materials. 3.13 CLEANING A. Applicator shall remove any material spatters and other material that is not where it should be. Remove masking and covers taking care not to contaminate surrounding area. B. Applicator shall repair any damage that should arise from either the application or clean-up effort. 3.14 COATING SCHEDULE A. Moisture vapor treatment shall be Silikal RE40 application rate shall be approximately 220 sq. ft, per gallon (approx. 7 mils) B. Primer shall be Silikal R41 with Additive I Application rate shall be approx. 100 sq.ft. per gallon (approx. 16 mils). C. Patching/Sloping material shall be R17 D. Coving shall be Silikal HK 20 per manufacturers recommendations. E. Body coat shall be Silikal R61CQ, applied with a gauge rake set at 1/8" for a rate of 40 sq. ft. per batch. Colored quartz to be broadcast into the uncured topping (optional). Broadcast the quartz at the rate of 0.5 - 0.75 pounds per sq. ft. F. Clear topcoat shall be Silikal R81; apply at the rate of 80 - 90 sq. ft. per gallon for the first coat and 90 - 120 sq_ ft_ per gallon for the second application- DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOORING 09910-7of7 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-polymer toilet compartments configured as detailed on drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. D. Product certificates. E. Maintcnancc data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Santana Products, Inc., or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Ampco, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 4. Comtec Industries/Capitol Partitions. 5. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 6. Global Steel Products Corp. 7. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. 8. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 9. Metpar Corp. 10. Partition Systems Incorporated of South Carolina. 11. Rockville Partitions Incorporated. 12. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company. 13. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc. B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced. C. Entrance-Screen Style: Overhead braced. D. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung. E. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 1 of 3 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum orstainless- steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning, 1 - Polymer Panel Finish: One color and pattern in each room, a, Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. G. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and construction of pilasters. H. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Stainless stecl. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum. head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32- inch wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch between panels and walls. .C. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls, TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2 of 3 I APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open apprommately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. END OF SECTION 10155 I TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 3 of 3 APA 11.05 I SECTION 10431 - SIGNAGE PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Panel Signs Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Product Data: 1. Submit five (5) copies of manufacturer's technical information, installation instructions and maintenance recommendations. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings clearly indicating: a. Size, type, layout, colors and wording of signs, letters, plaques and directories. b. Fabrication, construction and installation details of anchors, grounds, reinforcements and accessories. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of all anchors to be installed, as a unit of work in other sections, for all signs, letters, plaques and directories anchored to permanent construction. C. Plans and elevations which indicate the locations of all signs, letters, plaques and directories as specified for this project d. Large scale sections of typical members and other components. e. Message list for each sign required. f. Proof copy of metal plaques. C. Samples: 1. General: a. The Architect shall make all selections from the samples of standard colors, patterns and surface textures submitted by the manufacturer. 2. Signs and Letters: a. Submit one (1) "full - size" sample, representative of each type of sign and letter specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERMANENT ROOM DESIGNATIONS A. General: 1. Permanent Room Designations shall include Room Names and/or Numbers and shall conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1991 (ADA) including any subsequent revisions. 2. Permanent Room Designations shall be considered "Panel Signs". 3. Letters and numbers shall be considered "Tactile Text". B. Character Proportion: 1. Letters and numbers on signs shall have a width to height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke-width to height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. C. Character Height: 1. Characters and numbers on signs shall be sized according to the viewing distance from which they are to be read. The minimum height is measured using an upper case X. Use upper case characters only. D. Raised and Brailled Characters & Pictorial Symbol Signs: 1. Letters and numbers (tactile text) on signs shall be raised 1/32", upper case, sans serif or SIGNAGE 10431 - 1 of 3 APA 11.05 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement simple serif type and shall be accompanied with Grade II Braille, raised 1/32", on the bottom of the sign. Raised tactile text shall be at least 5/8" high, but no higher than 2". Pictograms, in a minimum 6" x 6" area, may be reverse engraved/subsurface and shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal description placed directly below the pictogram. E. Finish and Contrast: 1. The characters and background of signs shall be eggshell, matte or other non-glare finish. 2. Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background - either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background, 3. Colors: See 1.2 SUBMITTALS, C.l.a., page 10431-1. F. Sign Materials and Product Manufacturers: 1. The signs shall be fabricated from modified acrylic polymers, (MAP) suitable for indoor use. Approved Modified Acrylic Polymer PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS: Rowmark "Ultra Mattes" Rowland, Inc. 15 Massirio Drive Kensington, Connecticut 06037 (800) 243-3339 2. "2Plex" New Hermes, Inc. 2200 Northmont Pky. Duluth, Georgia 30136 (800) 843-7637 3. "Crystals" Innovative Plastics, Inc. P. O. Box 7065 Algonquin, Illinois 60102 (815) 477-0778 G. Sign Fabrication: 1. Signs shall be a minimum of 1/8" thick, not including raised characters, non-glare (matte) finished surface with straight edges free of saw marks or any other imperfections. 2. Signs shall be fabricated by applying a thin layer of ink to the back of the clear base sheet and a clear protective coating over the ink. Ink colors shall be as specified in 1.2 SUBMITTALS, C. 1. a., page 10431-1 3. Raised "Tactile Text" shall be achieved by chemically welding 1/16" thick computer cut, colorfast MAP text characters into the 1/32" computer recessed area of the face of the base sheet. The text shall be chemically welded to the recessed surface of the base sheet using methylene chloride and shall, after fabrication, remain raised 1/32" above the face of the base sheet. 4. Grade II Braille shall be achieved by pressing optically correct acrylic raster balls into .003 in, computer drilled holes in the base sheet surface. The acrylic raster balls shall be U.V. protected and shall be guaranteed against fading. Bordered, depressed Braille is NOT acceptable. 5. Sign edges shall be square and the corners shall have a 1/2" radius. 6. Text style shall be HELVETICA upper case letters. Text height shall be 3/4" and Number height shall be 3/4". SIGNAGE 10431 - 2 of 3 APA 11.05 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 7. Approved Modified Acrylic Polymer sign manufacturers: a. All sign manufacturers shall comply with the specified product and fabrication requirements. 8. Sign Names, Type, and Size: a. Pictogram Sign and Room Name 9" x 6" PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Panel Wall Signs shall be located where shown on the drawings and as called out in these specifications. B. Panel Wall Signs shall be installed level and plumb with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects of appearance. C. Mounting Heights: 1. Signs mounted flat against the wall: a. Panel Wall Signs shall be mounted 60" above the finish floor to the centerline of the sign b. Conform to ADAAG 4.4 Protruding Objects for all flat wall mounted signage. 3.2 PERMANENT ROOM DESIGNATIONS: A. Signs shall be located as shown on the drawings and as directed by the Architect. 1. Signs shall be mounted on the door. 2. Signs shall be installed as follows: a. Signs shall be installed into a bed of silicone sealant which shall be screeded even with the outside square edge of the signs. b. Should shim plates be necessary to obtain a true and level secure attachment, they shall be aluminum with pre-drilled and counter sunk holes, silicone filled. 3.3 SIGN SCHEDULE A. Men's and Women's with handicapped symbol and Braille. END OF SECTION 10431 I SIGNAGE 10431 - 3 of 3 1 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets. 3, Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. See Division 9 painting Sections for field painting fire-protection cabinets. C. See Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for hose systems, racks, and valves. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification, 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, panel style, and details of installation. 3. Show location of knockouts for hose valves. B. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B, Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Copper-Alloy Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36B 36M, alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass, 70 percent copper). I FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 1 of 3 APA 11.09 E. F Tempered Float Glass: Class 1 (clear), Acrylic Bubble: One piece. 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Amerex Corporation. 2. Ansul Incorporated. 3. Badger Fire Protection. 4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 5. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 6. ' General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 7. JL Industries, Inc. 8. Kidde Fyrnetics. 9. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 10. Modern Metal Products., Div. of Technico. 11. Moon American. 12. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 13. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc. B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-]b (2.3-kg) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 2. General Accessory Mfg. Co. 3. JL Industries, Inc. 4. Kidde Fyrnetics. 5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 6. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico. 7. Moon American. 8. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 9.. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc. B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. C. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. D. Cabinet Material: Aluminum. E. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). I. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2 21/2 inch backbend depth. F. Door Material: Aluminum sheet. G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). 1. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type 1, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 2 of 3 APA 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement J. Finishes: 1. Aluminum: Baked enamel, a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. 1. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth- I PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed, B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. C. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. D. Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. F. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated. G. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. H. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair. END OF SECTION 10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 3 of 3 APA 11.08 SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Childcare accessories. 3. Underlavatory guards. B. Owner-Furnished Material: 1. Multi-roll toilet paper dispenser. 2. Sanitary napkin disposal unit. 3. Soap dispenser. Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated. C. Maintenance data. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. WarrantyPeriod: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PARTI-PRODUCTS 2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. B. Grab Bar: 1. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish satin on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 3. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 4. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. C. Mirror Unit: 1, Frame: Stainless-steel channel. a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801- I of 2 APA 11.08 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1 Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 3. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2.2 WARM-AIR DRYERS A. Manufacturer: Granger Hand Dryer Model 3DYH3 2.3 BABY CHANGING STATION A. Manufacturer: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., KoalaKare Products Model KB 100-00 Cream 2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. .2. Truebro by IPS Corporation. B. Underlavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand it downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446. END OF SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 2 of 2 1 1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 15000 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF DIVISION A. Work shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for a complete and properly functioning mechanical installation in accordance with requirements of the Florida Building Code 2007 - Mechanical & Plumbing Codes with latest amendments and to other pertinent codes made a part of such code by reference and applicable NFPA codes, and contract drawings . and specifications. Work shall be understood to include all work specified in Division 15, Mechanical, Section numbers 15000 through 15999, inclusive, of the specifications. 1.2 DRAWINGS A. Architectural and structural drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings with reference to the building construction- Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and extent of work. Architectural drawings indicate more exactly the desired relationship between diffusers, registers, lighting fixtures, equipment, electric panels and devices, plumbing fixtures, and other items which remain exposed in the completed buildings. Exact locations and arrangements of materials and equipment shall be determined, with the approval of the Engineer, as work progresses to conform in the best possible manner with the surroundings and with the adjoining work of other trades. Where locations of equipment, devices or fixtures are controlled by architectural features, establish such locations by referring to dimensions on Architectural (A-series) drawings and not by scaling drawings. 1.3 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Coordinate all work, prior to installation, with work of other trades and with architectural and structural features to preclude interference's between the works of different trades and to insure necessary clearances at crossovers and equipment. Work requiring necessary fixed locations (e.g., piping with required slopes, lighting fixtures, and diffusers in ceilings, etc.) takes precedence over work not requiring such fixed locations and shall establish permissible routing of services associated with the latter. Should work be performed without adequate coordination so that interference's occur between works of different trades, the Contractor shall eliminate such interference's by requiring necessary rework by the trades involved. Such rework shall meet express approval of the Engineer and shall be performed at no addition to the contract amount. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to "General Conditions". Submit to Engineer for approval, before commencing work, shop drawings for all mechanical materials and equipment to be provided. In addition, submit other drawings or diagrams, dimensioned and in correct scale, requested by Engineer to clarify the work intended or to show its relationship to adjacent work or work of other trades. Contractor is responsible for any delays in job progress accruing directly or indirectly from late submission of shop drawings. Shop drawings shall clearly show the following: 1. Technical and descriptive data in detail equal to or greater than the date given in the item specification. Indicate all characteristics, special modifications and features. Where performance and characteristic data is shown on the drawings or specified, submitted data shall be provided in a degree which is both quantitatively and qualitatively equal to that specified and shown so that comparison can be made. Present data in detail equal to or greater than that given in item specifications and include all weights, deflections, speeds, velocities, pressure drops, operating temperatures, operating curves, temperature ranges, sound ratings, dimensions, sizes, manufacturers' names, model numbers, types of material COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 15000 - 1 - 9 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement used, operating pressures, full load amperages, starting amperages, fouling factors, capacities, set-points, chemical compositions, certifications and endorsements, operating voltages, thickness, gauges and all other related information as applicable to particular item. 2. Exceptions to or deviations from the contract documents. Should Engineer approve any items having such deviations which are not clearly brought to Engineer's attention, in writing, on item submittal, then Contractor is responsible for correction of such deviations regardless of when such deviations are discovered. 1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain one extra set of black-line, white print drawings for use as Record drawings. Records shall be kept daily, using colored pencil. As the work is completed, relevant information shall be transferred to a reproducible set, and copies made shall be given to the Engineer. S. As-built information shall be shown to scale, using standard symbols listed in the legend. As a minimum, show the .following: 1. Location of stub-outs, dimensioned from permanent building lines. 2. Location and depth of under-slab and in-slab piping. 3. All routing of piping system. 4. Correct all equipment schedules. 5. Corrected numbers as they appear on the schedules. 6. Corrected motor horsepower electrical data. 1.6 FEES AND PERMIT A. All work done under this Contract shall comply with all State and Local Codes having jurisdiction and with the requirements of the Utility Companies whose service may be used. All modifications required by these codes shall be made by this Contractor without additional charge. Where code requirements are less than those shown on the Plans or in the Specifications; the Plans and Specifications shall be followed. Where applicable, N.F.P.A. requirements shall be met. . S. The Contractor shall obtain all permits, inspections, and approvals as required by all authorities having jurisdiction. All fees and costs of any nature what-so-ever incidental to these permits, inspections, and approvals must be assumed and paid by this Contractor. C. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment shall be new and without blemish or defect. S. Equipment and materials shall be products which will meet with the acceptance of the agency inspecting the work. Where acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested, and certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested, and certified. C. Substitutions: The following paragraphs shall govern should any conflict exist between these "substitution" paragraphs and any other paragraphs of Division 15. 1. Substituted equipment or optional equipment where permitted and approved, must conform to space requirements. Any substituted equipment that cannot meet space requirements, whether approved or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Any modifications of related systems as a result of substitutions shall be made at the Contractor's expense. COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 15000 - 2 - 9 1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 2. Note that the approval of shop drawings, or other information submitted in accordance with the requirements herein before specified, does not assure that the Engineer, or any other Owner's representative, attests to the dimensional accuracy or dimensional suitability of the material or equipment involved or the ability of the material or equipment involved or the mechanical performance of the equipment. Approval of shop drawings does not invalidate the plans and specifications if in conflict, unless a letter requesting such change is submitted by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Engineer. 3. Substitutions of mechanical equipment for that shown on the schedules or designated by model number in the specifications will not be considered if the item is not a regular catalogued item shown in the current catalog of the manufacturer. 4. If bidder proposes to substitute materials and/or manufacturer's equipment in lieu of those specified, he shall submit written request to the Engineer for approval no later than ten (10) days prior to the receipt of bids. 5. Requests submitted directly to the Owner or to the Engineer's consultants and/or verbal requests will not be evaluated. 6. Should the proposed substitution be accepted, it will be incorporated into the Contract Documents by form of addendum. 7. All substitutions proposed later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids shall not be considered. Any substitution not accepted and any substitution request proposed later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids shall not be used as either the basis for bidding or submittal after award of the contract. D. Operating conditions and capacities must be as follows: 1. No overloading. 2. No operation at conditions outside of maximum and minimum limits recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the engineer. 3. Compatible with all systems. E. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment and materials furnished must be as follows: 1. Recommended by the manufacturer for the application. 2. Installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the application except where specifications and drawings clearly indicate otherwise. F. Ownership of existing equipment and handling thereof, demolition: 1. Comply with the requirements set forth in Section entitled "Special Requirements", for the removal, transportation and delivery of special equipment/material set forth to be delivered on a pre-arranged schedule. 2. Such equipment/material is owned by Project Owner is not to be taken or otherwise disposed of by the Contractor (or Subcontractors), unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. If such unauthorized removal or disposal is done, this Contractor will be back charged a sum representing fair market retail value of such items. If the owner does not wish to retain the equipment or materials, it is the responsibility of the contractor to remove these items from the site and dispose of them as required by law. 3. Provide demolition of existing mechanical work in remodeled areas. Demolition includes but is not limited to removal of all equipment, controls, piping, ducts, supports, etc. and filling, patching and painting to match existing surfaces. 2.2 SLEEVES A. General: Lay out work and set sleeves in new or existing construction so there shall be a minimum of cutting, drilling and patching. All sleeves not used during construction period shall be sealed using grout. Unused penetrations or sleeves through fire rated barriers shall be sealed to prevent passage of smoke or heat using an Underwriters' Laboratories approved COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 15000 - 3 - 9 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement method rated at least equal to the barrier being penetrated. Method submitted must show proof of UL label. B. Pipe sleeves: 1. Walls and partitions: a. Sleeves 8 inch Diameter and Smaller (above grade): Sleeves shall be 18 gauge steel pipe or plastic sleeves built into wall, partition or beam, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch minimum between covering and sleeve. Penetrations of fire rated barriers shall have 18 gauge steel sleeves. b. Floors (above grade): Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe or plastic, set before floor is poured, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch between covering and sleeve, and shall extend 1/2 inch above finished floor. C. Duct Sleeves: Sleeves or openings sized to pass mechanical ducts and covering shall be of framed construction in roof, wall, or partitions. d. Sealing of sleeves: 1) Sleeves Above Grade: Openings around pipes, duct, etc., passing through sleeves shall be made draft free and vermin-proof by packing solidly with mineral wool or fiberglass. 2) Sealing Material: Where applicable and recommended by manufacturer, other ceiling materials may be acceptable as options to above specified methods. Submit for Engineer approval prior to procurement. 2.3 FLOOR, WALL, AND CEILING PLATES OR ESCUTCHEONS, IN EXPOSED AREAS: A. Provide escutcheons or fabricated plates or collars at each location where pipe or exposed duct passes through a finished surface. Escutcheons for flush sleeves shall be chromium plated brass and sleeves extending above floor shall be chrome plated brass. Collars or plates for ducts and large diameter insulated pipe shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized copper bearing sheet steel, secured to structure and neatly fitted around duct or pipe. 2.4 MOTORS: Unless specifically specified otherwise in the section covering the driven equipment (or the equipment drives), motors shall comply with the following: A. Three Phase: NEMA design B, three-phase, squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40 degree C ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation material and shall be cast iron, drip proof, horizontal foot mounted type with ball bearings. Two speed motors shall be provided as scheduled and shall be two winding type. B. Single Phase: Squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40 degree C ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation materials and shall be two winding capacitor start type with steel enclosure, drip proof, horizontal foot mount and ball bearings. C. Scheduled Horsepower: The horsepower scheduled or specified are those nominal sizes estimated to be required by the equipment when operating at specified duties and efficiencies. In the case of pumps, these horsepower are non-overloading and may also include provisions for future planned impeller changes. If the actual horsepower for the equipment furnished differs from that specified or shown on the drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that proper size feeders, breakers, starters, etc. are provided at no change in contract price. 2.5 SUBSTITUTIONS INVOLVING ELECTRICAL CHANGES A. If the Contractor proposes items which have different electrical and/or control characteristics (such as larger amperage requirements, etc.) than those specified and provided for and/or which otherwise change the electrical and/or control system(s), then (even if the Engineer approves such items) the Contractor must correlate all sizes, voltages, amperages and wiring for COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 15000 - 4 - 9 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement applicable items so that applicable electrical and/or control changes can be made. Contractor is responsible for all related additional costs. Other coordination is as specified elsewhere. 2.6 BELT DRIVES A. Equip each motor driven machine not directly connected with V-belt drive. Belts shall be of correct cross section to fit properly in sheave grooves and shall be carefully matched for each drive. Sheaves shall be cast iron or steel, bored to fit properly on shafts and secured with keys of proper size. The rating of each drive shall be as recommended by manufacturer for service but shall be at least 1.5 times nameplate rating of motor. 1. Fan Belt Drives: Fixed pitch sheaves shall be provided. 2. Speed Adjustments: Adjust fan speed by change(s) in sheave size as necessary to obtain proper design air flow with fan in its installed location. Fans may be first fitted with variable pitch drive until proper fixed pitch drive size, or alternate sizes of fixed pitch drives may be used until proper fan speed is obtained. Provide all drives necessary to obtain proper fan speed needed to deliver necessary air quantity. 2.7 VIBRATION OF AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT AND FAN UNITS A. For air handling equipment and fans driven by motors 5-hp or greater, field vibration levels will not be acceptable if the maximum vibration velocity or displacement measurement exceeds the following values (when measurements are taken at the bearing supports using a vibration analyzer with the filter set at the operating fan speed). Fan Speed Maximum (RPM) Vibration Level__ _ 800 or less 5 mils (0.127 mm) max displacement 801 and greater 0.20 in/sec (5 mm/s) max velocity 2.8 BEARINGS A. All bearings shall be rated for 200,000 hour operating life unless indicated. 2.9 BELT AND COUPLING GUARDS A. Each belt drive shall be equipped with an OSHA approved guard. Guards shall be constructed of # 12 U. S. Standard gauges 3/4 inch diamond mesh wire screen, or equivalent, welded to one inch steel angle frames, and shall enclose all belts and sheaves. Tops and bottoms of guards shall be of substantial sheet metal or not less than #18 U.S. Standard gauge. Braces or supports must not "bridge" sound and vibration isolators. Guards shall be designed with adequate provision for movement of motor required to permit oiling, use of speed counters, and other maintenance and testing operations with guard in place. All direct drive equipment shall have coupling guards in accordance with Florida Department of Business Regulation safety regulations and OSHA. 2.10 PAINTING AND MARKING: A. Painting: Painting of equipment, pipe, and ducts (insulated or uninsulated is specified under the "Painting" Division of these specifications. Touch-up of shop coat shall be performed under Division furnishing equipment. B. Marking: Refer to Section entitled "Mechanical Identification". 2.11 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide as necessary for access to concealed valves, cleanouts, unions, dampers, coils, junction boxes, etc., where no other means of access is shown or specified. Doors shall be manufactured by the Milcor Division of Inland-Ryerson, or an acceptable equal, type as follows: COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 15000 - 5 - 9 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement Article I. D Article II. Door oor Location Tyne Drywall Style "DW" Masonry or Tile Style "M-Stainless" Acoustical Tile Style "AT" Plaster Style "K" Fire-rated Walls Style "Fire-rated" & Each door shall be equipped with two flush, screwdriver operated, tarn latches and, other than Style "M", shall be finished to match adjacent surface. Door sizes shall be applicable to the access required for normal service. See sections entitled "Ductwork" for access doors related to duct systems. 2.12 EXCAVATION & BACKFILL A. Each subcontractor shall do trench and pit excavating and backfilling inside and outside the building, as required by his work, including shoring and bracing, pumping and protection for safety of persons and property. B. Backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding six (6) inches in depth.C-pleted backfill shall conform to surrounding ground and finish grade and with compaction requirements of Division Two of these Specifications: 1. Concrete encasement: Piping passing under footings, foundations and other locations as shown on Drawings shall be encases by eight (8) inches (minimum) concrete on all sides. Concrete shall conform to Division Three requirements. 2. Extend concrete encasement eight (8) inches around piping and twelve (12) each side of footings or foundations. C. Remove non-usable excavated material from the site. Deposit any usable surplus material on site where directed by the Project Architect/Engineer, Do not remove usable material from site. D. Provide and maintain bracing, shoring or sheathing as required to safely support sides of excavations. The Contractor doing the excavation and the Contractor using the excavation are responsible for safety in excavations. E. This Contractor shall provide and operate pumping equipment to keep excavations free of water. F. This Contractor is responsible for repairing and restoring paving streets, curbs, walks and other work in the area where excavations are made. G. Provide additional excavation and backfill where required to resolve conflicts in buried lines. H. Coordinate timing of excavations in advance with other trades. 1. Excavation shall be open cut from the surface. J. Hold trench width to a minimum. K. Do not excavate utility trenches parallel to building footings closer than four (4) feet from the footings except by approval of the Project Architect/Engineer. When parallel trenches require cuts deeper than the building footings, the horizontal distance from the footing shall be equal to, or greater than one and one-half (I-1/2) times the vertical distance below the footing, but in no case shall the horizontal distance be less than four (4) feet except by the approval of the Project Architect/Engineer. L. Mechanical excavation shall be held to four (4) inches above final grade o f the bottom of trench. The remainder shall be shaped by manual excavation, so that piping is fully supported on undisturbed soil. Shoring of piping in trench will not be allowed. Piping must be suspended from above. M. Bell joint holes shall be carefully excavated so that none of the load is supported by the bells or joints. COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 15000 - b - 9 1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Reslroom Replacement N. Whenever, in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, the soil is unsuitable for supporting piping and appurtenances, provisions for proper foundations shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. Soil test reports are bound in the Specifications Book. 0. The drawings for this project show the anticipated underground utilities. Locations of utilities which will interfere with proposed construction shall be assumed to be a known factor to each subcontractor unless such locations on drawings are in error. P. Wherever trenching or excavating, assume utilities may exist in area without such being shown ' on the drawings. Exercise extreme caution. Should existing facilities be damaged, repair such to Project Architect/Engineer's satisfaction at no additional cost to the Owner. Q. Special care shall be taken with excavation in limited distance from existing trees. Manual excavation shall be required. PART 3 - EXECUTION r 3.1 ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL WORK COORDINATION A. Definitions: Definitions for the purpose of mechanical/electrical control and power coordination are as follows. (Note: The use of the words, "Provide", "Furnish" and "Install" are intended only for use in describing the coordination indicated by this paragraph 3.01, and do no necessarily have the same definitions when used outside of the context of this paragraph.3.01). Any items which do not fall within the scope of this paragraph 3.01 shall be coordinated as individually specified. 1. "Furnish" means to procure an item and to deliver it to the project for installation. 2. "Install" means to determine (in coordination with others as necessary) the appropriate intended location of an item to set and connect it in place. 3. "Provide" means to both furnish and install. 4. Power Circuit: Circuit which caries main electric power to apparatus to which the power circuit is connected. 5. Control Circuit: Circuit which carries electrical signals directing the performance of a controller but which does not carry the main electric power. (See NEC, Section 430-71). Such circuits shall also include those which serve a dual control and power function (e.g., a line voltage thermostat circuit which both activates and powers a small fan motor). 6. Controller: A device or group of devices, which serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, electric power delivered to apparatus to which the controller is connected and includes any switch or device normally used to start and stop a motor. (See NEC, Article 100, Definitions, "Controller", and Section 430-81(a).) 7. Control Device: A device which reacts to an operating condition (pressure, temperature, flow, humidity, etc.) and which initiates transmission of an electrical control signal which causes operation of a controller or which causes operation of pressure switches, etc. B. Auxiliary Control Device: A device (such as a low voltage control transformer, electric relay, etc.) which is located in a control circuit and which carries or responds to (but does not initiate) an electrical control signal initiated by a control device. C. Work of Division 15: includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Provide: a. All controllers which are generally manufactured or shipped as integral with Division 15 equipment (for example, such as starters packaged with packaged equipment, etc.). b. All electric motors and other electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.) which are specified in Division 15. C. All controls specified in Division 15 "HVAC Controls". d. All control circuits (including conduit and boxes) from any Division 16 panels to power utilizing equipment provided by Division 15 and including the necessary circuit breakers. e. All control connections to equipment provided by Division 15. COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 15000 - 7 - 9 11 Griner Engineering 11,09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement f All control circuits, including conduit and boxes. g. All control connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.). h. Auxiliary control devices. i. All control devices (thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, humidistat, etc.) and make control circuit connections thereto. j. Any and all electronic and electric control devices and electric or pneumatic connections thereto. k. Provide all starters for all mechanical equipment. 1) Provide all disconnects for all mechanical equipment. 2) Furnish: All controllers. Controllers shall comply with the requirements of applicable sections of Division 16. D. Work of Division 16 includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Provide: a, All power circuits, including conduit and boxes. b. All power connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems, electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.). C. All remote motor disconnects (remote from the related controller) at all locations required by NEC and connections thereto except those disconnects which are specified in Division 15 to be provided as part of the equipment itself, 2. Install: All controllers furnished by Division 15. E. Other Requirements: 1. Interface Coordination: Contractor which supplies the power consuming equipment shall coordinate with actual contract document control and sequencing requirements regarding interface of the equipment with the control system specified in Division 15 and shall provide equipment wiring diagrams for final coordination for actual installation. 3.2 TESTS A. General: All systems shall be inspected, tested, given a trial run, and demonstrated to Engineer's and Owner's satisfaction that they are complete and ready for operation. B. Plumbing Soil, Waste and Vent Piping: Test in accord with standard plumbing code and as otherwise specified. C. All Other Piping: Unless required otherwise by code or other divisions of specifications, piping shall be tested at one hundred fifty percent (150%) of normal operating pressure for a continuous 24-hour period without leaking. D. Systems - Air Conditioning: Refer to section describing test and balance of system. E. Observation of Tests: Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing at least two weeks prior to scheduled test(s) and demonstration(s) to allow Engineer time to schedule his observation of Contractor's test(s) and demonstration(s). 3.3 INSTRUCTION: Refer to "Instruction and Maintenance Manuals" Section. 3.4 ACCEPTANCE A. Prior to requesting final inspection. 1. Complete all work required by drawings and specifications. 2. Acceptance will be made by Engineer on the basis of tests and inspection of project. Contractor shall furnish necessary mechanics to operate system, furnish test instruments and equipment as required, make necessary adjustments and assist with final inspection. COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 15000 - 8 - 9 1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3.5 PROTECTION OF WORK UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Contractor shall protect all materials and equipment from damage, the entrance of dirt and construction debris from the time of installation until final acceptance. Any materials and equipment that has been damaged shall be repaired to "as new" condition or replaced at the direction of the Engineer. Where factory finishes occur and damage is minor, finishes may be touched-up. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the damage is excessive, factory finish shall be replaced to "new" condition. END OF SECTION 15000 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 15000 - 9 - 9 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15005 - INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 Provide complete written and verbal operating and maintenance instruction to the Owner for all mechanical systems. ' PART 2 - DOCUMENTATION 2.1 Provide two (2) instructions and maintenance manuals each complete as follows: ' A. Hardback three ring loose leaf binders. B. Title sheet with job name, contractors, sub-contractors, controls sub-contractor and related contractors or material suppliers' names, addressed and phone numbers. C. Index of contents. D. A signed copy of acknowledgement of instructions to the Owner or his authorized representative. Two additional copies of the signed acknowledgment shall be sent directly to the Engineer as soon as possible after receipt. E. Approved shop drawings and submittal data and parts and maintenance booklet for each item of material and equipment furnished under this division, (but not limited to) the following. 1. Spare parts list and source of supply for each equipment item. 2. List of valves with location, service, size, model and operating position. F. Copies of certificates of inspection. G. Guarantees PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VERBAL INSTRUCTION A. Provide verbal, hands-on, operating and maintenance instruction to Owner's Authorized Personnel for each equipment item and system. Instructions shall be given by competent personnel. END OF SECTION 15005 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 15005-1 -1 1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15007 - IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 Provide complete identification of the mechanical systems including piping and valves as noted herein, shall conform to ANSI and OSHA standards for pipe identification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. W.H. Brady Co. 2223 West Camden Road Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 B. Seton Name Plate Corporation 592 Boulcvard New Haven, Connecticut 06505 2.2 MARKERS, TAGS AND LABELS: A. Markers: Must have color coded background, proper color of legend in relation to background color, approved legend size, approved length and flow arrow indicator. B. Valve tags: each tag shall designate appropriate service and valve number - 1 -" brass. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: A. Locate marking and banding where practical such that groups of pipe are identified at similar location for ease of visual tracking. For example, mark and band parallel runs of pipe which are side-by-side at the same general place. B. Small Pipes: Less that - diameter may be identified with tags similar to those specified for valves. C. Adhere or affix all identification items permanently except where removal may be necessary for maintenance or service. 3.2 Markers: Provide on piping exposed in equipment rooms. 3.3 Valve Tags: Valve tags shall be installed on the following items: A. Small piping where markers are impractical. B. Small but critical equipment items on which it is impractical to install labels. END OF SECTION 15007 1 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15007-1-1 Griner Engineering 11.09 SECTION 15010 - PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Sanitary sewer piping system. D. Domestic water piping system. Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Section 15020 - Pipe and Pipe Fitting. B. Section 15110 - Pipe, Valves & Fittings: Potable Water C. Section 15190 - Hangers and Supports D. Section 15007 - Mechanical Identification E. Section 15210 - Plumbing Fixtures, Trim & Specialties 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B16.23 - Wrought and Copper and Wrought Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. B. ANSI/ASME SEC. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. C. ANSI/ASME B32 - Solder Metal. D. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. E. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. F. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. G. ASTM C564 - Rubber caskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. H. AWS A5.8 Brazing Filler Metal. 1. AWWA C601- Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water. J. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15000. B. Include manufacturer's product data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15000. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15000. C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE: A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. Fittings: Cast Iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPS HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. Fittings: Cast Iron. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and shield assemblies. 1 PLUMBING AND PIPING 15010-1-3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 2.2 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS: A. Pipe size 2 inches and under: 150 PSIG malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. B. Dielectric connections: union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BALL VALVES A. Screwed, NIBCO, 2" and smaller. B. Solder, NIBCO, 2" and smaller. 2.4 BALL VALVES A. Up to 2 inches: Three piece bronze body, full port IFS, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle solder or threaded ends. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove Burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. , H. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. 1. Install bell and spigot pipe with bill end up stream. J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. ' 3.3 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and equipment of apparatus connections. ' B. Install brass make adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. C. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. , 3.4 DISINFECTIONS OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to start of work; verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 MG/L residual. ' D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. ' F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 MG/L, Repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water of 1.0 MG/L. PLUMBING AND PIPING 15010 - 2 - 3 , Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601. 3.5 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary sewer connections to existing system. END OF SECTION 15010 PLUMBING AND PIPING 15010 - 3 -3 1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement ' SECTION 15020 - PIPING AND FITTINGS: SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND DRAIN PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: A. Provide waste, vent and drain piping systems complete as indicated on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this section at no additional cost to owner (no change in contract price). ' 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS: Refer To Section Entitled "Common Requirements For Mechanical Work". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE: A. Schedule 40 PVC with approved PVC solvent welded fittings. B. PVC piping shall not be run in return air plenums. C. Any piping located in plenum spaces shall be service weight cast iron, no hub, with stainless steel clamps and shields with neoprene sealing sleeves. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 GENERAL: A. Refer To Section Entitled "Common Requirements For Mechanical Work", Paragraph Entitled ' "Drawings". 3.2 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS: A. General: joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas, and water tight. B. Connections: provide fixture and equipment connections in compliance with requirements of local codes. ' 3.3 Cleanouts: A. Provide as indicated and as required by local code. Provide access covers as specified for concealed locations. END OF SECTION 15020 PIPING AND FITTINGS: SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND DRAIN 15020-1-1 1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement ' SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1- GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Mechanical identification. 2. Sleeves. ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit for mechanical identification list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. B. Product Data: Mechanical Identification: Submit for mechanical identification manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with State of Florida standard. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton Identification Products. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B . Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light background color. C. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light background ' color, minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter. D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. E. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A 13.1. ' F Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously tlapi4ted minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. ' 2.2 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. ' C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel. D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel. E. Sealant: Acrylic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. ' BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1 - 2 plastic Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3.2 INSTALLATION - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A, Install plastic nameplates with adhesive. B. Install plastic tags with corrosion resistant metal chain. 3.3 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B, Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. C. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. D. Where piping or ductwork penetrate floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with insulation and caulk. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. END OF SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 2 - 2 Griner Engineering 11.09 SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Hanger rods. 3. Inserts. 4. Flashing. 5. Formed steel channel. 6. Firestopping relating to mechanical work. 7. Firestopping accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Concrete Forms and Accessories: Execution requirements for placement of sleeves in concrete forms specified by this section. 2. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section. 3. Section 07920 - Joint Sealers: Product requirements for sealant materials for placement by this section. 4. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 5. Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 6. Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. 3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E 119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops. 4. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 5. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 15060 - 1 of 9 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 13 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A, Firestopping Materials: Achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than I hour fire rating. B. Surface Burning: [ASTM E841 [UL 723] with maximum flame spread / smoke developed rating of 25/450. C. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping: Conform to UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having. jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions, sizes, and pipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers. B. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. C. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly. D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. Indicate calculations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. 1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. 2. Floor Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. a. Floor Penetrations within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Perform Work in accordance with AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. D. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 15060 - 2 of 9 r Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement ' B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS ' A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials. 1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. ' 1.13 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports. ' PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson Inc. 2. Creative Systems Inc. ' 3. Flex-Weld, Inc. 4. Glope Pipe Hanger Products Inc. 5. Michigan Hanger Co. ' 6. Superior Valve Co. B. Plumbing Piping - DWV: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. ' 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. ' 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 8. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon-steel adjustable, ring. C. Plumbing Piping - Water: ' 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. ' 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 15060 - 3 of 9 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 8. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 10. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, Carbon-steel ring. D. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Conform to [ASME B31.5] [ASTM F708] [MSS SP58] [MSS SP69] [MSS SP891. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: [Malleable iron] [Carbon steel,] adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. 5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 6. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 7. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated carbon-steel ring. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. 2.3 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing: 5 lb./sq. ft sheet lead. 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb./sq, ft sheet lead. D. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet bury compatible with roofing. E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.4 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube &. Conduit Corp. 2. B-Line Systems. 3. Unistrut Corp. B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center. 2.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Manufacturers: I. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Hilti Corp. 3. 3M fire Protection Products 4. Specified Technology, Inc. B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single component foam compound. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1 SECTION 15060 - 4 of 9 I Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with ' collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows. C. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.6 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES ' A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Darn Material: Permanent: ' 1, Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. D. General: ' 1. Furnish UL listed products. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. E. Non-Rated Surfaces: ' 1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed. 2, For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical sealing device to continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. ' B. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond. C. Install backing damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage. D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors. E. Do not drill or cut structural members. ' 3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. B. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 15060 - 5 of 9 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 1. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping, J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Refer to Section 15080. 3.4 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.5 INSTALLATION - FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter-flash, and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms for sound control. F. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flash and counter-flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach counter flashing mechanical equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints. G. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb. 3.6 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals. B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. E. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with stuffing firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. F. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 15060 - 6 of 9 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3.7 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, and other items, requiring firestopping. B . Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating. D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size. E. Fire Rated Surface: 1. Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. C. Pack void with backing material. d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated. F. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition, floor, ceiling, and roof opening as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. C. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install escutcheons floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling. 3. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing device to size of piping and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 15060 - 7 of 9 Griner Engineering 11.09 3.11 SCHEDULES Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement PIPE HANGER SPACING PIPE SIZE Inches COPPER TUBING MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet STEEL PIPE MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet COPPER TUBING HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches STEEL PIPE HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches 1/2 5 7 3/8 3/8 3/4 5 7 3/8 3/8 1 6 7 3/8 3/8 1-1/4 7 7 3/8 3/8 1-1/2 8 9 3/8 3/8 2 8 10 3/8 3/8 2-1/2 (Note 2 9 11 1/2 1/2 3 10 12 1/2 1/2 4 12 14 1/2 5/8 5 13 16 1/2 5/8 6 14 17 5/8 3/4 PIPE HANGER SPACING PIPE MATERIAL MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches ASS All sizes 4 3/8 FRP All Sizes 4 3/8 Ductile Iron (Note 2 PVC Al] Sizes 4 3/8 Note l: Refer to manufacturer's recommendations for grooved end piping systems. Note 2-,20 feet maximum spacing, minimum of one hanger for each pipe section close to joint behind bell. Provide hanger at each change of direction and each branch connection. For pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller, subjected to loadings other than weight of pipe and contents, limit span to maximum spacing for water service steel pipe. PIPE HANGER SPACING PIPE MATERIAL MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches ABS All sizes 4 3/8 Cast Iron All Sizes 5 5/8 Cast Iron (All Sizes) with 10 foot length of pipe 10 5/8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 15060 - 8 of 9 1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement Copper Tube, 1-1/4 inches and 6 1/2 smaller Copper Tube, l-1/2 inches and 10 1/2 larger PVC All Sizes 4 3/8 END OF SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 15060 - 9 of 9 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1-- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Tags. 3. Stencils. 4. Pipe markers. 5. Labels. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. B. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ASME A 13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark Identification Systems. 2. Safety Sign Co. 3. Seton Identification Products. MECHANTCAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 15075 - 1 of 2 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.2 TAGS A. Metal Tags: L Manufacturers: a. Seton. 2. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with finished edges. B. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum frame or plastic laminated. 2.3 PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A 13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Seton. 2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. C. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Seton. 2. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 2.4 LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton. B. Description: Laminated Mylar size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed identification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. R Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. ' D. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. F. Identify air handling units, heat transfer equipment and fans with plastic nameplates. G. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. H. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. END OF SECTION 15075 1 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 15075 - 2 of 2 .1, Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15080 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Piping system insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product and Execution requirements for inserts at hanger locations. 2. Section 15075 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for plumbing piping and equipment identification. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. 2. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. 3. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 4. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 5. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. PLUMBING INSULATION 15080 - 1 of 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for man made fiber. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MAN MADE MINERAL FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville, 2, Owens Corning. 3. Knauf. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. 13. Insulation: ASTM C547 Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation, Typc I, 850 degrees F. C. Insulation: ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. `K' factor: ASTM C177, 0,24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0,2 percent by volume. D. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm-inches. E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. ?. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials, B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed, A. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. B. Man made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips or both. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. C. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping or Equipment 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under finish jacket, 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range and service. D. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly, Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. E, Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: 1, All service jacket (ASJ). PLUMBING INSULATION 15090 - 2 of 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement F. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate. G. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. H. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. 1. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. J. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply: a. Glass Fiber, Rigid: 1) Pipe Size Range: 1/2 to 2 inches. 2) Thickness: One inch. END OF SECTION 15080 PLUMBING INSULATION 15080 - 3 of 3 I Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15110 - PIPE, VALVES & FITTINGS: POTABLE WATER PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: A. Provide potable water systems complete as indicated on the drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this section, at no additional cost to the owner. (no change in contract price). r 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS: Refer to Section 15000 "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Refer also to Section 15210 "Domestic Water System". 2.1 PIPE: Type L Copper conforming to ASTM B-SS in the building. 2.2 FITTINGS: wrought copper, solder joint, pressure type conforming to ANSI B16.22. 2.3 SOLDER JOINTS: "Federal Frye" - Aqua-Clean, Lead Free Solder and "No Korode" Flux for all Domestic Water Piping. 2.4 DIELECTRIC ISOLATORS: (If Applicable) A. Unions: for pipe sizes two inches (2") and smaller; Epco or Rockford-eclipse insulated unions with joint connection to suit pipe and equipment. 2.5 VALVES: A. All valves shall have the name or trademark of the manufacturer and the guaranteed working pressure cast or stamp on the body. Adapters shall be provided for all valves on copper lines. B. All stop valves used on this work, unless otherwise specified or required, shall be of the gate pattern, suitable for 125 pound working pressure. C. Ball valves 2" and smaller shall be three piece bronze, full port IPS, with solder joint connections rated at 400 pounds WOG. Stem extensions shall be furnished for use in insulated lines where insulation exceeds 1/2". Ball valves in sizes 2" and smaller shall be NIBCO S-585- 70. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS: A. General: Joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas, and water tight. 3.2 VALVES: A. All valves, stops and similar items shall be installed in an easily accessible location. Provide access panels (Refer to Section 15000 "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work") for all concealed valves. PIPE, VALVES &. FITTINGS: POTABLE WATER 15110-1-2 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3.3 TEST: Upon completion of the water supply system it shall be tested a proved tight under water pressure not less then 25 psi above the working pressure under which it is to be operated. Tests shall be observed by a representative of the architect before it is removed. 3.4 STERILIZATION: A. All potable water piping shall be disinfected with a mixture containing not less than 0.6 pounds of high-test (70% available chlorine) calcium hypo chlorite, or 2 pounds of chlorinated lime to each 1000 gallons of water to provide not less than 50 PPM of available chlorine. The mixture shall be injected into the system and retained for not less than 12 hours. The system shall then be drained, flushed with potable Water and placed in service. END OF SECTION 15110 PIPE, VALVES & FITTINGS: POTABLE WATER 15110-2-2 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.2 SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Domestic water piping, buried beyond 5 feet of building. 2. Domestic water piping, within 5 feet of building. 3. Domestic water piping, above grade. 4. Unions and flanges. 5. Valves. 6. Relief valves. 7. Hose bibs. 8. Hydrants. 9. Water hammer arrestors. 10. Bedding and cover materials. Related Sections: 1. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports, firestopping for placement by this section. 2. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for pipe identification and valve tags for placement by this section. 3. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation: Product and execution requirements for pipe insulation. B. A B. C D. REFERENCES American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI Z21.22 - Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME B 16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 3. ASME B 1626 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 4. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 5. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels. American Society of Sanitary Engineering: 1. ASSE 1010 - Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters. 2. ASSE 1011 - Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. 3. ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Resistant, Automatic Draining Type. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 2. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes. 3. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 4. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. Freeze (PVC) 5. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 6. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 7. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-1-6 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 8. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 9. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 10. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. E. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. F. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. G. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 4. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 5. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. H. Plumbing and Drainage Institute: 1. PDl WH201 - Water Hammer Arrester Standard. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturer's catalog information. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. 3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity. 4. Domestic Water Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for pumps, valves and accessories. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves and equipment. 13. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts list, exploded assembly views and recommended maintenance intervals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 2 - 6 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves and equipment on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. C . Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Water piping, buried beyond 5 feet of building: See civil engineering specifications. 2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Water piping, buried within 5 feet of building: Copper type "K" pipe and fittings 2.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM 1388-B-89 Type L, hard drawn seamless 2.4 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.5 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Screwed, Crane, 2" and smaller 2. Solder, Crane, 2" and smaller 3. Watts or approved equals 4. Underground ball valves 5. Substitutions: under provisions appropriate sections of this specification 2.6 CHECK VALVES A. Horizontal Swing Check Valves Manufacturers: 1. Crane Valve, North America. 2. Hammond Valve. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company. 4. NIBCO, Inc. Model. 2.7 RELIEF VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 3 - 6 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement i 2. Bell & Gossett. 3. Armstrong. B. Pressure Relief: 1. ANSI Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated. C. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. ANSI Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME certified and labeled. 2.8 HOSE BIBBS A. Manufacturers: 1. Woodford. B. Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, with hand wheel, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011. 2.9. HYDRANTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn. 2. Josam. 3. J.R. Smith. B. Wall Hydrant: ASSE 1019; non-freeze, self-draining type with polished bronze hose thread spout, locks shield and removable key, and integral vacuum breaker. 2.10 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn. 2. Josam. 3. J.R. Smith. B. ASSE 1010; stainless steel construction, piston type sized in accordance with PDI WH-201. C. Pre-charged suitable for operation in temperature range 34 to 250 degrees F and maximum 150 psi working pressure. 2.11 UNDERGROUND PIPE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton. 2. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Plastic Ribbon Tape: Bright colored, continuously printed, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly 3.3 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Verify connection to existing piping. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-4-6 1 I Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than two ft of cover. C. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly. D. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 4 inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent maximum density. E. Install pipe on prepared bedding. F. Route pipe in straight line. G. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. H. Install shutoff valves at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with this Section 1. Install plastic ribbon tape continuous over top of pipe. Refer to Section 15075. J. Pipe Cover and Backfilling: 1. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density. 2. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill material and hand tamping in 6 inches compacted layers to 12 inches minimum cover over top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximurn density. 3. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill material. 4. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping. 3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. C. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space than necessary. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. 1. Install domestic water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9. J. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. K. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. L. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. N. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. 0. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. P. Install potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs. Q. Pipe relief from valves to nearest floor drain. R. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on cold water supply piping to lavatories sinks. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test domestic water piping system in accordance with applicable code and local authority having jurisdiction. I DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 5 - 6 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3.6 CLEANING A. Disinfect water distribution system, B. Verify pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder and tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain residual from 50 to 80 mg/L. D. Bleed water from outlets to obtain distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. When final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual concentration is equal to incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. END OF SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 6 - 6 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1-- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sanitary sewer piping buried beyond 5 feet of building. 2. Sanitary sewer piping buried within 5 feet of building. 3. Sanitary sewer piping above grade. 4. Floor drains. 5. Cleanouts. 6. Bedding and cover materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports, firestopping for placement by this section. 2. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section. 3. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation: Product and execution requirements for pipe insulation. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A 112.2 1.1 - Floor Drains. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 2. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 3. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 4. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 5. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 6. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 7. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl ' Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes for sewage- ejectors, and manholes. C. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information. 2. Sanitary Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and equipment. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SECTION 15150 - 1 of 4 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for piping and specialties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING. A. Sanitary Sewer Piping buried beyond 5 feet (1500 MM) of building: By site contractor. See civil engineering specifications 2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Sanitary Sewer piping, buried within 5 feet (1500 MM) of building: PVC schedule 40 pipe and fittings. 2.3 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729. Fittings: PVC. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld. 2.4 FLOOR DRAINS A. Manufacturers. 1. Zurn. 2. Josam. 3. J.R. Smith. B. Floor Drain: ASME Al 12.21.1; galvanized cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer. 2.5 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SECTION 15150 - 2 of4 I Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 2. Josam. 3. J.R. Smith. B. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover. C. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated cover wit gasket, D. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Galvanized cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round scored cover with gasket in service areas and round square depressed cover with gasket to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. E. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated cover with gasket, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 2.6 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Excavate in accordance with site work specifications B. Backfill in accordance with site work specification PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. 3.3 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Verify connection to existing piping system. B. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than two ft. of cover. C. Establish minimum separation of five from water piping in accordance with plumbing code. D. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly. E. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 4 inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent maximum density. F. Install pipe on prepared bedding. G. Route pipe in straight line. H. Install plastic ribbon tape continuous over top of. Refer to Section 15075. 1. Pipe Cover and Backfilling: 1. Backfill trench. 2. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density. 1 After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill material and hand tamping in 46 inches compacted layers to 12 inches minimum cover over top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximum density. 4. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill material. 5. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping. 3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SECTION 15150 - 3 of 4 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearances at cleanout for snaking drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. E. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. F. Install piping to maintain headroom. Do not spread piping, conserve space. G. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. 1. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Refer to Section 15080. J, Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. K. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. L. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors, M. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 15060. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test sanitary waste and vent piping system in accordance with applicable code, local authority having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SF,CTION 15150 - 4 of 4 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15190 - HANGERS & SUPPORTS: PIPING SYSTEMS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide all angles, brackets, clamps, anchors, inserts, rods, braces, frames, hangers, nuts and bolts, and other miscellaneous steel and hardware items as may be required for the proper support of equipment and all piping systems. 1.2 RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Contractor shall coordinate: shop drawings; placement; structural framing and overall building construction; and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progress of the work. Refer to other sections for special requirements relating to specific equipment and systems. W 1.3 MANUFACTURER A. Hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by Grinnell, Division Itt, F&S Manufacturing Corp.; Fee and Mason Manufacturing Co., or an approved equal. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 USE THE FOLLOWING (or approved equals thereof) if and as applicable to this project: A. Hangers: 1. Hangers in contact with copper piping: shall be copper plated or teflon coated. Grinnell Fig. 97 or 97c. 2. Hangers (other than in contact with copper piping): shall have manufacturer's standard finish. Pipe 3" and larger: Grinnell Fig. 260. Pipe 2-1/2" and smaller: Grinnell Fig. 104. B. Pipe Riser Clamps: Grinnell Fig. 261. C. Insulation Shields: Grinnell Fig. 292 with Links. D. Rod: Sized with safety factor of five (5). Grinnell Fig. 140 or 146. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Refer To Section 15000 "Common Requirements For Mechanical Work." All inserts, fasteners, hangers and supports shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 PIPE A. Hangers shall be spaced to prevent sag and to permit proper drainage. All piping shall be run parallel with the lines of building, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. the hanger spacing and placement shall be such that after the covering (insulation and finish) is applied there will be not less than 1/2" clear space between finished covering and other surfaces, including the finished covering of parallel adjacent pipes. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to encompass the insulating, fmish and metal insulation shield (a metal insulation shield shall be provided for each hanger and support). Vertical piping shall be supported with pipe riser clamps at every floor penetration, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. END OF SECTION 15190 I HANGERS & SUPPORTS: PIPING SYSTEMS 15190-1-1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15200 - PLUMBING PART i - GENERAL 1.1 Refer to Section 15000 Entitled "Common Requirements For Mechanical Work". 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of plumbing is indicated on the drawings and specifications. B. In general, the work consists of, but is not limited to the following: 1. Hot and cold water supply piping, and all necessary valves, fittings, etc. 2. A system of waste and vent piping. 3. Plumbing fixtures and trim. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Refer to Individual Technical Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 The plumbing materials, fixtures and installation shall comply with all requirements of the latest edition of the Florida Building Code - Plumbing 2004 with 2007. END OF SECTION 15200 PLUMBING 15200-1-1 I Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15201 - PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM & SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Refer to section 15000 "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.2 ENERGY CONSERVATION REQUIREMENTS: A. Hand washing facilities which are provided by others shall have the following feature: outlet devices which limit the flow of water to a maximum of 0.5 GPM. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM: A. Provide all brackets, plates, anchors and fastening devices necessary for rigidly mounting fixtures in place. Unless noted otherwise, each wall hung plumbing fixture shall be supported on appropriate type of chair carriers. B. Use chrome-plated brass piping where exposed to view between fixture and finished wall face and jacketed where fixture is designated for handicapped use. Provide tight fitting escutcheons of chrome plated brass wherever piping passes through walls. Supply piping to all fixtures shall be anchored to prevent movement. C. Approved manufacturers: 1. All plumbing fixtures by shall be as directed by the owner/architect and installed by the plumbing contractor. 2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM: A. General: 1. Acid resisting enamel for enameled cast iron and stainless steel fixtures. 2. Cast brass p-trap with cleanout for each lavatory and sink unless otherwise indicated. 3. Renewable seats and disks for supply valves. 4. Stops for fixture hot and cold water supplies. 2.3 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES: A. Cleanouts: 1. Interior wall type: cast iron cleanout tee with countersunk plug and square, smooth nickel bronze access cover and frame. 2. Plugs: cast iron ferrule with screw plug. 3. Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade, or Mifab approved equal. Refer to schedule on drawings. B. Traps: 1. Exposed and/or in cabinets: chrome plated cast brass with cleanouts. C. Water hammer arresters: 1. Shall be in accord with plumbing and drainage institute standard. 2. Josam as shown on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: A. Protect chrome-plated items from damage by wrenches and other hazards. B. Install fixtures having flush valves so that supplies to valves for all identical fixtures in each room are at same height for that fixture type. Seat valve in place so that valve discharge centerline is directly above fixture spud centerline; do not connect by bending nipple between valve spud. PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM & SPECIALTIES 15201-1-2 Corner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement C. Install cold water on right (facing applicable fixtures). D. Verify, coordinate, adjust, align and secure rough-in piping to provide neat appearances and serviceable operation. Correlate with fixture manufacturer's data and recommendations and with required dimensions. 3.2 CLEANOUTS: A. Install at or near foot of each soil or waste stack and at each change in direction of building drain greater than 45 degrees. B. Shall be accessible; install flush with finished wall, floor or finished grade. 3.3 TRAPS: A. Trap each fixture (except those with integral traps) with water sealed trap located as close as possible to fixture and never greater than 24" from fixture. 3.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS: Size And Locate In Accord With PD1 Standard PDI-WH-201. END OF SECTION 15201 PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM & SPECIALTIES 15201 - 2 - 2 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15400 - INSULATION, THERMAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide plant, labor, and materials to insulate equipment, piping and miscellaneous items in the piping and duct systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 1.2 RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Refer to Section Entitled "Common Requirements For Mechanical Work". No insulation adhesives, materials or finishes shall be applied until the item to be insulated has been completely installed and tested and proved tight. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer To Section 15000 "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Insulation materials shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: B. Type I-4: preformed glass fiber pipe insulation. Johns-Manville flame safe with Vapor Barrier Jacket (VBC). PART 3 - EXECUTIONS 3.1 DOMESTIC COLD AND HOT WATER PIPING A. Insulate all pipes with one (1) inch thick, three and one-half (3-1/2) pound density fiberglass insulation (i-4) at starbuck area. Insulate fittings, valves and similar items; insulate completely. 3.2 SANITARY DRAIN AND STACKS A. Insulate back of floor drains receiving discharge from cold drain piping with 1-1/2 inch thick flexible insulation (i-5) with vapor barrier. Adhere insulation to floor drain. Insulate piping from floor drain, "p" traps horizontal run and vertical stack whether exposed or concealed inside the building. Provide a vapor barrier using Foster's 30-36 for all joints and laps. 3.3 INSULATION FIT A. Where insulation is applied to pipe or equipment, it shall be installed with all joints fitted to eliminate voids. Voids shall not be filled with joint sealant, but shall be eliminated by refitting or replacing insulation. END OF SECTION 15400 I INSULATION, THERMAL 15400-1-1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Water closets 2. Lavatories 3. Urinals B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping: Supply connections to plumbing fixtures. 2. Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: Waste connections to plumbing fixtures. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI Al 17.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. B. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. 1010 - Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A112.18.1 -Plumbing Fixture Fittings. 2. ASME AI 12.19.2M - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. 3. ASME Al 12.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use). 4. ASME A 112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation methods and procedures. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit fixture, trim, exploded view and replacement parts lists. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide products requiring electrical connections listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410-1-3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for plumbing fixtures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS A. Manufacturers: 1. Toto B. Bowl: ASME AI12.19.2M; floor mounted, siphon jet 17 inch bowl height, ADA accessible vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch top spud, china bolt caps. C. Exposed Flush Valve: ASME A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle, escutcheon, seat bumper, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker; maximum 1.6 gallon flush volume. D. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts, with cover. 2.2 LAVATORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Toto B. Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin: ASME, A112.19.2M; vitreous china wall hung lavatory inch minimum, with 4 inch high back, drillings on 4 inch centers, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression. C. Supply Fitting: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated combination supply fitting with water economy, single lever handle. D. Accessories: 1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon. 2. Offset waste with perforated open strainer. 3. Screwdriver stops. 4. Rigid supplies. 5. Trap and waste insulated and offset to meet ADA compliance. E. Wall Mounted Carrier: ASME A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, [threaded studs for fixture hanger,] [concealed arm supports,] bearing plate and studs. 2.3 URINALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Toto 2.4 LAVATORY INSULATION HIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Truebro. B. Product Description: Where Lavatories are noted to be insulated for ADA compliance, furnish the following: Safety Covers conforming to ANSI A177.1 and consisting of insulation kit of molded closed cell vinyl construction, 3/16 inch thick, white color, for insulating tailpiece, P- trap, valves, and supply piping. Furnish with weep hole and angle valve access covers. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 2 - 3 1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify electric power is available .and of correct characteristics. C. Confirm millwork is constructed with adequate provision for installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with scrcwdrivcr stops, rcduccrs, and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant color to match fixture. F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. G. For ADA accessible water closets, install flush valve with handle to wide side of stall. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop-drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough in and installation. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Do not permit use of fixtures before final acceptance. END OF SECTION 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 3 - 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 SECTION 15800 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ductwork. Ductwork accessories. Air Outlets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement A. Duct: 1. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G90 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90/A90M. 2. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. 3. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. S. Ductwork Fabrication: 1. Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and as indicated on Drawings. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. 2. Fabricate and support round ducts with longitudinal seams in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible (Round Duct Construction Standards), and as indicated on Drawings. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. 3. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. 4. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. 5, Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. 6. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree lateral wye takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections. 2.2 DUCT ACCESSORIES A. Volume Control Dampers: 1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated on Drawings. 2. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 12 x 30 inch. 3. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 4. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, furnish end bearings. 5. Furnish locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where width exceeds 30 inches, furnish regulator at both ends. HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800 - 1 of 2 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Turning Devices and Extractors: I. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum construction, with push-pull operator strap. C. Flexible Duct Connections: 1. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, approximately 3 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip. 2.3 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus. 2. Metal-Aire 3. Price 4. Substitutions: Permitted B. Registers/Grilles: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, one-way two-way deflection, damper; with factory clear lacquer prime coat finish. C. Louvers: 4 inches deep with blades on 45 degree slope, channel frame, birds-screen with 1/2 inch square mesh for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake. 1. Material: 16 gage thick galvanized steel. 12 gage thick extruded aluminum. 2. Finish: Factory prime coat baked enamel anodized fluoropolymer spray finish color as selected. 3. Installation: Interior Exterior flat flange angle flange Screw holes in jambs Masonry strap anchors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions. B. Verify ducts and equipment installation is ready for accessories. C. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Metal Ducts: Install in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. B. Install flexible connections immediately adjacent to fans and motorized equipment. Install flexible connections specified between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Prevent flexible connectors being in tension while running. C. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers and grilles and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of diffuser, or grille and register assembly. D. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. E. Do not operate fans until bearings are lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. END OF SECTION 15800 HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 1.5800 - 2 of 2 I Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15830 - FANS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Centrifugal Square In-Line Fans B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Execution and product requirements for connecting equipment specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association: 1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. 2, AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. 3. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating. 4. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. 5. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. 2. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 705 - Power Ventilators. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate size and configuration of fan assembly, mountings, weights, ductwork and accessory connections. B. Product Data: Submit data on each type of fan and include accessories, fan curves with specified operating point plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit fan manufacturers' instructions. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. D. Balance Quality: Conform to AMCA 204. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. FANS SECTION 15830 - 1 of 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish one year manufacturer's warranty for fans. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of fans, and controls checkout and adjustments. Repair or replace parts in accordance with manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment. B. Perform work without removing fans from service during building normal occupied hours. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL SQUARE INLINE FANS A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck Corp 2. Loren Cook Company 3, PennBarry B. Product Description: V-belt drive with galvanized steel housing, integral inlet cone, removable access doors on 3 sides, inlet and outlet duct collar, gravity back draft damper in discharge, horizontal hanging brackets. C. Fan Wheel: Backward inclined centrifugal type, aluminum construction. D. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid- position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings. E. Motor and Drive Mounting: Out of air stream. F. Motor: Open drip proof. G. Bearings: ABMA 9 life at 200,000 hours. H. Accessories: 1. Belt guard. 2. Motor cover. 3. Flexible duct connector. 4. Inlet Outlet ductwork companion flange. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as shown on shop drawings. FANS SECTION 15830 - 2 of 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroorn Replacement 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Secure roof fans, wall fans and gravity ventilators with stainless steel lag screws to roof curb or structure B. Provide back draft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling fans and as indicated on Drawings. C. Install safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. D. Install back draft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated on Drawings. E. Provide sheaves required for final air balance. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate fan operation and maintenance procedures. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not operate fans for until ductwork is clean, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. END OF SECTION 15830 FANS SECTION 15830 - 3 of 3 I Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Testing adjusting and balancing of air systems. 2. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Associated Air Balance Council: 1. AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems. C. Natural Environmental Balancing Bureau: 1. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument. B. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 National Standards for Total System Balance forms. C . Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. D. Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty E. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. F. Furnish reports in hard cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with table of contents page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations balancing valves .and rough setting. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing report inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AABC MN-1 National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Prior to commencing Work, calibrate each recalibrate each instrument to assure reliability. instrument to be used. Upon completing Work, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15950 - I of 4 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC Certified by NEBB. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verify the following: 1. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition. 2. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 3. Duct systems are clean of debris. 4. Fans are rotating correctly. 5. Air outlets are installed and connected. 6, Duct system leakage is minimized. 2.2 PREPARATION A. Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. B. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. 2.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 2.4 ADJUSTING A. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted, verify correcting adjustments have been made. D. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system balance. E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. F. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by Owner. G. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report. 2.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities [at site altitude]. B. Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15950 - 2 of 4 I Griner Engineering 11,09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume dampers located in ducts. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. 2.6 SCHEDULES A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: 1. Fans. 2. Air Inlets and Outlets. B. Report Forms 1. Title Page: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency C. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor i, Project altitude J. Report date 2. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system c. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report f Test conditions 3. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer C. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date 4. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer b. Model/Frame C. HP/BHP and kW d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load C. RPM f. Service factor g. Starter size, rating, heater elements h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 5. V-Belt Drive: a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM C. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15950 - 3 of 4 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM f Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual 6. Exhaust Fan Data: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Air flow, specified and actual f Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual g. Inlet pressure h. Discharge pressure i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore j. Number of Belts/Make/Size k. Fan RPM 7. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch b. Duct size c. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f Test velocity g. Test air flow h. Duct static pressure i. Air temperature j. Air correction factor S. Air Distrib ution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location c. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design velocity g. Design air flow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air flow j. Percent of design air flow END OF SECTION 115950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTTON 15950 - 4 of 4 I Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes grounding electrodes and conductors; bonding methods and materials; conduit and equipment supports, anchors and fasteners; and nameplates and wire markers. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Grounding systems use metal underground pipe metal frame of building and driven ground rod as grounding electrodes. Grounding system connections use mechanical fasteners for building frame and exothermic welds for ground rods. B. Select materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners, and supports to carry loads of equipment and raceway, including weight of wire and cable in raceway. Anchor and fasten electrical products to building elements and finishes as follows: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Expansion anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Beam clamps, spring steel clips and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Self drilling anchors 1/4"minimum and expansion anchors3/8"minimum or as required by manufacturer. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Toggle bolts %" minimum. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Sheet metal screws #10 minimum. 7. Wood Elements: Wood screws #10 minimum. C. Identify Electrical components as follows: 1. Nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Wire marker for each conductor at panelboards, gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes. Label each outlet and junction box with circuits contained within. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data for grounding electrodes and connections; for fastening components; and nameplates, labels, and markers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODES A. Manufacturers: 1. Erico 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: Copper or copper-clad steel, 1/2 inch diameter rod electrode, 10 feet in length.. 2.2 NAMEPLATES A. Product Description: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic nameplate, black letters on white background. B. Letter Size: 1. 1/8" letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/4" inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 2.3 WIRE MARKERS A. Product Description: Cloth tape type wire markers with circuit or control wire number permanently stamped or printed. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16050 - Page 1 of 2 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. B. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel, members. C. Install sheet metal. channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and. pan.elboards recessed in hollow partitions. D. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets. END OF SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16050 - Page 2 of 2 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rod electrodes. 2. Wire. 3. Mechanical connectors. 4. Exothermic connections. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 2. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment: B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes: 1. Metal underground water pipe. 2. Metal building frame. 3. Concrete-encased electrode. 4. Rod electrode. B. Construct and test grounding systems for access flooring systems on conductive floors accordance with IEEE 1100. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum. 1.5 SUBMITTALS , A. Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections. B. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC, IEEE 142, and UL labeled. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. I GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-1 of 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park R.estroom Replacement B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1..9 PRE-.INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene m.i.nimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original, factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging. C. Do not deliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and multiple- use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior concrete placement. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODES A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards. B. Product Description: 1. Material Copper. 2. Diameter: 3/4 inch. 3. Length: 10 feet. C. Connector: exothermic welded connection. 2.2 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Foundation Electrodes: #6 AWG. C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Copper conductor insulated. D. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor insulated. 2.3 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards. B. Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation. 2.4 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cadweld, Erico, Inc. Model. B. Product Description: Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools for preparing and making permanent field connections between grounding system components. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify of existing conditions before starting work. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-2. of 3 1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove paint, rust, mill oils, surface contaminants at connection points. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with IEEE 142, 1100. B. Install rod electrodes at locations as indicated on Drawings Install additional rod electrodes to achieve specified resistance to ground. C. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view. D. Install grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing electrically bond steel together. E. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground. F. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Install separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. G. Instal] continuous grounding using underground cold water system and building steel as grounding electrode. Where water piping is not available, install artificial station ground by means of driven rods or buried electrodes. H. Permanently ground entire light and power system in accordance with NEC, including service equipment, distribution panel, switches, motor frames, grounding type receptacles, and other exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. I. Accomplish grounding of electrical system by using insulated grounding conductor installed with feeders and branch circuit conductors in conduits. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC. Install from grounding bus of serving panel to ground bus of served panel, grounding screw of receptacles, lighting fixture housing, light switch outlet boxes or metal. enclosures of service equipment. Ground conduits by means of grounding bushings on terminations at panel.boards with installed conductor to grounding bus. J. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Grounding and Bonding: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13. C. Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142. D. Perform leakage current tests in accordance with NFPA 99. E. Perform continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142. F. When improper grounding is found on receptacles, check receptacles in entire project and correct. Perform retest. END OF SECTION 16060 I GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-3 of 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 16070 - ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit supports. 2. Formed steel channel. 3. Spring steel clips. 4. Sleeves. 5. Mechanical sleeve seals. 6. Firestopping relating to electrical work, 7. Firestopping accessories. 8. Equipment bases and supports. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM El 19 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. B. FM Global: 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. ' D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping Through-Penetration Protection System: Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119 ASTM E814 UL 263 UL 1479 to achieve fire ratings. as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating. 1. Ratings may be 3-hours for firestopping in through-penetrations of 4-hour fire rated assemblies unless otherwise required by applicable codes. B. Surface Burning: ASTM E84 UL 723 with maximum flame spread / smoke developed rating of 25/450. C. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components. I ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16070-1 of 6 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1..5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fi.restopping: Conform to Florida Building Code FM UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Firestoppin.g: Provide certifi cate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers, B. Product Data: I . Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 2, Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. C. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and. required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly. D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze hangers and hangers and supports. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL designs, submit judgments by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0,10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on. Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. 1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour, 2. Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. a. Floor Penetrations within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required. B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion. 1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories. 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction, for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories, C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed. D. Fire Resistant Joints between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly. E. Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. F. Perform Work in accordance with State of Florida standard, 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years experience ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16070-2 of 6 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature. before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of lirestopping materials. C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: I. Electroline Manufacturing Company. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads 1/." minimum. C. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel. D. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten. E. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits. 2.2 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: 1. Unistrut Corp. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: stainless steel 302 12 gages thick. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center. 2.3 SLEEVES A. Furnish materials in accordance with Pinellas County standards. B. Sleeves for through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: PVC coated Steel pipe. D. Sleeves for Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. E. Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. ' 2.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Manufacturers: 1. Specified Technology, Inc 2. Substitutions: Permitted. I ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16070-3 of 6 Griner Engineering 11..09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and, performance requirements; provide only one type for each. similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeri.c 1~ixestopping: Single conmponent silicone elastotn.eri.c compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with, incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral ceramic fiber stuffing insulation with. silicone el.astomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows. C. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.5 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1.. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral. fiber matting 3. Sheet metal. 4. Alumina silicate fire board. C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. D. General: 1. Furnish. UL listed. products or products tested by independent testing laboratory. 2. Select products with. rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. E. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular mechanical. type seal. consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A, Verify of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other platter affecting bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond. C. Install backing damming materials to arrest liquid -material leakage. ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16070-4 of 6 I Griner Engineering 11.09 3.3 Do not drill or cut structural members. INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement A. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Anchors and fasteners shall be stainless steel 2. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide pre-cast inserts, expansion anchors, and preset inserts. 3. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps, spring steel clips; and welded fasteners. 4. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts. 6. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset inserts. 7. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws. 8. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws. B. Inserts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. 2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through- bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above recessed into and grouted flush with slab. C. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC. D. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. E. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers. F. Supports: 1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts. 2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. 4. Support vertical conduit at every floor. 3.4 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping. B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating, to uniform density and texture. D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size E. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required F. Remove darn material after firestoppi.ng material has cured. G. Fire Rated Surface: I . Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch. on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. C. Pack void with backing material. 1 ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16070-5 of 6 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park. Restroom Replacement d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated. 2. Where cable tray, bus, conduit, wireway, trough, and penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping product in accordance with man.ufacturer's instructions. II. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through. non-fire rated wall., partition floor, ceiling, and roof opening] as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of I inch on both. sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. C. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install escutcheons where conduit, penetrates non-lire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling. 3. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical seal to size of conduit and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations at clean rooms, laboratories, hospital spaces] computer rooms, telecommunication rooms data room and. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit. 3.5 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. B. Construct supports of steel members, or formed stainless steel channel.. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. 3.6 INSTALLATION-SLEEVES A.. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links. B. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam. C. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. E. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. F. Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with stuffing, fire stopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal. collar or escutcheon. covers at both sides of penetration. G. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION 16070 ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16070-6 of 6 Griner Engineering 1. 1.09 SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Labels. 3. Wire markers. 4. Conduit markers. 5. Stencils. 6. Underground Warning Tape: 7. Lockout Devices. Mandalay Park Restroom Resplacement 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog literature for each product required. 2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag numbers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Florida standard. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. ' C. Protect insulation from weather and. construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install labels and nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish two containers of spray-on adhesive. B. Furnish two blank nameplates for panels. I ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-1 OF 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Mandalay Park Restroom Resplacement r 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Thomas and Betts. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white contrasting background color. C. Letter Size: 1. 1/8 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/4" inch high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. D. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch. 2.2 LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Thomas and Betts. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. 2.3 WIRE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: I. Thomas and Betts. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Description: Cloth tape type wire markers. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on shop drawings. 2.4 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS A. Manufacturers: I. Thomas and Betts 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards. C. Description: Labels fastened with adhesive. D. Color: 1. 240 Volt System: Black lettering on white background, E. Legend: 1. 240 Volt System: 240 VOLTS. 2.5 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady. 2. Substitutions: Permitted.. B. Description.: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. 2.6 LOCKOUT DEVICES A. Lockout hasps: 1. Manufacturers: a. Square D b. Substitutions: Permitted. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-2 OF 3 1 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Resplacement 2. Anodized aluminum hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. ' B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for stencil painting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting. B. Nameplate Installation: I . Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 3. Install nameplates for each. control panel and mayor control components located. outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. ' 4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets. 5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboards in finished locations. 6. Install nameplates for the following: a. Switchboards, b. Panelboards. C. Service Disconnects. C. Label Installation: 1. Install label parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations. 3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. D. Wire Marker Installation: I. Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboards, gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes and each load connection. 2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run. 3. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation. E. Conduit and Raceway Marker Installation: I. Install conduit and raceway :marker for each conduit or raceway longer than 6 feet. 2. Conduit, Raceway Marker Spacing: 10 feet on center. 3. Raceway Painting: Identify conduit using field painting a. Paint colored band on each conduit longer than 6 feet. b. Paint bands 10 feet on center. C. Color: 1) 240 Volt System: Yellow F. Stencil Installation: 1. Apply stencil painting. G. Underground Warning Tape Installation: I . Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable. END OF SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-3 OF 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 I SECTION 16100 - WIRING METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement -? 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes building wire and cable, conduit and tubing, surface raceway, boxes, wiring devices, wiring connectors, and connections. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Wiring Products: 1. Solid conductor for feeders and. branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Stranded conductors for control circuits. 3. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 4. Conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. 5. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet B. Wiring Methods: 1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Building wire, Type THIIN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway 3. Above Accessible Ceilings: Building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway 4. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 5. Exterior Locations: Building wire, Type XHHW insulation, in raceway. 6. Underground Locations: Building wire, Type XHHW insulation, in raceway C. Conductor shall be copper. D. Raceway and boxes are located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations where required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. E. Raceway Products: 1. Underground More than 5 Feet outside Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit. Use composite nonmetallic handhole. 2. 'Underground within 5 Feet outside Foundation Wall: Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit. Use cast metal boxes. 3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit. Use cast metal boxes. 4. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use PVC coated rigid steel. Use cast metal outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 5. In Slab above Grade: Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit Use cast boxes. 6. Wet and Damp Locations: Use PVC coated rigid. Use cast metal, junction, and pull boxes. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. 7. Concealed Dry Locations: Use rigid steel conduit,. Use sheet-metal boxes. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Use hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. 8. Exposed Dry Locations: Use rigid steel. Use sheet-metal boxes. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Use hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. F. Minimum Raceway Size: V inch unless otherwise specified. 1..3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information for each wiring device. WIRING METHODS 16100-1 of 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 PART 2 PRODUCTS Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 2.1 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Walker. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description. Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway, with manufacturer's standard enamel finish. Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories; match finish on raceway. 2.2 WIREWAY A. Manufacturers: I. Walker. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: General purpose Rain tight type wireway with hinged screw cover and manufacturer's stainless steel finish. 2.3 RECEPTACLES A. Duplex Convenience Receptacle: L Leviton Model. 5341-2W 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. B. GFCI Receptacle: 1. Leviton Model. 8898-W 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. C. Color: Ivory. 2.4 WALL PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. B. Medium Cover Plate. Smooth stainless steel. C. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal in use style plate with hinged threaded and gasketed device cover. 2.5 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Manufacturers: L Leviton 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Wircmold 5. Substitutions: Not Permitted. B. Multi-outlet Assembly: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, with pre-wired receptacles, suitable for use as multi-outlet assembly. Furnish manufacturer's standard enamel finish. C. Receptacles: NEMA WD 6, type 5-15R, single receptacle. D. Receptacle Spacing: 12 inches on center. WIRING METHODS 16100-2 of 3 Y? Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroorn Replacement E. Fittings: Furnish manufacturer's standard couplings, elbows, outlet and device boxes, and connectors, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Route raceway and cable to meet Project conditions. B. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. C. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough-in when required to accommodate intended purpose. D. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install boxes with minimum 24 inches separation. END OF SECTION 16100 WIRING METHODS 16100-3 of 3 r Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes building wire and cable; nonmetallic-sheathed cable; direct burial cable; service entrance cable; armored cable; metal clad cable; and wiring connectors and connections. 1.2 REFERENCES A. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Product Requirements- Provide products as follows: 1. Solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Stranded conductors for control circuits. 3. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 4. Conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. ' 5. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet. B. Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods: 1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN ' insulation, in raceway. 2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 3. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 4. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN in raceway. 5. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire XHHW in raceway. 6. Underground. Locations: Use only building wire, Type XHHW in raceway. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conductor shall be copper. B. Aluminum conductors shall not be installed. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for building wire. ' 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. ' 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1 ' BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123-1 o£3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement r 1.9 COORDINATION A, Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine routing and lengths required. B. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. Essex Group Inc. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B, Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor: Copper. D. Insulation.: 600 volt rating; material rated 90 degrees C. 2.2 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Split Bolt Connectors: 1.. Erico. 2. Substitutions Permitted. B. Solderless Pressure Connectors: 1. Ilseo PTA style. 2. Substitutions Permitted. C. Spring Wire Connectors: 1. Ideal. 2. Substitutions: Permitted, D. Compression Connectors: 1. Burndy. 2. Substitutions Permitted PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported. 3.2 PREPARATION A, Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions. B. Neatly train and. lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. C. Identify and color code wire and cables. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. D. Special Techniques--Building Wire in Raceway: I . Pull conductors into raceway at same time. 2. Install building wire 4 AWG and larger with pulling equipment. E. Special Techniques - Cable: 1. Protect exposed cable from damage. 2. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123-2 of 3 1 r Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. F. Special Techniques - Wiring Connections: 1. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. 2. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 3. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. 4. Install split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. 5. Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. 6. Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. 7. Install suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting copper conductors to mechanical lugs where required. G. Install solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. H. Install stranded conductors for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. Ilowever, when stranded conductors are used in lieu of solid, and then install crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under screws. 3.4 WIRE COLOR A. General 1. For wire sizes 10 AWG and smaller, install wire colors in accordance with the following: a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. 2. For wire sizes 8 AWG and larger, identify wire with colored tape at terminals, splices and boxes. Colors are as follows: a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. B. Neutral Conductors: White. When two or more neutrals are located in one conduit, individually identify each with proper circuit number. C. Branch Circuit Conductors: Install three or four wire home runs with each phase uniquely color coded. D. Feeder Circuit Conductors: Uniquely color code each phase. E. Ground Conductors: 1. For 6 AWG and smaller: Green. 2. For 4 AWG and larger: Identify with green tape at both ends and visible points including junction boxes. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. END OF SECTION 16123 1 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123-3 of 3 Griner Engineering 1. 1,09 SECTION 16130 - RACEWAY AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes. 1.2 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ' A. Raceway: 1. Basis of Measurement: By linear foot. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes materials, delivery, handling, and installing. ' B. Boxes: I. Basis of Measurement: By cubic foot. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes materials, delivery, handling, and installing. ' 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: L ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC). B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: ' 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. ' 3. NEMA OS I - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 4. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 1 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. B. Underground More than 5 feet outside Foundation Wall: Provide plastic coated rigid conduit. Provide composite nonmetallic handholes with PVC junction boxes within the handhole. C. Underground With in 5 feet from Foundation Wall: Provide plastic coated rigid conduit. Provide cast metal boxes. ' D. In or Under Slab on Grade: Provide plastic coated rigid conduit. Provide cast iron boxes. Provide plastic coated rigid conduit at all slab penetrations. E. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide plastic coated rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal ' outlet, pull, and junction boxes. F. In Slab above Grade: Provide plastic coated rigid steel conduit. Provide cast iron boxes. G. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit, Provide cast metal outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. H. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. ' I. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid conduit. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. RACEWAY AND BOXES 16130-1 of 6 Griner Engineering 11.09 1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/a". Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for the following: 1. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit. 3. Raceway fittings. 4. Conduit bodies. 5. Surface raceway. 6. Wireway. 7. Pull and junction boxes. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, }protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: 1.. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 1 inch trade size 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 16150. B. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon. Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; all steel fittings. 2.2 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. RACEWAY AND BOXES 16130-2 of 6 Griner Engineering 11.09 ' B. C. Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. Product Description: NEMA RN l.; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating 40 mil thick. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit. 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: L Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: Interlocked steel constriction. C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.4 LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.5 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical .Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted B. Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway. C. Size 12x12 inch D. Finish: Gray enamel E. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories; match finish on raceway. 2.6 WIREWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. RACEWAY AND BOXES 16130-3 of 6 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement r 6. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: Rain. tight type wireway. C. Knockouts None. D. Size: 12 x 1.2 inch; length as indicated. on Drawings. E. Cover: Hinged cover with full gaskets. F. Connector: Slip-in Flanged. G. Fittings: Lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws drip shield. 1:1. Finish: Stainless Steel. 2.7 OUTLET BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products, 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported.; furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. C. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: N.EMA OS 2. D. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer Fumish threaded hubs. E. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140. F. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover. 2.8 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical. Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. C. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16131. D. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4 4X 6; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction. box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron Cast aluminum. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 16060. B. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 16070, C. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 16075. RACEWAY AND BOXES . 16130-4 of 6 l Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement ' D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. 3.3 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY ' A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system. B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. ' C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified ' in Section 16070; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways. E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports ' F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 16070. H. Route all raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls. 1. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. ' J. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. K. Maximum size conduit in slab above grade: 3/4 inch. Do not cross conduits in slab L. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes. ' M. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends. ' O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. P. Install conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. ' Q. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate, factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. 1 R. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. S. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses, control and expansion joints. ' T. Install suitable pull. string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples. Label each end of pull string with designation of opposite end U. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. V. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to ' surfaces; mount plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. W. Close ends and unused openings in wireway. 3.4 INSTALLATION - BOXES A. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on ' Drawings. Or as specified in section for outlet device. B. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose. C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140. D. Install pull. boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. E. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel. or from removable recessed luminaire. ' F. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches ' separation. Install with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. RACEWAY AND BOXES 16130-5 of 6 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement ' fl. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. 1. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. J. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall. insulation or reducing its effectiveness. K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. M. Support boxes independently of conduit. N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. 0. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. 3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on. Drawings reflected ceiling plan. D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION 16130 RACEWAY AND BOXES 16130-6 of 6 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement ' SECTION 16131- CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes hinged cover enclosures, cabinets, terminal blocks, and accessories. ' 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard data for enclosures, cabinets, and terminal blocks. ' B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with ' minimum three years experience. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS ' A. Furnish two of each key. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Manufacturers: ' 1.. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Hoffmann Enclosures. 4. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 4x stainless steel enclosure. C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key or hasp and staple for padlock. ' D. Furnish interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with white enamel. E. Enclosure Finish: stainless steel. 2.2 CABINETS A. Manufacturers: ' 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Hoffmann Enclosures ' 4. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Boxes: Stainless steel. C. Box Size: 24 inches wide x 24 inches high x 6 inches deep. 1 1 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16131-1 of 2 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement D. Backboard: Furnish, 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte white. E. Fronts: Steel, surface type with concealed trim clamps, door with concealed binge, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel. F. Knockouts: none. G. Furnish. metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. H. Furnish accessory feet for free-standing equipment. 2.3 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices 3. Panduit. 4. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4. C. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts. D. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. E. Furnish ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure. F. Furnish suitable end caps for terminal block strips. G. Terminal blocks shall be finger touch safe. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each. corner in accordance with Section 16070. B. Install cabinet fronts plumb. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. C. Clean finishes and touch up damage. END OF SECTION 16131 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16131-2 of 2 1 Griner Engineering 11.04 SECTION 16150 - WIRING CONNECTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes electrical connections to equipment. B. Related Sections: 1.. Section 16123 - Building Wire and Cable. 2. Section 16130 - Raceway and Boxes. Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction. B. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment connections. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. B. Determine connection locations and requirements. C. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment. D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CORD AND PLUGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell. 2. Daniel Woodhead. 3. Arrow-Hart. 4. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1. C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet furnished for equipment. D. Cord. Construction: Type SO multi conductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. E. Size: Suitable for connected. load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized. ' WIRING CONNECTIONS 16150-1 of 2 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3.2 INSTALLATION , A. Make electrical connections. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid tight flexible conduit ' with. watertight connectors in. damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Install receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. '. E. Install cord and cap for field-supplied attachment plug. F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection. boxes. ' G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal. block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. , 1. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. J. Coolers and Freezers: Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls, floor, and ' ceilings. Install, connections to cooler and freezer solenoids, thermostats and time clocks. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Cooperate with utilization equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and , starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and configurations. END OF SECTION 16150 WIRING CONNECTIONS 16150-2 of 2 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 16210 - ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes arrangement with Utility Company for permanent electric service; payment of ' Utility Company charges for service; service provisions; and utility metering equipment. 1.2 REFERENCES ' 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Utility Company: Progress Energy ' B. System Characteristics: 120/240 volts, single phase, three- wire, 60 Hertz. C. Service Entrance: Underground D. Underground Service Provisions: Underground service entrance to building service entrance ' equipment. 1. Utility Raceway Connection: At Utility Company's pole-mounted transformer. 2. Utility Service-Entrance Conductor Connection: Utility Company's pole-mounted transformer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Utility-Company-prepared drawings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS ' A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings and Utility Company drawings. 1.7 COORDINATION ' A. Coordinate with utility company, relocation of overhead or underground lines interfering with construction. Where power lines are to be relocated, bill utility costs, directly to Owner. B. Contact utility company regarding charges related to service installation. Include utility charges in this contract. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 UTILITY METERS A. Furnished by Utility Company. 2.2 UTILITY METER BASE A. Manufacturers: 1. Milbank. 2. Substitutions: Utility company Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Meter base rated 200 amperes continuous duty. 2.3 TRANSFORMER PAD A. Product Description: cast-in-place concrete or Precast concrete transformer pad with cable pit sized as indicated on Drawings or as directed by the utility company. ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES 16210-1 of 2 Griner Engineering 11.,09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify service equipment is ready to be connected and energized. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install service entrance conduits to building service entrance equipment. Utility Company will connect service lateral conductors to service entrance conductors. Connect service lateral conductors to service entrance conductors. B. In-stall cast-i.n: place concrete pad for Utility Company transformer. END OF SECTION 16120 ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES 1621.0-2 of 2 Griner Engineering 11.09 SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes distribution and branch circuit panelboards, electronic grade branch circuit panelboards, and load centers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding. 2. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification 1.2 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. B, National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 4. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 5. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 6. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. 7. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. C. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards. 2. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 3. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. B. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements. B . Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PANELBOARDS 16442-1 of 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each panelboard key. Panelboards keyed alike to Owner's current keying system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D 2. Substitutions: Not Permitted. B. Product Description: NEMA PB 1, panelbooard. C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard; furnish insulated ground bus as indicated on Drawings. D. For non-linear load applications subject to harmonics furnish 200 percent rated, plated copper, solid neutral. E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: As indicated on Drawings. F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on plug-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers as indicated on Drawings. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. G. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical amperes, let- through current and energy level less than permitted for same size NEMA FU 1, Class RK-5 fuse. H. Enclosure: Stainless steel NEMA PB 1, Type 4X. 1. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards. J. Cabinet Front: Flush Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's stainless steel PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and load centers in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1. B. Install panelboards plumb. C. Install recessed panelboards and load centers flush with wall finishes. D. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard and load center; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. E. Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. F. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard and load center. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads. G. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 16075. H. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling and below floor in raised floor areas. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE. 1. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16060. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. PANELBOARDS 16442-2 of 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement B. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6. C. Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5. D. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance phase loads to within 10 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS 16442-3 of 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement SECTION 16510 -INTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C82.1. - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast. 2. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts-for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire. B. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data. C. Samples: Submit two color chips 3 x 3 inch in size illustrating luminaire finish color where indicated in luminaire schedule or as directed by the architect. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.5 MOCK-UP A. Provide luminaires in ceiling assembly. B. Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer. Or where indicated on Drawings. C. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work. D. Remove mockup when directed by Architect/Engineer. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each plastic lens type. B. Furnish one replacement lamps for each lamp installed. C. Furnish two of each ballast type. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES A. Product Description: Complete interior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as scheduled. B. Substitutions are not permitted. ' 2.2 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Magnetek Inc 2. Philips Electronic North America 3. Sylvania 4. Universal TNTF.RIOR LUMINAIRES 16510-1 of 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 1 5. Substitutions: Not Permitted. B. Product Description: Electronic ballast less than 20 percent THD High-power-factor type certified by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. to comply with ANSI C82.1, suitable for lanips specified, with voltage to match lumin.aire voltage. 2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. GE 2. Philips 3. Sylvania 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend lurninaire at indicated height. B. Support luminaires independent of ceiling framing. C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on Drawings. D. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface-mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure install auxiliary members spanning ceiling grid members to support surface mounted luminaires Fasten surface mounted luminaires to ceiling grid members using bolts, or suitable clips. F. Install. recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. G. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. H. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place. 1. Install wall-mounted luminaires at height as indicated on Drawings. J. Install accessories furnished with each lurninaire. K. Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16130 using flexible conduit as indicated on Drawings. L. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within. luminaire. M. Install specified lamps in each lumin.aire. N. Ground and bond interior luminaires in accordance with Section 16060. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated on Drawings. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. B. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. C. Clean finishes and touch up damage. INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 1.6510-2 of 3 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Relamp luminaires having failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16510 TNT.E.RIOR UWJNATRES ] 6.510-3 of 3 ' Griner Engineering 1. 1.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement ' SECTION 16530 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes emergency lighting units and exit signs. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Emergency lighting to comply with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with ' minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS ' A. Furnish one replacement lamps for each lamp installed. B. Furnish one replacement battery for each battery type and size. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. As noted on lighting fixture schedules 2. Substitutions: Not Permitted B. Product Description: Self-contained emergency lighting unit. C. Battery: 12 volt, nickel-cadmium, with 1.5 hour capacity. D. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours. E. Lamps: 12 watt minimum, sealed beam type in nickel or chrome plated steel housing. F. Indicators: Lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING. Self diagnostic function. G. TEST switch: Transfers unit from external power supply to integral battery supply. H. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection. I. Input Voltage: 120 volts. 2.2 EXIT SIGNS A. Manufacturers: 1. As noted on lighting fixture schedules 2. Substitutions: Not Permitted. B. Product Description: Exit sign fixture with integral battery power supply. C. Face: Translucent face with red letters on white background. D. Input Voltage: 120 volts. E. Directional Arrows: Universal type for field adjustment. F. Mounting: Universal, for field selection. G. Battery: 12 volt, nickel-cadmium type, with 1.5 hour capacity. EMERGENCY LIGHTING 16530-1 of 2 Griner Engineering 11.09 Mandalay Park Restroom Replacement Ii. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours. 1. Lamps: 'LED. J. Input Voltage: 120 volts. K. Accessories. Self Diagn.osfic Functions PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install suspended. exit signs using pendants supported from. swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend sign at indicated height. B. Install surface-mounted emergency lighting units and. exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. C. Install wall-mounted emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings. D. Install accessories furnished with each emergency lighting unit and exit sign. E. Connect emergency lighting units and exit signs to branch circuit as indicated on Drawings. F. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within unit. G. Install specified lamps in each, emergency lighting unit and exit sign.. II. Ground and bond emergency lighting units and exit signs in accordance with Section 16060. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each unit after installation and. connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust lamp fixtures as indicated on Drawings. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated on Drawings. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Relamp emergency lighting units and exit signs having failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16530 EMERGENCY LIGI-ITING 16530-2 of 2 REPORT OF THE GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION PROPOSED RESTROOM FACILITIES ' PIER 60 & MANDALAY PARK CLEARWATER BEACH, FLORIDA 1 Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated D R I G G E R S E N G I N E E R I N G S E R V I C E S I N C 0 R P D R A T E D Geotechnical Engineering & Construction Materials Testing City of Clearwater Parks and Recreation Department 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, Florida 33756 1 Attention: Mr. Leroy Chin, Project Manager ' RE: Report of the Geotechnical Investigation Proposed Restroom Facilities ' Pier 60 & Mandalay Park Clearwater Beach, Florida Purchase Order No. BR 505397 Our File: DES 096391 Dear Mr. Chin: June 18, 2009 Pursuant to your request and authorization, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC., has completed the geotechnical investigation for the subject projects. The following pages present the results of our studies along with foundation recommendations. FIELD INVESTIGATION To check subsurface soil and groundwater conditions within the proposed restroom areas, a single boring was conducted at each of the two (2) restroom structure/ ad.dition areas. One structure is actually and addition to the existing Pier 60 concession area and the second structure is a stand alone restroom facility of Mandalay Park. The Standard Penetration Test (SPT) method of sampling and testing was utilized. The SPT borings were advanced to a nominal depth of 25 feet below present grade. Please refer to Plate I-A (Pier 60) and I-I3 (Mandalay Park) of the report attachments for the approximate boring locations. Sarasota Clearwater Tampa Phone: 941.371.3949 12220 49th Street North • Clearwater, Florida 33762 Phone: 813.948.6027 Fax: 941.371.8962 Phone: 727.571.1313 • Fax: 727.572.4090 Fax: 813.948.7645 saroffice@driggers-eng.com clwoffice@driggers-eng.com tpaoffice@driggers-eng.com 2 The Standard Penetration method of sampling and testing was used to provide soil samples for classification by the project engineer. The method also provides Standard Penetration resistance data reflective of the strength and consistency of the soil types encountered. Due to the potential presence of utilities within the upper soils, the upper 6 feet of the SPT borings was sampled utilizing hand auger equipment. To provide relative density information within these upper soils, a hand cone sounding was conducted at each boring within the upper 6 feet. Also, since very loose soils were noted at the B-1 hand cone sounding, five (5) additional hand cones were performed within the general area of the boring to check whether the condition was isolated. The results of the borings and hand cone soundings are included in the report attachments. INDICATED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS SOIL CONDITIONS - Our exploratory borings identified similar conditions at both boring locations- In general, the borings penetrated gray and brown fine sands with variable shell content to the completion depth of the borings. However, boring B-2 did encounter a calcareous clayey, silty sand zone or weathered limestone near the termination depth of the boring at that location. Penetration resistance revealed predominantly a inedium dense relative density throughout the soil boring profile. However, the deeper calcareous material at B-2 was considered loose. Also, very loose soils were noted within the upper 4 to 6 feet within the vicinity of boring B-1 as identified by the hand cone soundings conducted within this area. Your attention is directed to the fact that underground utilities are noted within this area of very loose soils. GROUNDWATER CONDITIONS _ Groundwaterwas encountered during the course of our field investigation at a depth of 5.7 feet below grade at B-1 and 4.8 feet below grade at B-2. It should be recognized that groundwater levels will be affected by rainfall intensity. Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 3 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION DESIGN CONCEPT - It is our understanding that the proposed construction will be pile ' supported restroom facilities. We were informed that the addition to the Pier 60 concession area will also likely incorporate a structural slab as opposed to a slab supported on grade so as to match the floor system for the existing building. The proposed stand-alone restroom building in Mandalay Park may or may not incorporate a structural slab. We were further informed that the desired foundation type is a wood (timber) piling system. FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS - Both of the sites investigated revealed very similar subsurface conditions within the depth explored as it relates to pile foundation recommendations. Treated timber piling having a minimum tip diameter of 8 inches and a butt diameter of not less than 10 inches should be capable of developing an axial compressive resistance of 12 to 15 tons when penetrated to depths on the order of 20 to 25 feet below present grade, respectively. The timber piles should be capable of achieving an uplift or tension resistance of up to 3 tons when penetrated to the above depths. Dynamic pile driving fonnulae will be utilized to control pile penetration. However, a minimum penetration of 15 feet below grade is recommended. Based upon the above capacities, we would not anticipate the need for load testing provided the piling is driven to the proper resistance. Higher capacities could be achieved with greater penetration or larger pile section. In fact, a significant improvement in pile capacity would be expected when penetrating the piles into the underlying limestone formation which, based on borings conducted at nearby sites, is expected to occur about 30 to 35 feet below grade. However, investigating this alternative would necessitate deepening the borings conducted to date. The response of the piles to lateral loads will be dependent on the several factors including the pile fixity, center to center pile spacing, scour and combined loading conditions. We would be pleased to provide analyses of the pile response to lateral loads, if desired, once these conditions are better defined. Our investigation also noted the presence of manholes and underground piping within the footprint of the addition at the Pier 60 location. We are not aware of purpose of the underground conduits and manholes. However, it will be necessary to relocate, at a minimum, the manholes to permit future inspection and maintenance and, if possible, relocate the piping outside of the structure addition area. Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 4 SLAB-ON-GRADE -As discussed previously, we would anticipate that the restroom facility at the Mandalay Park location may incorporate a slab-on-grade. Based on the results of the boring in this area, new slabs may be supported on a compacted subgrade provided conventional subgrade preparation is incorporated. The subgrade and fill soils require densification to not less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density per ASTM D-1557. The fill soils should also consist of fine sands comprising the SP to SP-SM Unified Soil Classification System. Utility trenches and ruts should be re-leveled and uniformly compacted to avoid sharp discontinuities in bearing characteristics and slab thickness that could induce cracking. Also as mentioned previously, it is our understanding that the addition to the existing concession area at Pier 60 will likely incorporate a structurally supported slab to match the existing structure. However, if a slab-on=grade is incorporated, it will be important to densify the very loose materials identified within the upper 4 to 6 feet. This loosened zone may be the result of not sufficiently compacting the soils following installation of piping that is present in this area. ¦ Therefore, if the underground piping is to remain, following subgrade compaction activities, this area should be probed to check that sufficient compaction is obtained to support a slab-on-grade. ' Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated ' S DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. appreciates the opportunity to be of ' service to you on this project. Should you have any questions regarding this report, please do not hesitate to contact the undersigned at your earliest convenience. Respectfully submitted, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. 6/i ??dt S. Dri rs, P.E. FL Registration No. 58013 F. riggers, P.E. Presi t FL Registration No. 16989 WSD/wsd WSD-PEP1096391 Copies submitted: (2) City of Clearwater; Attn: Mr. Leroy Chin (1) Plisko Architecture, P.A.; Attn: Mr. Alex Plisko (1) McCarthy & Associates, Inc.; Attn: Mr. Michael McCarthy, P.E. Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated APPENDIX PLATE I-A - BORING LOCATION PLAN (PIER 60) PLATE I-B - BORING LOCATION PLAN (MANDALAY PARS STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOGS HAND CONE SOUNDING / HAND AUGER BORING LOGS METHOD OF TESTING Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated PLATE I-A - BORING LOCATION PLAN (PIER 60) Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated ? ? 7 55 SCALE: i" = 20' 24 i - _ • (,rr:u ie -.I "' ? B 1I' T 7.22 C .AMP 7.ie . II i 3 / K r Soon: l.. ' E _ s I I G3 . J .ej(WtOH.. 5 n i . ,7.? Rai 879 \ J 65E \\?\ c HC XIST,RG 6, JNCES90N n 12 l? j 1 H ??. a 1?.ug - I ` 91 ICI )If•JC, ? IGvr v e.01\ ? -6 j - XI h????, I E.65 ?'= b uuC G me ?? Un4n 6.6> 6.56 J Fro B 1 i 8 7 &5 iPt aSE P HC-11 -3 01 o --`:er, i Ql LTI?i 6.7 c- F 7 , ooC - ? X 25 i l: 6.66 .. YEVI ii , Sar 6 35 _Sdt.ab ?r?f: \ ? ` C I 579 / 6 l\a t fi]2 ? ? \ ? ` ?7 ni? ?-? o o? tu7p c 6.De - , \? s.< - E ' 1 ? (S. ' meal ` \ 1 PROPOSED 11 ? 1? "? 5.65 RESTROOM FACILITY \ 1 LEGEND: 5 5; \` 11 AL HAND CONE SOUNDING LOCATION 5.?9 « STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING/ HAND CONE SOUNDING LOCATION CAD / ENGINEER SHEET TITLE PROJECT NO. DATE R.D.B. / W.S.D. BORING LOCATION PLAN DES 096391 6/9/09 PREPARED BY PROJECT NAME CAD FILE NAME SHEET NO. PROPOSED RESTROOM FACILITIES N: \ACLTWIN\ DRIGGERS SERV ENGINEERING CLEARWATER BEACH FLORIDA PLATEI\096391Pi PLATE-A, ICES INCORPORATED : PLATE i-B - BORING LOCATION PLAN (MANDALAY PARK) Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated m InJ \\ h. t 5'rcp n J 5 ? th 3.62 tE rcp : ?.JC.. v 15 ic O / / p s .go 'rc0 sw Qja v t_ rco Asphalt F.phdt 1 \ 'r'6 a r. ' 1 ? p6 ? p ? ? ? v 9?ufr --- L ? ? YV B x c ?' / _ :: I ? AD ? +? . M ? _/ •.? --PROPOSED k = t RESTROOM FACILITY J}}? _* " R" / W I A J I I mo I II?? .. YI 1? I I ?? I / I T7 y > LEGEND: STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING/ HAND CONE SOUNDING LOCATION SCALE: 199 _ 20' CAD / ENGINEER SHEET TITLE PROJECT NO. DATE R.D.B. / W.S.D. BORING LOCATION PLAN DES 096391 6/9/09 PREPARED BY PROJECT NAME CAD FILE NAME SHEET NO. ® PROPOSED RESTROOM FACILITIES N:\ACLTWIN\ PLATE I-B DRIGGERS ENGINEERING CLEARWATER BEACH FLORIDA PLATEI\096391P2 INCORPORATED SERVICES, , 1 STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOGS Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES Project No. DES 096391 BORING NO. B-1 Project Proposed Restroom Facilities Clearwater Beach. Florida Location See Plate i Foreman M3. _ Completion Depth To Depth 26.5' Date 6/3/09 Water 57 Time Date 6/3/09 co z a STANDARD z O O w -' SOIL DESCRIPTION O z PENETRATION TEST ~ C g cn J W BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. n . O SAMPLER-140 LB m ¢ O . HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: tO 10 20 40 60 80 Light gray Fine SAND with shell (SP) Li ht ra and b F SAND th h ll S g g y rown ine wi s e ( P 1 - - Grayish-brown Fine SAND with shell (SP) - .d . V .. - t--- - - - 5 o. a b- Medium dense light brown to light grayish brown Fine SAND with shell (SP) 5/6/9 . -- - . . 8/9/10 10 0 0: 3/5/6 6/12/13 w:a Medium dense to dense li ht ra g g ?y Fine SAND 15 ith h ll w s e (SP) 6/7/8 7.7 ?:V. . 20 -'---- .Q 3/11/25 25 ' w? 10/8/3 30 - --- - - --- -- Remarks Borehole Grouted L - -- Casing Length 'i INCORRORAT ED I DRIGGERS U ENGINEERING CERVICES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 096391 BORING NO. B-2 - Project Proposed Restroom Facilities, Clearwater Beach, Florida Location See Plate I Foreman M B. Completion Depth To Depth 26 5' Date 6/3/09 Water 4 8' Time Date 6/3/09 E-- Z nW STANDARD ?` O W a SOIL DESCRIPTION . O 3. W PENETRATION TEST M W BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. Q O a SAMPLER-140 LB. En Cn m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: U 10 20 40 60 80 " _ ery ligMgrav Fine SAND_ (SP) Brown and gray Fine SAND (SP) Light brown Fine SAND with shell (SP) - - - u -- v- _ 5 1 77: V: a.17 a° Loose to medium dense light grayish-brown ? Fine SAND with shell (SP) 4l4/3 011 -- -- _ 3/10/12 10 v V C 5/9/7 - - - - Y _.v - I - ?o 4/6/11 - I - - 6 15 c 7 v: ` ? [ 10/7/5 it J ; -- 20 .; v cr. r 6/7/6 , J J Loose light gray calcarecus, silty, clayey Fine SAND with shell (SM-SC) , 25 (Weathered LIMESTONE) 21312 ? 30 Remarks Borehole Grouted -- Casing Length 1 I HAND CONE SOUNDING / HAND AUGER BORING LOGS 11 Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED' HAND AUGER BORINGMAND CONE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: CLIENT: - Proposed Restroorn Facilities City of Clearwater Parks & Recreation Department Clearwater Beach, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: Pro ect No.: DES 09639' 57 6/3/09 TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M. B. 6/3/09 6 01 LOCATION: . TEST NUMBER: See Plate I B_1 -i HAND CONE TIP ELEV. DESCRIPTION DEPTH RESISTANCE (TSF) (FT) (FT) g U) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 _ Light gray Fine SAND with shell (SP) d _ T Light gray and brown Fine SAND with shell (SPI - -- - Grayish-brown Fine SAND with shell Light brown Fine SAND with shell (SP) - Z 77`t7' : . 6 8 I -fig 12 r 1 Ll s?i DRIGGERS 7-7 ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORRORATED HAND AUGER BORINGMAND CONE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: CLIENT: Proposed Restroom Facilities City of Clearwater Parks & Recreation De artment Clearwater Beach, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: Project No. DES 096391 4 8' 6/3/09 TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M.B. 6/3/09 6.0' LOCATION: TEST NUMBER: See Plate I B-2 HAND CONE TIP ELEV. DEPTH m RESISTANCE (TSF) (FT) DESCRIPTION (FT) rn 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Ve li ht gr Fine SAND SP _a -Y _ ??_. --- 0 Brown and gray Fine SAND (SP) •, Light brown Fine SAND with shell (SP) _ V: V'. 4 v r . 7'.-7 V . J. 6 v J: 8 10 i I 12 14 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED i HAND AUGER BORING/STAND CONE SOUNDING LOG PRQJECT: CLIENT: Proposed Restroom Facilities City of Clearwater Parks & Recreation Department Clearwater Beach, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: Pro ect No.: DES 096391 TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M. B, LOCATION: 6/3/09 4.0' TEST NUMBER: See Plate I HC-1 -j HAND CONE TIP ELEV. DESCRIPTION DEPTH m RESISTANCE (TSF) (FT) (FT) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 - - - ----- ------- t i 4 --- - -- 6 8 i 12 14 L L 1 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCDRRDRATED HAND AUGER BORINGMA.ND CONE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: CLIENT: Proposed Restroom Facilities City of Clearwater Parks & Recreation De artment Clearwater Beach, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: Pro ect No. DES 096391 TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M B. 6/3/09 4.0' LOCATION: TEST NUMBER: See Plate I HC-2 -? HAND CONE TIP ELEV. DESCRIPTION DEPTH m RESISTANCE (TSF) (FT) (FT) `n 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 6 f 8 ... _....... 10 I 12 14 P DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES HAND AUGER BORING41AND CONE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: CLIENT: Proposed Restroom Facilities City of Clearwater Parks & Recreation, De artment Clearwater Beach, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: Pro ect No.: DES 096391 TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M B. 6/3/09 g p LOCATION: . TEST NUMBER: See Plate I HC-3 -? HAND CONE TIP ELEV. DESCRIPTION DEPTH m RESISTANCE (TSF) (FT) (FT) cn 0 10 20 30 40 s0 60 70 0 _......... . . 2 - - --- 6 - - I C 10 I 12 14 I ? _1 INCORPORATED' m 1 DRIGGERS 0 ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED HAND AUGER BORINGMAND CONE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: CLIENT: Proposed Restroom Facilities City of Clearwater Parks & Recreati i? Clearwater Beach, Florida WATER TABLE: 7 T Pro ect No. DES 096391 _ TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M.B. 6/3/09 6.0' LOCATION: TEST NUMBER: See Plate I HC-4 HAND CONE TIP ELEV. DEPTH mm RESISTANCE (TSF) (FT) DESCRIPTION (FT) 2 N 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 2 --- - - i -- s' i I 6 _- -- --- --- - - - l 8 10 12 I 14 m DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES HAND AUGER BORING/HAND CONE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: CLIENT: Proposed Restroom Facilities City of Clearwater Parks & Recreation De artment Clearwater Beach, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: Protect No: DES 096391 TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M. B LOCATION: 6/3/09 6.0' TEST NUMBER: See Plate I HC-5 HAND CONE TIP ELEV. DESCRIPTION DEPTH m RESISTANCE (TSF) (FT) (FT) N 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 i 2 - -- - - - ------------- 6 8 10 12 14 INCORPORATED' METHOD OF TESTING I Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated STANDARD PENETRATION IFEST AND SOIL CLASSIFICATION -SPLIT BARREL SAMPLER WATER TABLE I NE SAND MUCK 2 V f \. L i 'r"' A i T 4- +.N.. VALUE OR 6 BLOW COUNT XA 2 I STAINDARD PENETRATION "T'ES'T (AS'TM D-1586) In the Standard Penetration "Pest borings, a rotary drilling rig is used to advance the borehole to the desired test depth. A viscous drilling fluid is circulated through the drill rods and bit to stabilize the borehole and to assist in removal of soil and rock cuttings up and out of the borehole. Upon reaching the desired test depth, the 2 inch O.D- split-barrel sampler or "split-spoon", as it is sometimes called, is attached to an N- sire drill rod and lowered to the bottom of the borehole- A 140 pound hammer, attached to the drill string at the ground surface, is their used to drive the sampler into the formation. The hammer is successively raised and dropped for a distance of 30 inches using a rope and "cathead" assembly. The number of blows is recorded for each 6 inch interval of penetration or until virtual refusal is achieved. In the above manner, the samples are ideally advanced a total of 18 inches. The sum of the blows required to effect the final 12 inches of penetration is called the blowcount, penetration resistance of "N" value of the particular material at the sample depth. After penetration, he rods and sampler are retracted to the Irc?and surface where the core sample is removed, sealed in a glass jar and transported to the laboratory for verification of ficld classification and storage- BOLT, SYMBOLS AN-0 CLASSIFICATION Soil and rock samples secured in the field sampling operation were visually classified as to texture, color and consistency. Soil classifications are presented descriptively and symbolicaly for csse of interpretation. The stratum identification lines represent the "f'pr,,,, -ate bound , between -so;! Ypc.,- In nna ry as °li,.> -_,ms_..,.,, may be gradual. SILTY FINE SAND SHELBY TUBE Cliff SANDY -LAY E,onsix i:cv of tne soil as to relative density or undr fined shear ST R AT UM strength, unless otherwise noted, is based upon Standaru Penetration resistance values of "N" values and industry-accepted standards. "N" CHANGE values, or blowcounts, are presented in both tabular and graphical iorill on each respective boring log at each sample interval. The graphical CLAY plot of blowcount versus depth is for illustration purposes only and does not warrant continuity- in soil consistency- or linear variation betwce;; 'sample intervals. CLAYEY LIMESTONE The borings represent subsurface conditions at respective boring SANDY L I MESTON -° locations and sample intervals only. Variations ui subsurface co idition OR '? U ? 50%0.3 may occur between boring locations. Gioundwater depths shown represent water depths at the dates and time shown only. The absence L 1 MESTONE o DENOTES of water table information does not necessaril)' imply that, groundwater o 50 BLOWS 1-vas not encountered. ?? 3 _R_ 03 r'ENE l AT . C) f',! C r SECTION V BOND N M1311"R tiT,1TF OF FLORIDA C MINTY OF Pinellas C'ONTWA.C`I' 1100) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRE.SEN"I'S: "i It tt C ontraetar and SureTec Insurance Company iStiret}'} Avhttse hcn}ie itddress is 952 Echo Lane, Suite 5074600 Certus Builders, Inc. ;IN 450, Houston, TX 77024 11FRF.INAFTER CA1,LED THE "Surety" Eire held and firinl-1. bound into the Citi' of Clearwater. Florida, (hereinafter called the "Miler") in the penal Nona {it:- C 1e Hundred Fifty Thousand, One Hundred '_Vinetv-two and 25/100 - - Doflars(S150, 192.25 t !«r 11w payment of' which we mind <rurseI e5. out heir:;, eaccutrn-s. adtnirtiMrators, succcsvm. and assit.ns for the faithful performance ofa certain written contract, dated the 20th (IX, Of May 2010 , entered into between the Contractor and the C.'iti of C leirwater C or MA.NDALAY PARK RESTROOM Ill" PLACE NMEN'1' - PROJECT' NO. 08-0064-1-11 a cripy cif ?tihich said ettntrttct is incorporated herein by reti`rence and is made a part hereof ,ts if ti;l'y t Opicd herd n. NOW 'I'llERP.-TORE, THE CONDITIONS OF -1.1114 OSLIC,ATION ARE SUCH, that if" the Contractor shall in all respects cotnpli with the temts and conditions of stud contract, including the one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder. including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement for Ends. I-orm of llropotal, Form of Contract. Form of Surety Bond, instruction- to liidderS, General Condition,, wid l ecllnictil Specifications) :ttid thc i'la.ns and Specifications therein referred to and made a hart thereof, and such altcmiticins is ma} be m:ti)e in said Clans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the said. 0.,,ner tigainst and from all cots. expenses. daina,tcs- injury Or conduct. want of care or .kill, ne?.?ligence or de:fauit, including patent inf7-inakmients on the part of the said Contmclor indents tin Clnpl0VCCS_ in tfae LvCCtatit)n or pci-l'Ormatick of paid contract, lilt: ludinL_ crr4prl. M t1 fza-nished b% the Contractor, and further, if such "Conir;,ctoi- or "Ct??nrttct??r:" :hall promprk rrak: )J`mints to all persons suppliing hint. them or it. labor, nizac iai. and supplies used direct[.% or indireLlIV by said Contractor, C"ontrictors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, Ili tile prosecuhot; of the work provided liar to said Contract. this obligation shall he 4uid. othzn,, i e, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severalk agree to pa% W the 0wrier an4 difference bee een the `tint to v6ich thk: ,,;lid Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract. and that VdIlCh the ( )'NlWr be obliged to pay fOr the completion of said s+ork by contract or when ke. &-, aw, dani a,-,c:s, direct ur Mdirect, or con-e luential, vdilch stud Owner may tlstint) can account til snch work. or tnt accx011111 tit tlrc faihne of the said Contractor to pnaperlt and ill all t}'tin??;. i:ecp and execute all the pro%,?ion? c,t said cx?ntract. .rut Hid t "mi CONTRM,"Y BOND t2) ;end the ?ittil ? ltintr:EClur :Inel ?Ufctl' hereh.' ltlrtllcr ?Ini? lhen7?el.e?. tllell' til1Ci<e?•?esr?. C'SCU(??fs, administrators, and :assit._'ns, jointl, and tet?rallt 0- "1 they c?lll tmpI, and f tlty prr>tec:t he paid Ov.,ner against, amJ v i!1 paN uii and all amounts, damages, costs and jud?umuats cdhich niaxbe rccol.ered against or which the Ovmer may be yelled upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of any dannages arising from the performance citsaid work, or Of the repair or rnaintenanc thereof, or the marmer of doing the same or tite neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper perf6rm;rnec of. the s?id .wrh hN- the Contractor or his t,gent.? or cryant . or the infringements of any par cnt rights hV TC:1S011 of the use cifany rn.iterial furnished or..ork- dome: a atiiresaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and `u ety herehy further hind thenr?cLes_ them strwti?s,ors ft?irc. executors, adnuntstrzutois. onus tssl ll? I)dv iifid ?t ii ral!!'r, 10 t,pa't t!ii: ov-tiir am `urn Witch tilt.: Owner max be compelled !1' pay hccause cif any lien for labor malenal f1m)IshCd for [tic vkmrk, embraced by Said C'01riraC1. And the said Surevv, tm the .aloe received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time. alteration or addition to tlae terms of the contract or to the work to be perforrne(! thereunder or tilt specifications aL.Companying the sarne shall in inv way affed its obligations on this hoed, and it does herebv .naive notice of any ue.h change., extension of tinge, alteration or addition to the te^rnls cut` the contract or to the work c}r to the specifications. IN "I`P;STIMO NY WHEREOF. \kimess the li xmds and seals of the pjrtic, lreretct thi; 27 h._. da\ of May 2_0 _o. _ 1 1 1 WIT '\ I,ss: LANA LEE RALEr Nat" Pubk - State of RO WI MY Comm. Exptra Aug 9, 2013 Caemisiton N DD 915109 Bonded Through NAtonot Notary Assn. C't)VNITERSIGNEll: Certus Builders, Inc. CONTRACTOR liv: Goo SCAN ?. ,;?1MN,?, Su eTec Insurance Company sl i .,n Michael L. Van Huis 1 L J 0 THIS RIDER MODIFIES COVERAGE TERMS IN THE BOND TO WHICH IT IS ATTACHED To obtain information, make a complaint or assert a claim, or if you have a dispute concerning your premium, you should call the Surety's toll free telephone number for information at: (866) 732-0099. You may also write to the Surety at: SureTec Insurance Company 9737 Great Hills Trail, Suite 320 Austin, Tx 78759 512-732-0099 Terrorism Risk Exclusions Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Construction Contract and Bond, the Bond to which this Rider is attached does not provide coverage for, and the surety thereon shall not be liable for, acts of terrorism, riot, civil insurrection,"acts of war or armed hostilities or other national or international calamity, directly or indirectly frustrating performance of, or directly or indirectly causing any loss or damage under, the Construction Contract for which this Bond was issued. Warranty Time Limitation Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Bond or bonded contract, in no event shall Surety have any obligation for any loss occurring or claim made by Obligee more than twenty-five (25) months after the date on which Principal has substantially completed the work under such contract. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Exclusion of Liability for Mold & Environmental Hazards Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Construction Contract and Bond, the Bond to which this Rider is attached does not provide coverage for, and the Surety thereon shall not be liable for, molds, living or dead fungi, bacteria, allergens, histamines, spores, hyphae, or mycotoxins, or their related products or parts, nor for any environmental hazards, bio-hazards, hazardous materials, environmental spills, contamination, or cleanup, nor the remediation thereof, nor the consequences to persons, property, or the performance of the bonded obligations, of the occurrence, existence, or appearance thereof. Important Notice Regarding Calculation of Premium Adjustments to the contract price entitle the Surety to adjust premium charged. Adjustments in premium charged reflect the adjustment in risk to Surety, not a change in the bond amount. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Construction Contract and Bond, adjustments to the contract price or the premium charged shall not change the bond amount. 1 U 110 Insurance Company LIMITED POWER OF ATTORNEY Know All Afen by These Presents, That SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY (the "Company"), a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, and having its principal office in Houston, Harris County, Texas, does by these presents make, constitute and appoint :Michael L. Van Huis its true and lawful Attorney-in-fact, with fitll power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings or other instruments or contracts of suretyship to include waivers to the conditions of contracts and consents of surety, providing the bond penalty does not exceed Three Million Dollars and no/100 (53,000,000.00) and to bind the Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond were signed by the President, scaled with the corporate seal of the Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in the premises. Said appointment shall continue in force until 9.30111 and is made under and by authority of the following resolutions of the Board of Directors of the SureTec Insurance Company: Be it Resolved, that the President, any Vice-President, any Assistant Vice-President, any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: Attorney-1n-Fact may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and of behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements or indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney-in-Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and effected by the Corporate Secretary. Be it Resolved, that the signature of any authorized officer and seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached. (Adopted at a meeting held on 20'4 of April, 1999.) In Witness lFhereof, SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its President, and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 28th day of October, A.D. 2008. Y- SURETEC INS CE COMPANY ,titRr.h„• D B.J. K[r esident State of Texas ss:.. County of Harris On this 28h day of October, 2008 before me personally came B.I. King, to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Houston, Texas, that he is President of SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY, the company described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said Company; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Company; and that he signed his name thereto by like order, Mlehelie Denny Notary P4WIo State WJ Texas R , ter.. ?rre>tr, Aou ,Vtirt Michelle Denny, Notary P 611c My commission expires August 27, 2012 I, M. Brent Beaty, Assistant Secretary of SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Company, which is still in full force and effect; and furthermore, the resolutions of the Board of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. Given under my hand and the seal of said Company at Houston, Texas this Y- day of , 20 A.D. M. Brent eaty, Assis ant Secretary Any instrument issued in excess of the penalty stated above Is totally vold and without any validity. For verification of the authority of this power you may call (713) 812-0800 any business day between 8:00 am and 5:00 pm CST. ' CONTRACT This CONTRACT made and entered into this 2D day of , 20)h by and between the ' City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinaft r designated as the "City", and CERTUS BUILDERS, INC. of the City of TAMPA, County of HILLSBOROUGH and State of ' FLORIDA hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: ' That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: ' The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the t following: MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT 08-0064-PR FOR THE SUM OF: ONE ' HUNDRED FIFTY THOUSAND, ONE HUNDRED NINETY-ONE DOLLARS AND EIGHTY CENTS ($150,191.80) ' In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any ' advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and ' assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR ' DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS ' OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. 1 Page 3 ' CONTRACT (2) In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: ' In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: ' employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause. ' The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. ' It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the ' Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. ' It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful ' performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. 7 Page 4 Ir--, ' F 0 CONTRACT (3) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: uti ?i?c?o yto? zm, mar. Wilka/m B. Horne, II City Manager Countersigned: By: ?.?.? Frank Hibbard, Mayor-Councilmember 0 (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) u J (The person signing shall, in his own ' handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show ' his authority to bind the Corporation). Attest: thia E. Goudeau, Ci Clerk c? iGo L W5, l:,-C, (Contractor) -Df By: AO A ???????'(?EAL) Page 5 Assistant City Attorney ZIA r CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT (CORPORATION FORM) ' STATE OF COUNTY OF ' On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn, ' deposes and says: That he is the (TITLE) of CERTUS BUILDERS INC. a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at 2515 E. HANNA AVENUE, TAMPA, FLORIDA 33610-1365 (herein, the "Contractor"). t That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of 20 , with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of: ' MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT 08-0064-PR ' That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature ' nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work against the described property. That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in full satisfaction and discharge of said contract. That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract. ' The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. Sworn and subscribed to before me This day of 20 NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: CERTUS BUILDERS, INC. AFFIANT BY: PRESIDENT Page 6 PROPOSAL. BOND (loot to he filled out ifa certified Qheck is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: 't hat w:, the und4r.i ,ned, ' Certus Builders, inc.. a-, Principal, and SureTec Insural?«Conwany as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the C ity of Clearwater. Florida, in the sum of -ren Percent Dollars ( ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the pa,.ment'of which,, well and truly to be shade, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Certus Builders. Inc. as Principal, and SureTcc lnsurance Corn any as Surety, for work specified as; Mandalay Parr Restroom Replacement. all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, its accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor< all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice cif said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Signed this 30th day of April , 2010 (Principal must indicate whether corporat7on,'partnership, company or individual) The person signing shall, in his own handwriting„ sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title; the person signing for a corporation 1 must, by affidavit, show his authority to bind the corporation. Principal y: L Title /ZV,Z er t ` f? SureTek Insurance Company Surety At mey-ln-Fact S,mianV Crrttrax, Ikmd, and [lid Form.doc PagO Revised: Sit V2006 t THIS RIDER. MODIFIES COVERAGE TERMS IN THE BOND TO WHICH IT IS ATTACHED To obtain information, make a complaint or assert a claim, or if you have a dispute concerning your premium, you should call the Surety's toll free telephone number for inlsrmation at: (866) 732-0099. You may also write to the Surety at: Sure'Tec Insurance Company ' 9737 Great Hills Trail, Suite 320 Austin, Tx 78759 51.2-732-0099 Terrorism Risk Exclusions Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Construction Contract and Bond, the Bond to which this Rider is attached does not provide coverage for, and the surety thereon shall not be liable for, acts of terrorism, riot, civil insurrection, *acts of war or armed hostilities or other national or international calamity, directly or indirectly frustrating performance of, or directly or indirectly causing any loss or damage under, the Construction Contract for which this Bond was issuedMl ' Warranty Time Limitation Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Bond or bonded contract, in no event shall Surety have any obligation for any loss occurring or claim made by Obligee more than twenty-five (25) months after the date on which Principal has substantially completed the work under such contract. Exclusion of Liability for r Mold & Environmental Hazards Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Construction Contract and Bond, the Bond to which this Rider is attached does not provide coverage for, and the Surety thereon shall not be liable for, molds, living or dead 1 fungi, bacteria, allergens, histamines, spores, hyphae, or mycotoxins, or their related products or parts, nor for any environmental hazards, bio-hazards, hazardous materials, environmental spills, contamination, or cleanup:, nor the retmediation thereof, not the consequences to persons, property, or the performance of the bonded ' obligations, of the occurrence, existence, or appearance thereof. - - - - -- - ---------- Important Notice Regarding Calculation of Premium Adjustments to the contract price entitle the Surety to adjust premium charged. Adjustments in premium charged reflect the adjustment in risk to Surety=, not a change in the bond amount. Notwithstanding anything to ' the contrary in the Construction Contract and Bond, adjustments to the contract price or the premium charged shall not change the bond amount. t t t POA #: t ureTec Insurance Company LIMITED POWER OF ATTORNEY 910037 Know All Men by These Pmmts, That SURETE+C INSURANCE COMPANY (the "Company" ), a corporation duly organized and existing under the taws of the State of Texas, and having its principal office in Houston, Harris County, Texas, does by these presents make, constitute and appoint` Michael L. Van Huis its true and lawful Attorney-in-fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings or ether instruments or contracts of suretyship to include waivers to the conditions of contracts and consents of surety, providing the bond penalty dues not exceed Three :Million Dollars and no/100 ($3J)00,000-(4)) and to the same extent as if such bond were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate and to bind the Compan'}° thereby as fully seal of the Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratitving and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in the premises. Said apr1ointment shall continue in force until 9 30;11 and is trade under and by authority of the following resolutions of the Beard of Directors of the Sure`Cee Insurance Company: Bea Resoitied, that the President, any Vice-President, any Assistant Vice-President, any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with hill power and authority to appoint any one or roost suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: Auorney-in-Fact may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and of behalf of the Company, to execute- acknowletige and deliver, any anal all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements or indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability therenunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney-in-Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and scaled and tMeted by the Corporate Secretary. Be it Resolved that the signature of any authorized officer and seal of the Company, heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached. (Adopted or n meeting held on 20'* of April. 1999.) In Witness Whereof, SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY" has caused these presents to be sighted by its president, and its corporate seat to be hereto afTtxed this 28th day of October, A.D. 2008. SURETEC INS' CE COMPANY B ??{ 8.,1» K esldeat State of Texas ss: County of Harris y? On this 28h day of October, 2WO before ate personally came D.J. King, to the known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Houston. Texas, that he is President of SURETEC INSUPAXI CE COMPANY, the company described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said Company; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate scat: t2tat it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Company; and that be signed his name thereto by like order. vw . gleamy ft tta Michelle Denny, Notary PAW My commission expires August 27, 2012 I, M. Brent Beaty, Assistant Secretary of SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby ewify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Company, which instill in full force and effect; and furthermore, the resolutions of the Board of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect Given under my hand and the seal of said Company at Houston, Texas this i, day of ?Z'0-4 L- 20 f,; „, A.D. AT: Bretrt eaty, /TL)-Assts ant Secretary Any Instrumont issued In excess of the pawlty stated above is totally void and wittuout any val€dtty. For verification of the authority of this power you may call (713) 812-0800 any business day between 8:00 am and 5:00 pert CST. a F'lE AN't"E° l_ f'o be filled ?11 ;?r ?i L ? t .t?ef if ti' f'i'=, -1 a STATE OF 1,OR I P.? ' £'OUNTN'- OJ- i 1 i -. ?pp ?}p?'??'x i l"? . A.0. rt i? c bcbg duly jj d? wirri, ? _ ?'.:C i4t 1 X11 • -1 f y it ?. . _ ,jwvat"m t ;.p>;rit zew and wxNim „ntW and b vitlttc o the Ltt? s 4 1hv Smc A (°}twNla , and hiving (i? tit'7i7C'Ittat (illi?c? X21 A1. \11 it t tlthcl ti lv± Bit ho f4 il(Ti k1 "K Ch- iit,gd,, mimic 1-oo's and ,.. qq' q ..... .. 1 ` . 5 Aili :nt lurther saws that i4 i4 t(_}I i NY Nounw t { (il ct t o ltic l'?`ir?oralwn, t-; milt?` isi2ttrf i& U) ;tin the [?Cjw t; by t i"cL f i 11 r k: sttU 01 jzFik,' ypi Or waKI w wiratUm 1» e it ic (i; t4i 0, 1 Li. 3 : !`,last ?4f1?t1?C2' ? 1?It?t;:?ittiil ttt ?? Ir3t4? tit" E4 ? (F.ttll(til (?( lflti Ith(f?iltl i`l 1>itl•c lii;n If Eq W Ain! ?ttirn i0 hc'huc znt lt;i5 €il- y t) 1`1 f F'kiitM" 17 puyyp? . two o • E t "214.2012 Do 2S y 1 4p°: p n;)t tarip in?mic w '4Calary _ _ _ _ __?. i itt?: t+r i,:nk, u!"I ??ttu! %,I . ii Dui" t t 1 I STATIF OF FLORIDA N "ON -COLLUSION Al F' D.kN t 1 CM NTY OF it l d ,Ci `? ?,?-` C4.° ? t•?t" }? ii1L`. i},tii ti t:1t ?-'`.ttT[l_ fi[1C thst ,Y.- k? V re the -,4Art`, 111 :n32':h tht ;t)IL? t1l;l Pr+k1)t> J ul Bid. that -t1?11 Rid 1?, 2(ttlll1tlC 1I?l(jIWt CONANIvC Or that Jai,. hitll!C" o 'list i t1 I311'}:1??1:.. P;lt:;:'?:*tC:t.1 1[} ?dl h,11 ':i it) a hu, 'ltttSi %tiZA\ \-wIl am ttthcf 1, I' I QII th): s<Inlc coi":trlict: that s<lid bidder lw nol ?C'1lttiiC' 1. cwi,plI1:d. C-tlIlI1I4'cd. o .tLlIt CtI, dIrCtt1% or I', d!rcC! tlllf; xlt btddcl? Itt lit ptli tit <t 'hoili ilw 'v 18-11 ,i;c h 0II41- 1?clsol{ ?h,.il? :?ftal;l, Sloni h3ddllt dl;t? 1t.'s:? }Ertl i'i :.ai itixiJ'i cr, d iIiillrLv.if'i 'a te.:}3t 01 -0 Cs?Illtllalll attC?T? or corl'Crence, v lth uRL. }c15i?Il, io t1V lht hill _?f7Cc` t1I atfltllll or of w othcr h1ddcT, or to of Itl ?l'l'ISTC lttl . i ";lid hi1 IN IC`:'- t7! 11"'A tt( 1 1IS1 t?tl1C'C bltiljt s2? tl(; tci?iC<itl, ?1CldIt t5I t l dlCill il` t} add Tula'-_'4 I,' l nst Ulf' O u, of (1car-wxC! , HI j Ada, or Gilt 11cI„orl Of flcrsoilS Illtti ri titr d ill the prof -N I`1C J .)Iltr3ei ,lilt', 11-o'= <111 ';tatol',lctll's cofli'u1wd in .lid pfopwt4 d or 1'1id _IIf' true-. ',md flmhcfr tlrit Sllcll ltidki i has not dlreak or Illdlr«tly Ntlhttllticd thus bid. o 111'' Colll utl' Illerctlt. Cyr dMIIVIe d U-1for1ll4itiOll Or fkltFl rclaui thcrcto Io am at tc(Icialion or to n\ mcmfz l I wlc.t 11)"rCktt. 1I? 1aI1 4ww'om to and suh,:?c<ih.nd bct,_'re me this `Jt .? Llay of i1-),-2 '1_ µ1... --.-._.' 2€t ! t I'?:?t?ln uhit? wlt" J1. SUMKR * trryr POW • Stdo of Oft PA 01 IiAtrcomm,1 fty s. 8018 com"W"I" 0 00 sum Pot _,1 `_, "1 t L l?I?f)F't }x:11, {Ij j'() i'ilV (AT"YO C:'1T lR'1'1`AT1t+. ,1°1.,ORIDF1., for ltANDALAY PAR RVS'I R0O N1 t7I`PLA(`I'VlEl' T - PIt1).1ECT N(). 08-t?tit,4- 1g!4i ti ?l("ar 11C;t o`h rllt?Cl tn? dc`ttial li; `.Clz?. ,tlt tt1 .ilci ?rdd'tcc: ttttli tjiC COIJI,10 d0,111tl1CWI. 31t .Il cl 'l1AitiDALAY PARK R `s i ROtall RVI'LM LNIE N ° PltOJEC-I N0,08-0064-PR Drivwfinis Prepared by Plisko Architcctarck, 1,%. "1IA City of Clearwater -Engineering apartment ter: 1?i?i,ier ntntt takw ;<t,tdi ,f the list that cl; on thcuL hi proposal he ::ec4•l?tecl xid the documents 3 c3 b? th 1-icldcr to %Oio i an a,.vard is n1.ldc anal h} tho i «thclal; autliori'r.c:d to do so on he'ialt of u?1 n4 shall 1, Lonsidrred a binding contract the t_it? =t Clramatrr. Flk'I'da. that no su h sw_rd (,1 1 `-lthout a certili:ate f -orl) the finance Dirccutr Out Iuncls are rt%ailaHc to cower the ?:,ost o We ??ork tc? K: done. car %%itltwit the ,rpplo%: 11 of 111c Cit, at,o let' as lo ,1 101111 aild Ic .ilit? o thc- contract and all ' the,xrtincnI doCLI rents relxin?_, ffiet o h 3%tntg, l-en :1ppni\c:i h} ,iid Cot} titt<>metc and such bidder i . i ht : h.1, ,e d %k A this notice. ?i? ?t "llir )!`11=e' ?Fttl'ti'ti??1.:1 f^R?:Icr ..h.O t.C1a3C? 1T1at ?) ti o;;I? ?' .;e»7 i''c.'TSt4? _ t?t7Tiil?`fn`,. t?' r?:9rit;'; inuzr t d in tli1? filrohxtsal, ale nanr,cci 1.l this Yr?+ rc}?al. tt?rlt itc, rtes 1rc fur'} C\ tutit.iec3 :i?; \?lees iticnl :nt. InstrttcUol?s to Biddrrs, C'ontiact Slxciticatic?ns, t'lan?, ?+ui?picnlGnt,ll ?l?ccll,c.ltlr?lE . {,?ncral t e?ttcfitic?ti>. pedal I'rct> ?sio,tt. and t'onLra a l and, that h4 or h1s rellre,elttal VC has trade such jn4,?tl ii1€?':T a? r? nEC '?C'T?' to C'-Ctc'rrt11t1C tllc' CharaviCr ?:Iid CXtCrki <?t h l4d 1 Anil l1C 1rt?1Nhtti ,ind a ?r«s that it the Proposal accepted. he ?41i1 contract wlth the. ('ity oft `lt<3rskater. Florida. in the fotltl eft conti'cict; i1cr:to anniltc1 to p rw fide t}1f nccO-arY la c)r, I11a?t TialS. 111j1t ht1leI eCltlthrniCnt. tttal or impetus- do all the wort: required to complete the contract xk,thin the tttne metlttoned in the C3en,,Tal E;c,nclitirms .1nd according to the rrquirerTlents M the ("I (it CleaiA atcr.. Flt>rida. is herein mid hers iitalter svt, toy; tlt. <mdl fUrni,Ii the requix,l surety bond,, ['Or the 1'011 n? ins prices to wit: ?,3;-A t .,.??o.?.. Vond Ind "4i t=c+rr i doc_ V,:- 10 f,", t ,"A t 1 '1?itrt t t PIZ( )111( 11N NV 1? I1 ilic <?1C?t?itt l?:i?i+t??sfl ?11<ill 1 C' tct`.pl :I C`? till," (ItS of and the ^h.Sta CSi1 iIE<tt <i Sct ;it3ti1tc31 iyoFril.it t tt? talcd t 1 th?: ? i? hi t11 'Slt ' rt II i1IlIIC:1?6c d the .tt ll', Ul)t1?t11 ldt'tI Illlittt' tli<It Ills lIrICICi ?I "Itc.'CI thl? ?1`1,.I)Jiw tl t11t G?l li ?t_°.let_ .Ind 1*hcfc,t1)t1n tlis, ti 1.i 11 11,111 ?1;Id wi,i, ut Cf1.: E?1tIl; I itlt'<h t?. d 11I?i 1CCc1II,PXI4in'. tht?, 11roposa1, ;11>111 ? lortcrtc?tl be 't t_Il;G' 'l7`.' (?!`l1,SC +!l tlh' ?. ILL dot t 1itt;14" 11;`!- 1'lutit;t, alltl tltC :111` ;11110Ultt ilf ;;SS.I 'I t:C?w "?h4i(1 T`i' ret.tisletl h; the tit%. or ii the [)r l)?? ?tl i+lnJ IPC the Lull il!IOU,11 t)t"vudl hlllti 1`Zd1 ht- pail. tF` t;tL Is sIlplIlxc;1 or liquid:itet? ti;ul?,I,?sr i)t;}ery'o'c. tilt- lord to tc1-tilh:d chclk ;k cttllpo[1;111?: !131; Prorii)sri 1. t)r'lw :sll ount of said hick. -i::t l f ,c rciUF L%J 10 dic tI idcr,:II rncd :1?, ;peclt-?c I hcrcmr Vla,dlz:d 11?:1eto is a good o,. ct'Siiit;t ch.cin _... ?I 1 >t i t C X 0 1?;l a }.I: II F ttlt t i tiE} l t7 11 1 L 1 ??im a r?ir}#rntam ot`tW',, of t'oI}trarttfr's ttlta; bid .>ntou,it). 'J 1 i li1: ' u'll rl.tr tc and Ie'tilell I?i ? `: !.11 ;ill 11t:rtil.,n,, <It it ():SrFtt '1 tilt Cc' Leif IIl t1;t jt?F't c t?IIl hid are a:; (1' t?Cl ? altt?ti, -'t;e the Il;irtti:` ttitl ?1.It r 4 e, t1 the Pry s1 cnt and ail:"itltt?. If lllrll t1t''larltlel:>1),p. Clle r1.U11c*? Alit atlclre„cs o dic 111c Sll ?t r t)r (h9rtCG f? ! ?.' I?Iti4lct 511:111 ItSt 11.'t 1tIlIP 111 Il;tlllt' 1)l11 ::,o tllt' "litrlii' ell .1t;?' 1fi I'ti)il ?%oh v ht?m, I•icI i?-. 11.1 am !%p, such Ih'S'y[t.Y?? tEt`.1tr,.l' .. elfrithmrltt; etl?l)Ittt?r?ellt nr ?x+siblc? I'?enriii_ :?hetlcr slily-ctltttractt)r, rrlatcrialli?<1i1, rt.?etlt. ?ul)1?1i?1. #?r iSil[)ti??er ! t'0E11 Sil_'tSlt tIi`km diL x,C` ird 00111ti itltitr3Ct It3 th(: 1`tttl&r1. ' t(: {%!1 a}t t?. t??'ems "y .x t:.'-1"" j l . ............. y _ Sip I I ? " I J t,: I . t 1 (t ht: hithiz-r must it1 licate whether Corixtr liom Partlicr"hip. Company or Irttli; Id IwI I_ k !tticI1 I? I u PRt)VOSAL IlC jK'r?as{) 51 17121!,: S til 4, tIY "fly+.?t?ti `t?:I1i tF-tliili?'. >t.;li 111c Pwl:;l???1,I €l..IttF?. 1ii'? trlt[t 1VSf6i7? :1JE?. }Si`, ItitC, hQr(: tI)C 11 Iti0 } SiLlII'T)I' 10i it?t Es ?I tl i£?II 1' other thx,, fl c Prc,.Idtait t`-r % ICC E?F'C`,It. 0111. ?ic I??z::•?. ar?l <<i;t?'tt. ?hcl>4 Ill"; till 11ol ill. t<a bind Ott- colp ,6,0101' :itl itd? Addrtts ofBidder: 5 Ar+`r+? ...? ? ? _..__...._.?.? _....__ (?itv t1T?Ct ??ii1ti. ( d F ? J Ll It t7dc 3 rlilodav of AD- 20 1 :;[[6V1 Wofal For"I .?JIiidI,gym,,to, 11. 1" 1 1 1 crj'N t)1 t i.lA16 ,ATF- MANDNLAV PARK K1'-,M )t}tit R1 Pl,ACFNl N r- i'IM-11--t 1 Nt)_ W -iHt 4-PR II1:;l't1fth Jo?iov t' i.il.f?FlC?ti 6?`t'c'TLCtj III?Z' 11 Llail?C Eta ?'6?.('_ ±il ': Wdcn(1i 111', D ate:.__- . _ Ad&nd'im Not 1 _ iaE?Cti4.j[111, o. Date-- „ ri 1ll:?l?lft!!I; ,Nil. lte"--: ? A.;3.?.?.iiduln No Date:.. AdjenJum No. Date ? l'l1?11132`: NJ Date: -1 t Y'?C , Sr w {`?a3ljc ?,f 1il?l?icr '? _. I, ?zw J, r 11111M It`s i?[tK)!'t1 .fit i)I>I 11ti 1I titt„_ i i'R(Mi't t NfiANDALAN PARK RUSYKI I(13t IMIL M VNIENT 1'itOM T N' O-_ 114-tttlf>d 1% t ?}?(H II}j llfti5 ! L ?1??1(?i\C r?11? { y I7 . ??.., ui> S.At. *h it aL, ix ta>, .,t •. a S +.. E.'. t c ??. , ( .? .. ?r .l a . t, k; - ) .. .. . r I , . ., s Ihssd t u tS? I tgiat"P hil( r kuf< at ?. ,• t•tin,a ? 1 tl,n? .r... t E. •+iYSi F Pt I!`k ..1 t1:.'iF E O1 lid ,( s •. { - t - _-_ •.Ir a.l t>e ifi .•- 'k-r.t .!•? !*TF !!f 3? r ,. ..I .fi3.I t, t ?-a.iS?: i. t:. ; ? +; ti ? 4'7 h' l t J 3a fti i. u' t i t 4 .. -tiC1. ?.. i _- ??? y,?J ,,1''//y7??.y ..? J A OL) ? „Ijt ?. { (iy??p''0 R 2 f r o . • t...„ !t.:t' hn+•....MH'i s' ; - IC\SYW %t •1 ??nlllYltC'v1t "it.lUe-T. F<IY- x?Zls74'M'\a'F?.?I> ([f{1??'E?s' "•:ts(€. °+ } 1 1 N yr@ p 'I1.?"+AY? x ,, t I eca :,.yy?.. ? .,lrr,. (494?Ith.{ +.:;1(4v.IF11 ?1?r?fit}C J(t(F(i'AFtl7dfl"?•. '++j (? _ E .?; :. ?[ 7 2 :(k rh lS S ! [t "IAi3 :,>t -l =.'i ce +s•..<.. ffl. l't.i: .t#1 Vl?t' ? 7(p -7t* //__? ?.r? -7VC- -,-7 ' C+ ?s,z ?. A Ir AI.I., rt'bnA Ilse r ,r.il le I - ... ,? MC ? ? Pf??1.?aIlKCkaUWl.t.Qit?1+,?^1kil?.t, k h:Tfr°i?R}?rl I.I-l 4 ) i / J i,Imtall S• I'(. ?' `'+11? ±? sdc11AT. v`,u.I ur_luh ,?i 14tt.u???..C' l Ir#1+ ( ?/ ?j J 55" 1., ?•/ . :rhilt {willm • 6? Ii"lsinP:. J ? p 7 ? ?t:{tFj ? ?+?i?,yF .ff lC. .t e{4,. S t_wl .1 't _ ? . . ? hltor: - _? :.r:n ,?l?a,Yi? li. lbt .... r tr .I ?. f•x6 q - 7 ?s ti'? ?? ?G+"' ? ?.-,I i HAiE`i tay.". :1? tac li3Yk:1<i.d li{'Nl !(!"••tl r?.??) `i IC. ` K rl+nr. nu°dupii rvf?+?:. Its f , ae it13a EM M3 i?,t.+'xwt[fC' Fm 7 It'll t 1 W• t A fJ t? ?' ?06 ? j . n:Q G , i fulur u*.h.k .rK htt, }: i ? a ,?,(?l Inxao;rb 1 I S 5 L,14 q2y -J1-41117 1.7. L.,.ti l.xnr.us-:: 1«vr.t , x. p , i IltZt ' ' 1. %1 11 its( , = t tIf iii! t' r?.Is ...I%, `i 'I(c a w'fttoom', two,'h't'f ' NSdw' t j -T "11c" ;grpf'-t) f=? 1[ae '. r r ,. 0J.. e .. x It ? ..??». P"' (Ut,d 1.4 .7h}Li W111c.ll %WpK .tt \.141 1, 1 T 1.c 3NJ P It*7tj' ( I A 4, 1 1 1 ,. 'W o" l;c { It, I 3i . t:7 ii}$ ?i FtiC E•h $4.4 nr : I i.I ?^.-f,'?IS, I .c, Ito w.f f.. ll II: \:ilt[ it• 1?k5:E1 .1,. .;f (. is .... ,_. .. ate;.1[( a9 ;:ett 1, „>.iKtritiltl,?,l Cer1?aer, ?1._ ... ,,; for •.. U)01119"t.R%"0ttrl?ItI*M Ij%Alilt ,It liliterIIt %I'tlttk"1fI'\IJ%jIIIii r•.it*,r,t%fS t? htnA sIVIN VCR#I\ 1 u one N41 1M * 4Loei+)4q ` C"ne cA I i1lkMR'N4,k%*%IF ?T?Ctr }! t ? . ' . Alilt It I >laiIl"IsI$ E ^ wr vTtl-ovc ? . - - ` ? t G 1 `f i Q( lla "}4t?" 'Ctok? i (til*lgk '?FtVt Alit=til ?'-Iti, t?r}ll :aF 11 '.^„3, t, i11%. %J1 V 'tt . yap lk??? I WN r it 1'rI i. i .. . e .? ' ., >t t'r f i t ! !-. f I. < t . •. , 7t , -: t i ... , Si St l , 'J t ?jt r ? IE; _=1 '11_.'1 IIII)DU.K'S i'ROI'OSA"DDVND _U'VI -"t1_I__( ON fl_N-t F_D.. 1'Ro,IF(.'T: M.,V l)AL.AY PARK REST ROOM RE7'L-AC'ENI l- N'I' - PROJI'a `I NO. UY-tillbJ-I'R I rt:ISi I S'f UN11 1,1N11 V I-Al. U NI I t)_[ ?' . ((IS"I f'I:K L _ 13. F"Ilotvine iterhs i"chWcd in alletroate bid' " the prrslx-cute bidders 'ball c\nulne tine (b auings & Irehrncal ipc(Mlc.utnn, thv foli' tmn 1110. ,leill ill\ 1;11.c lit m iliir C •ll ljX4 G)'i hoc defit$ :h MV „i: 111. .:omrltt d,winitrnt' the crmtractt,r shall Ilichnk all tusl to wid itl`ces•,;ut- garb Ill'Ke iil/r inellie, 'lid rh -k ,h.ill hr 1,10o'k_d xulK,tlirrc ill Ow Iof 1 altenlale 1101m p(ocaicd to fulfill the designer ? m(cm of Ile comto,I dtvnmcnti .No addii1olt,d l ion.], ',ill pr(aided ht the S l mwl l;v ftcin", Acu ;h,-%tI: ,n the omird t tL.ciom; , I,, c,tnslnrct Ihr, Protect ' t Install (,-In,:h mchWule 41) P"VC' sec rm -A-,%v"e( line 110114 all SO 3-7u . f - 3 illings lie in to Ai"i steer manhole mid grout as rxcr,;a:t L F I cl! _ ,ii d:cad ck;ur uufs it, sIwciliod pmt drn.t'rr,u t ach 'L')l/ > g('O f•-iuch alurimitini sc•aritles% guilts 24 gougr incial. file .hall rv%,IC% "delch ot'Ilic Ilnt fad profilc ill re'cit'e the gutter sysicin. the Sinter system Shall hate ikg ,Guns vvcpt an the e,rrtwoN mitt ctvkYa shall be soldmd, the sal&wd Scams shall be temed Itii leaks, dote" spthlis nhamrninr curd ;hall be 4" rn d:'treat included as 11 c?in(plcic ststcnr dual fitted into lfic t,-rich sch 41) PVC piping and trap betatxn dm%rt,gxKrt and PVC shrill be chalked on thrim sides and a gap hnnatxn dw down spe,uUPVC adlaccnt to huihtint: t. ut"ructcn shrill pl"rtdc it shop dining sihltting pcofilc hemg Ilan Iccci ing file is-inch dumintun bullet system l 1 1211 ) 9 -'?-O It -6-1_0 y f iv unnp E ;:dtAlunl mead tctolu,g cater ""' uadcda}na7n ind I ix sclswatitwit 4 -d Ir)picalf and install aceoidulV. Ill ' m.undauirc imrallamv rci: trnmendali,tnb xmkttacltu Awl! hC rnpnnd In pr,toidr tt old loihl of 17n KIT'l l and ;a icquucd h% die 114'(W4 Buildillg Cutk'lint S11(j) drmili; rcqufwd and '(dillia d (4) the rtlchilcef fur aplitoval fv ulsiallalhin 1 \ t p 01 LI / L q ? V t Barrel vAult alumintim We wl'Goemd Rimfing Tvcho tllmgtes ,ir eytinl, insial ed aceordiarr it) lit nuurufarlufc "Yrhluitericfulwo l`; re;afdX to m1biurflce pr-:pU(8ll'w% tile c,"Arwor shall be required to prot"i(k alit.] tad of L IM MN I :uhf a' iciptiml by the Honda Ruilding (fide. slutpdix%%mL' n•quncd rind mhi111utd lu the A(chilect riff applu%id nfl(1 itten ar.owil st:tlcd draouui fo urlcnd the budding Itntrill it, the Rtnldim! I felt for uutallau(m of aluminum barrel l aulted ' nxdi"t; Uk sysicnt t 1 X0 u Sdik.d tipox) Fhiowing Surface flit Mell & 44"onxtl RcsmXmi f 4rt ivc fuel shall rclntun it, CaoMl Scaler riml tins tart ill nc'• has' hid t I S i I M AI 01 \l fl KNA I I- MAIS l Om-mb f, S N 1 9-77 1 I IN Ill Ri. 1 td 1 I'( IN 1 ING1::ra'1 • ' 111",,01M , INO 'I, Y 01 i l ll, 1?t'fi u r At f TF I I FNi : ',Nutt a unngrn t liuuh Shall alit)' Vlih7c up„C ttrillefr Appr.wai h, v x thcm:r rv file enulri . ds, t 3 yq 0 t 1 du, forld hit adduuatal Scope cat Work no indic ncd rn 111 rn i i 1 \ .ri t . . n ,- c a c Ow Hill „t (itar,tltic, (".1m: gym' I,nri. ,I'll utilixcd rl) the inyilrwusl:n it'll of his willrael shall N. rrfunic•d ire air none; h, tinnt thar:er ordel Jmow :;1.•.; ;m! : a the taxi''t , GR?\vl) Ti ill -MFArfRti:\I r rrl:Nts7andx 1v0 F1trr:,„??nh1":"?,+:1 sr?"y 3??175,? ' lil t Ii'i iit- i t f 11 'A It: Kt SL4\'f ti rill i m,lir it. S1 I!"! ' .I i (tic 1(FJf ? ;, . t t i 1 nil \1 [I-RNA I1 1!L\1? I Ill: \J. I NiSG?Lht"'li.[)S1i;V 1 NF i'rllFo1V iIll: 1 4141 414)x(11 11U i . ... . . Y:i k 1`h,Ill .( I I"! Ii .11\1 l [)[ 7FJc\li?tl 1iif] NP, r\ i RLSPO NYVI-,It'.11.IF'IFiII <A% isll:i)i i; 1i, JAI 444 \ii[ ')I ilti. 1'1(4 +TL"(; iii) 1'"A `;I:i( al S()<l \l 1" 1 Rit.llt 1t,ADI5 1F. ITRl.FN1 i_ONIIN(,Ir.;:( 1S It! iIIt \i iI b:SAfI i I 1 :h:•) I.F.( 1! U 1 1PR,i\ if)I , .; Ili: . . 1: ,i ; :li< 4s t ' ' I ( !+, \(l H1 I Ill: '.;( It. \1 •\lt Lin;-A'i P R)\ F;1 '\ I R 4 ".+ i. i i.i ,i 1:\I? \ 7 - . . . I'R.i OF( l ,: 1 . ..: 1L 4, 1